JP6489755B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention is related to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

  Conventionally, the variable display of the identification information (for example, a decoration) is performed based on the fact that a start condition for allowing the variable display of the identification information to start after the game medium enters the start area provided in the game area is satisfied. A specific game state that is advantageous to the player when a display result is derived by performing a variable display of the symbol, and a specific display result (for example, a combination of “hit” combinations) is derived as the display result. A gaming machine that becomes (for example, a big hit gaming state) is known.

  As such a gaming machine, for example, in Patent Document 1, a specific display (specific display in Patent Document 1) displayed when variable display of identification information is suspended is changed from a normal mode to a special mode (Patent Document 1). Then, a gaming machine is disclosed in which the character image 11 is changed to a display mode) and then changed to another display mode (a special display mode in Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-357878 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the player pays attention to the special aspect to some extent, but it has been desired to focus attention on the special aspect and improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that has improved the fun of gaming.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that performs variable display and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A plurality of types of winning areas (for example, a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a large winning opening, and a general winning opening);
Hold storage means for storing information relating to variable display as hold information (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit and the second special figure hold storage unit),
Specific display (for example, current display) in the corresponding display area corresponding to the variable display being executed and the hold display area (for example, the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb) different from the corresponding display area Specific display means (for example, the image display device 5 that displays the hold display symbol in the current display region 5Hc, the first hold display region 5Ha, and the second hold display region 5Hb) that can display the region 5Hc, the hold display symbol, and the like) ,
Display mode control means for controlling the display mode of the specific display (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control for controlling the display color of the hold display symbol);
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display;
Signal output means for outputting a signal (for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc.) that can specify the winning of the game medium (for example, information output processing is executed in the CPU 103 that executed the game control main processing) Part), and
The display mode control means can change the display mode of the specific display (for example, change the display color of the hold display symbol),
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode (for example, blue), a special mode (for example, white and gray) different from the normal mode, and a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. A notice mode (for example, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.) in which the ratio controlled to the specific state is higher than the normal mode and the special mode is included,
The display mode of the specific display displayed in either the corresponding display area or the hold display area is displayed in the special mode at any one of a plurality of timings, and the display mode of the specific display is the multi-timing display mode. The ratio controlled to the specific state is different between when the special mode is displayed at the first timing and when the special mode is displayed at the second timing later than the first timing.
The display mode of the specific display is changed to the notice mode at a higher rate when the display mode of the specific display is displayed in the special mode than when displayed in the normal mode (for example, FIG. In each hold display pattern determination table of FIG. 44, the display color of the notice mode from gray or white rather than the total value (or average value) of the determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode. The total value (or average value) of the percentage of the hold display pattern decision rate including the aspect that changes to
The execution frequency of the suggestive effect is higher when the display mode of the specific display is displayed in the special mode than when displayed in the normal mode,
The rate of change to the notice mode differs between the specific display of the special mode displayed in the corresponding display area and the specific display of the special mode displayed in the hold display area.
It is characterized by that.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(2) In order to achieve the above object, the game board according to the present invention is:
Identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative pattern) after a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) enters a start area (for example, a first start prize port or a second start prize port) provided in the game area. Based on the fact that the start condition for allowing the variable display to be started is satisfied, the variable information is displayed, the display result is derived, and a specific display result predetermined as the display result (for example, jackpot symbol) When a special symbol or a jackpot combination definite decoration symbol is derived, a game board (for example, a game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1) that becomes a specific game state (for example, a big game state) advantageous to the player. Etc.) and
A plurality of types of winning areas including the starting area (for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a large winning opening, and a general winning opening);
Reservation storage means (for example, a first special figure reservation storage unit and a second special storage unit) that stores the suspension information for the variable display of the identification information for which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has entered the start area. Figure hold storage etc.),
Variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information based on the hold information corresponding to the variable display of identification information for which the start condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 103 for performing the processes of steps S112 and S113, and steps S171 and S172 Processing control CPU 120 for processing),
A hold for displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display symbol) in a hold display area (for example, the first hold display area 5Ha, the second hold display area 5Hb, etc.) corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. Display means (for example, the image display device 5 that displays the hold display symbols in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb);
Display mode control means for controlling the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for controlling the display color of the hold display symbol);
A signal output means for outputting a signal (for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc.) that can specify the winning area and the number of winnings that the game medium has won is executed (for example, the game control main processing is executed CPU 103 executes information output processing)
The display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit from the current display mode to another display mode (for example, changes the display color of the hold display symbol).
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode (for example, blue), a special mode (for example, white and gray) different from the normal mode, and a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. And a notice mode (for example, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.) for notifying the rate of entering the specific gaming state,
The display mode control means includes
The ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the notice mode is higher when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit is the special mode than when the display mode is the normal mode. The display mode of the specific display is changed to the advance notice mode (for example, in the hold display pattern determination tables of FIGS. 25 to 44, the determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode The total value (or average value) of the determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the aspect that changes from gray or white to the display color of the notice aspect is higher than the total value (or average value) of ),
The display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit is changed from the special mode to another display mode at any one of a plurality of timings, and the display mode of the specific display is changed to a first one of the plurality of timings. The ratio of entering the specific gaming state between when changing from the special mode to another display mode at the timing and when changing from the special mode to another display mode at the second timing later than the first timing. To change the display mode of the specific display to another display mode (for example, the configuration 23),
It is characterized by that.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a specific aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(3) In order to achieve the above object, the game board according to the present invention is:
Identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative pattern) after a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) enters a start area (for example, a first start prize port or a second start prize port) provided in the game area. Based on the fact that the start condition for allowing the variable display to be started is satisfied, the variable information is displayed, the display result is derived, and a specific display result predetermined as the display result (for example, jackpot symbol) When a special symbol or a jackpot combination definite decoration symbol is derived, a game board (for example, a game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1) that becomes a specific game state (for example, a big game state) advantageous to the player. Etc.) and
A plurality of types of winning areas including the starting area (for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a large winning opening, and a general winning opening);
Reservation storage means (for example, a first special figure reservation storage unit and a second special storage unit) that stores the suspension information for the variable display of the identification information for which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has entered the start area. Figure hold storage etc.),
Variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information based on the hold information corresponding to the variable display of identification information for which the start condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 103 for performing the processes of steps S112 and S113, and steps S171 and S172 Processing control CPU 120 for processing),
A hold for displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display symbol) in a hold display area (for example, the first hold display area 5Ha, the second hold display area 5Hb, etc.) corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. Display means (for example, the image display device 5 that displays the hold display symbols in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb);
Display mode control means for controlling the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for controlling the display color of the hold display symbol);
A signal output means for outputting a signal (for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc.) that can specify the winning area and the number of winnings that the game medium has won is executed (for example, the game control main processing is executed CPU 103 executes information output processing)
The display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit from the current display mode to another display mode (for example, changes the display color of the hold display symbol).
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode (for example, blue), a special mode (for example, white and gray) different from the normal mode, and a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. And a notice mode (for example, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.) for notifying the rate of entering the specific gaming state,
The display mode control means includes
The ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the notice mode is higher when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit is the special mode than when the display mode is the normal mode. The display mode of the specific display is changed to the advance notice mode (for example, in the hold display pattern determination tables of FIGS. 25 to 44, the determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode The total value (or average value) of the determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the aspect that changes from gray or white to the display color of the notice aspect is higher than the total value (or average value) of ),
The first number is different from the first number stored in the hold information stored in the hold storage unit when the hold storage unit stores the hold information as new hold information. The display mode of the specific display so that the ratio of the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit corresponding to the new hold information is changed to the special mode when the second number is (E.g., configuration 28)
It is characterized by that.

  According to said structure, since a player pays more attention to a special aspect by paying attention to the number of the hold information which a hold | maintenance memory | storage means memorize | stores, the interest of a game improves.

(4) To achieve the above object, the game board according to the present invention is:
Identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative pattern) after a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) enters a start area (for example, a first start prize port or a second start prize port) provided in the game area. Based on the fact that the start condition for allowing the variable display to be started is satisfied, the variable information is displayed, the display result is derived, and a specific display result predetermined as the display result (for example, jackpot symbol) When a special symbol or a jackpot combination definite decoration symbol is derived, a game board (for example, a game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1) that becomes a specific game state (for example, a big game state) advantageous to the player. Etc.) and
A plurality of types of winning areas including the starting area (for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a large winning opening, and a general winning opening);
Reservation storage means (for example, a first special figure reservation storage unit and a second special storage unit) that stores the suspension information for the variable display of the identification information for which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has entered the start area. Figure hold storage etc.),
Variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information based on the hold information corresponding to the variable display of identification information for which the start condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 103 for performing the processes of steps S112 and S113, and steps S171 and S172 Processing control CPU 120 for processing),
A hold for displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display symbol) in a hold display area (for example, the first hold display area 5Ha, the second hold display area 5Hb, etc.) corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. Display means (for example, the image display device 5 that displays the hold display symbols in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb);
Corresponding to the variable display of the identification information being executed, the current display means for displaying the specific display in the current display area (for example, the current display area 5Hc) (for example, the image display for displaying the hold display symbol in the hold display area 5Hc) Device 5),
Display mode control means for controlling the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display means and the current display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for controlling the display color of the hold display symbol);
A signal output means for outputting a signal (for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc.) that can specify the winning area and the number of winnings that the game medium has won is executed (for example, the game control main processing is executed CPU 103 executes information output processing)
The display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit from the current display mode to another display mode (for example, the display color of the hold display symbol is changed). Such),
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode (for example, blue), a special mode (for example, white and gray) different from the normal mode, and a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. And a notice mode (for example, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.) for notifying the rate of entering the specific gaming state,
The display mode control means includes
The rate at which the display mode of the specific display is changed to the notice mode when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit is the special mode rather than the normal mode. Change the display mode of the specific display to the advance notice mode (for example, in the all period hold display pattern determination table, the all period hold display pattern including a pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode) The total value (or average value) of the determination ratios of the all-period holding display pattern including the aspect that changes from gray or white to the display color of the notice mode is higher than the total value (or average value) of Etc.)
The display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit is set to the special mode at any one of a plurality of timings, and the display mode of the specific display is set to a first timing among the plurality of timings. The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of entering the specific gaming state differs between when the special mode is selected and when the special mode is changed at the second timing later than the first timing. (Eg configuration 18 etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves. (5) In the game board of (1) or (4) above,
The display mode control means changes to the special mode when the display mode of the specific display is changed to the special mode at the third timing among the plurality of timings and at a fourth timing later than the third timing. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display of the special mode to another display mode is different (for example, Configuration 19). ,
It is characterized by that.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the timing which becomes a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

(6) In the game board of (1) or (4) above,
The display mode control means changes to the special mode when the display mode of the specific display is changed to the special mode at the third timing among the plurality of timings and at a fourth timing later than the third timing. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio for changing the display mode of the specific display of the special mode to another display mode is different (for example, , Configuration 20 etc.),
It is characterized by that.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the timing which becomes a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

(7) In the game board of any of (1), (4) to (6) above,
The display mode control means sets the display mode of the special display to the first specific display only when the display mode of the specific display is set to the special mode at a predetermined timing of the plurality of timings. Change to an aspect (eg, configuration 21),
You may do it.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the timing which becomes a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

(8) In the game board of any of (1), (4) to (7) above,
The display mode control unit includes a change suggestion effect executing unit that executes a change suggestion effect that suggests changing the display mode of the specific display (for example, the configuration 22).
You may do it.

According to the above configuration, since the player pays attention to the change suggestion effect, the interest of the game is improved.
(9) To achieve the above object, the game board according to the present invention is:
Identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative pattern) after a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) enters a start area (for example, a first start prize port or a second start prize port) provided in the game area. Based on the fact that the start condition for allowing the variable display to be started is satisfied, the variable information is displayed, the display result is derived, and a specific display result predetermined as the display result (for example, jackpot symbol) When a special symbol or a jackpot combination definite decoration symbol is derived, a game board (for example, a game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1) that becomes a specific game state (for example, a big game state) advantageous to the player. Etc.) and
A plurality of types of winning areas including the starting area (for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a large winning opening, and a general winning opening);
Reservation storage means (for example, a first special figure reservation storage unit and a second special storage unit) that stores the suspension information for the variable display of the identification information for which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has entered the start area. Figure hold storage etc.),
Variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information based on the hold information corresponding to the variable display of identification information for which the start condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 103 for performing the processes of steps S112 and S113, and steps S171 and S172 Processing control CPU 120 for processing),
A hold for displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display symbol) in a hold display area (for example, the first hold display area 5Ha, the second hold display area 5Hb, etc.) corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. Display means (for example, the image display device 5 that displays the hold display symbols in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb);
Corresponding to the variable display of the identification information being executed, the current display means for displaying the specific display in the current display area (for example, the current display area 5Hc) (for example, the image display for displaying the hold display symbol in the hold display area 5Hc) Device 5),
Display mode control means for controlling the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display means and the current display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for controlling the display color of the hold display symbol);
A signal output means for outputting a signal (for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc.) that can specify the winning area and the number of winnings that the game medium has won is executed (for example, the game control main processing is executed CPU 103 executes information output processing)
The display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit from the current display mode to another display mode (for example, the display color of the hold display symbol is changed). Such),
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode (for example, blue), a special mode (for example, white and gray) different from the normal mode, and a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. And a notice mode (for example, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.) for notifying the rate of entering the specific gaming state,
The display mode control means includes
The rate at which the display mode of the specific display is changed to the notice mode when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit is the special mode rather than the normal mode. Change the display mode of the specific display to the advance notice mode (for example, in the all period hold display pattern determination table, the all period hold display pattern including a pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode) The total value (or average value) of the determination ratios of the all-period holding display pattern including the aspect that changes from gray or white to the display color of the notice mode is higher than the total value (or average value) of Etc.)
The display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit is changed from the special mode to another display mode at any one of a plurality of timings, and the display mode of the specific display is changed to the plurality of timings. The specific game when changing from the special mode to another display mode at the first timing and when changing from the special mode to another display mode at a second timing later than the first timing. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode (for example, the configuration 23, etc.) so that the ratio of the state becomes different.
It is characterized by that.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves. (10) In the game board of (2) or (9) above,
The display mode control means is configured to change the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode at a third timing among the plurality of timings and a fourth timing that is later than the third timing. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the ratio of changing from the special mode to the other display mode is different (for example, the configuration 24).
It is characterized by that.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the change timing from a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

(11) In the game board of (2) or (9) above,
The display mode control means is configured to select the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode at the third timing of the plurality of timings and the third timing. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio for changing from the special mode to the other display mode at a later fourth timing is different (for example, Configuration 25). ,
It is characterized by that.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the change timing from a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

(12) In the game board of any of (2), (9) to (11) above,
The display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display of the special mode only when changing the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode at a predetermined timing of the plurality of timings. Change to the first specific display mode (eg, configuration 26, etc.),
You may do it.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the change timing from a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

(13) In the game board of any of (2), (9) to (12) above,
The display mode control means includes period suggestion effect execution means for executing a period suggestion effect that suggests a period until the display mode of the specific display is changed from the special mode to another display mode (for example, the configuration 27) ),
You may do it.

According to the above configuration, since the player pays attention to the period suggesting effect, the interest of the game is improved. (14) In the game board of any of (1) to (13) above,
The display mode control means determines a timing for changing the display mode of the specific display when a game medium enters the start area (for example, configuration 6).
You may do it.

  According to said structure, determination of the timing which changes the display mode of specific display can be made easy.

(15) In order to achieve the above object, the game board according to the present invention is:
Identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative pattern) after a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) enters a start area (for example, a first start prize port or a second start prize port) provided in the game area. Based on the fact that the start condition for allowing the variable display to be started is satisfied, the variable information is displayed, the display result is derived, and a specific display result predetermined as the display result (for example, jackpot symbol) When a special symbol or a jackpot combination definite decoration symbol is derived, a game board (for example, a game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1) that becomes a specific game state (for example, a big game state) advantageous to the player. Etc.) and
A plurality of types of winning areas including the starting area (for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a large winning opening, and a general winning opening);
Reservation storage means (for example, a first special figure reservation storage unit and a second special storage unit) that stores the suspension information for the variable display of the identification information for which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has entered the start area. Figure hold storage etc.),
Variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information based on the hold information corresponding to the variable display of identification information for which the start condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 103 for performing the processes of steps S112 and S113, and steps S171 and S172 Processing control CPU 120 for processing),
A hold for displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display symbol) in a hold display area (for example, the first hold display area 5Ha, the second hold display area 5Hb, etc.) corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. Display means (for example, the image display device 5 that displays the hold display symbols in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb);
Corresponding to the variable display of the identification information being executed, the current display means for displaying the specific display in the current display area (for example, the current display area 5Hc) (for example, the image display for displaying the hold display symbol in the hold display area 5Hc) Device 5),
Display mode control means for controlling the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display means and the current display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for controlling the display color of the hold display symbol);
A signal output means for outputting a signal (for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc.) that can specify the winning area and the number of winnings that the game medium has won is executed (for example, the game control main processing is executed CPU 103 executes information output processing)
The display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit from the current display mode to another display mode (for example, the display color of the hold display symbol is changed). Such),
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode (for example, blue), a special mode (for example, white and gray) different from the normal mode, and a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. And a notice mode (for example, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.) for notifying the rate of entering the specific gaming state,
The display mode control means includes
The rate at which the display mode of the specific display is changed to the notice mode when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit is the special mode rather than the normal mode. Change the display mode of the specific display to the advance notice mode (for example, in the all period hold display pattern determination table, the all period hold display pattern including a pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode) The total value (or average value) of the determination ratios of the all-period holding display pattern including the aspect that changes from gray or white to the display color of the notice mode is higher than the total value (or average value) of Etc.)
The first number is different from the first number stored in the hold information stored in the hold storage unit when the hold storage unit stores the hold information as new hold information. The ratio of the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit corresponding to the new hold information is different from that when the number is the second number. Control the display mode of the specific display (eg, configuration 28, etc.)
It is characterized by that.

  According to said structure, since a player pays more attention to a special aspect by paying attention to the number of the hold information which a hold | maintenance memory | storage means memorize | stores, the interest of a game improves.

(16) In the game board of (3) or (15) above,
The display mode control means is configured such that when the number of stored hold information stored in the hold storage means is the first specific storage number when the hold storage means stores the new hold information. When the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is changed to the special mode, the hold storage means stores the new hold information when the hold storage means stores the new hold information. When the number of stored hold information is other than the first specific stored number, the specific display state corresponding to the new hold information is set to the specific game state rather than the special display. Control the display mode of the specific display so as to increase the ratio (for example, the configuration 29),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(17) In the game board of any of (3), (15) and (16) above,
The display mode control unit is configured to display the new hold when the number of stored hold information stored in the hold storage unit is the third number when the hold storage unit stores the new hold information. The number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means when the specific display displayed corresponding to the information is in the special mode and when the hold storage means stores the new hold information And when the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is changed to the special mode when the number is a fourth number different from the third number, the specific display of the special mode Changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode (for example, the configuration 30) so that the ratio of changing the display mode to another display mode is different.
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(18) In the game board of any of (3), (15) and (16) above,
The display mode control unit is configured to display the new hold when the number of stored hold information stored in the hold storage unit is the third number when the hold storage unit stores the new hold information. The number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means when the specific display displayed corresponding to the information is in the special mode and when the hold storage means stores the new hold information And when the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is changed to the special mode when the number is a fourth number different from the third number, the specific display of the special mode Changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode (for example, the configuration 31) so that the selection ratio of changing the display mode to another display mode is different.
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(19) In the game board of any of (3), (15) to (18) above,
The display mode control unit is configured to store the hold information stored in the hold storage unit when the hold storage unit stores the new hold information. The hold information stored in the hold storage means when the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is in the special mode and when the hold storage means stores the new hold information And when the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is in the special mode when the stored number is a number other than the second specific stored number, The display of the specific display of the special mode only when the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is changed to the special mode when the number of stored information is the second specific memory number Change the mode to the first specific display mode It is of (for example, construction 32, etc.),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(20) In the game board of any of (3), (15) to (19) above,
The display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display to another display mode at any of a plurality of timings, and changes the display mode of the specific display when a game medium enters the start area. (E.g., configuration 6)
You may do it.

  According to said structure, determination of the timing which changes the display mode of specific display can be made easy.

(21) In the game board of any of (1) to (20) above,
The variable display execution means includes variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of identification information to be executed,
When the display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display to another display mode during execution of variable display of identification information, the display mode control means executes an action effect that changes the display mode as a result of the effect, Depending on the variable display pattern of the variable display of identification information executed when the display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode, the ratio of the effect mode of the action effect to be varied or the ratio of executing the action effect is determined. Different (for example, configuration 7),
You may do it.

According to said structure, the display aspect of a specific display can be changed in a suitable aspect.
(22) In the game board of any of (1) to (21) above,
The display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display to the second specific display mode only when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode (for example, Configuration 8).
You may do it.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the example of the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine of FIG. It is a figure showing an example of main production control commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure which shows random number values MR1-4. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation category determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation | variation category determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the relationship between an example of the effect control command received by the effect control board side, and an example of the processing content performed by command analysis processing according to the received effect control command. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding display setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a shape of the hold display symbol according to production mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of a hold display symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example, such as a change timing of a hold display symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notification buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect production execution determination table. It is an example of the example of a structure of the corresponding table for determining a reference table based on a fluctuation pattern and the color of the current hold display symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reference table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a whole period holding | maintenance display pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows a mode before the game board is attached to a front frame, and after being attached. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko game machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko game machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine when a card | curd is inserted in the card unit. It is a flowchart figure which shows the process at the time of insertion which a card unit performs when a card | curd is inserted in a card unit. It is a conceptual diagram for explaining the relationship between a CU state and a card insertion state included in a card insertion notification command and a state information request command. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine when paying out and holding out a ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine when counting game balls. It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the counting process performed automatically when a game hall closes. It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the process of the count history data memorize | stored by P units. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of the process which reads the count log | history memorize | stored in P units to CU. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power-off and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the count response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the count request | requirement from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of the count response from a card unit to a pachinko gaming machine has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of the game ball addition result abnormality at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P platform and CU regarding an addition serial number. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P stand and CU regarding a count serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 1st and 2nd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 3rd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a request serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating another example of the operation | movement regarding a request serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating the opportunity of registration (update) and deletion (clear) of recovery information. It is a figure for demonstrating the encryption key used for communication between a key management server and communication control IC. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between a CU control part and a security chip (SC). It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between a CU control part and a security chip (SC). It is a figure for demonstrating the starting process at the time of power activation of a CU control part, and hall installation. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of power activation and normal start-up of a CU control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the process at the time of the power activation and factory shipment of a CU control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate maker code. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate initial stage key or a board | substrate shipping key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of board | substrate serial ID and a board | substrate authentication key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process in the case of inquiring about security board information. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a board | substrate authentication key authentication abnormality sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of a communication line disconnection (PIF) sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry timeout sequence of security board | substrate information. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry (collation) timeout sequence of gaming machine chip information. It is the schematic for demonstrating the communication performed between a main control part, the payout control part, and communication control IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the payout control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the main control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with communication control IC. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a recovery completion confirmation process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between the main control part and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence between a main control part and a payout control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power-off and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the game state notification from the main control part to the payout control part has not reached | attained. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when P stand connected to the game board development jig is connected to commercial CU by unit exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when P stand connected to CU for development is connected to commercial CU by unit exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when a game machine simulator is connected to commercial CU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process of the operating / non-operating information from a pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the historical information (machine history information) from the shipment of the game machine which concerns on this embodiment to disposal. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until shipping information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of shipping information. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until installation information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the installation information input into a machine history management center in FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow until removal information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow until discard information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the discard information input into a machine history management center. It is the schematic for demonstrating the history management of the front frame and game board which concern on this embodiment. It is the schematic of the table which memorize | stores the information of a frame, and the information of a game board, in order to perform machine history management of a front frame and a game board. 10 is a flowchart for explaining abnormality determination processing for management of a front frame and a game board by a machine history management center. It is a figure explaining the table referred with the flowchart shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball (also referred to as a game ball) as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball emitting device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. Thereafter, the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game. The confirmed special symbol may be different from the special symbol displayed during variable display.

  The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off as appropriate) may be included as a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED is different. What is necessary is just to be preset as a special symbol. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that the confirmed decorative design may be different from the decorative design displayed during variable display. For example, a decorative pattern other than the scrolled decorative pattern may be a confirmed decorative pattern.

  As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the special symbol game (also referred to as the first special symbol game) using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device. Synchronized with a special figure game using the second special figure in 4B (also referred to as a second special figure game), a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each is performed, and a fixed decoration that is a variable display result The symbol is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area 5H is arranged. In the display area 5H, a hold storage display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special figure game (the special figure hold storage number) in an identifiable manner is performed. The variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable ball apparatus 6B (for example, It is generated based on the start winning by passing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. In this embodiment, the same number of symbols as in the variable display that is being held (in this embodiment, such as a circle mark, a square mark, etc., hereinafter also referred to as a hold display symbol) is displayed as the hold storage display. By doing. One hold display symbol corresponds to one variable display held. As will be described later, the fact that the variable display is held (the hold display symbol is displayed) means that the hold data extracted at the time of starting winning is stored in the first or second special figure hold storage unit. Therefore, the hold display symbol is also displayed in correspondence with the hold data extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the first or second special figure hold storage unit. The variable display and data held on hold are also called hold storage. The held variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is represented by the hold display symbol displayed in the left area (first reserved display area) toward the display area 5H. The held variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is represented by the hold display design displayed in the area on the right side (second reserved display area) in the display area 5H.

  For example, the start condition of the special figure game (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is established by the occurrence of the first start prize where the game ball enters the first start prize opening. If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established, the first special figure holding memory number is incremented by one (increment) And the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when a second start prize is entered in which a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a special figure game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by one (increment) And the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the hold data (holding memory) is digested, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the second When the execution of the special figure game using the special figure is started, the hold data (hold memory) is digested, and the second special figure hold memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement). When the hold data is digested, the corresponding hold display symbol is deleted. Moreover, when the other hold display symbols are displayed in the display area in which the erased hold display symbols are displayed in the first hold display area and the second hold display area, the displayed hold display. For example, the symbol is shifted to the left display position (including the display position where the erased hold display symbol was displayed).

  The variable special display reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is also referred to as a total reserved memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  You may make it provide the indicator which displays the number of special figure holding | maintenance memory with the display area 5H instead of the display area 5H. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the first hold indicator 25A for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the display area 5H. And a second hold indicator 25B. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED). Here, the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are displayed according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the gaming ball does not enter the second start winning opening. To. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, so that the game ball can enter the second start winning opening. Put it in a state. Note that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, while the expanded opening state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. However, it may be configured so that the game ball is difficult to enter. As described above, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B has the first variable state (easy entry state) such as an open state or an expanded open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning port, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state (state where entry is difficult (including entry impossible)) such as a state or a normally open state where entry is difficult. The first variable state may be a state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening as compared with the second variable state.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first special figure holding memory number is predetermined. If it is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is less than a predetermined upper limit value. In this case, the second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball enters the big winning opening (for example, Cannot pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become. In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot enter the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball is difficult to enter the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when a game ball enters the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, for example, when a gaming ball enters another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain the winning ball by making the gaming ball enter the special prize winning port, and the game is more than the first state. The second state is disadvantageous to the person.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. An ordinary symbol (also called “ordinary diagram” or “ordinary diagram”) that is identification information is displayed variably (variably displayed). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose holding indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and is formed in a passing gate 41 formed in the gaming area (a gaming ball can be passed by a predetermined member. ) Is displayed by the gate switch 21.) The number of ordinary reserved storages as the number of effective passing balls that have passed is displayed.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In addition, a card unit that enables ball lending by inserting a game card as a game recording medium such as a prepaid card having a prepaid function is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). .

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of receiving a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting and transmitting a control command (such as an effect control command described later) as an example of information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 also has a function of controlling the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal hold indicator 25C, etc., and displaying various reserved memory numbers.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (detection signals indicating that the passage or entry of game media has been detected (the switch is turned on)) from various switches for detecting game balls, and the game control microcomputer 100. Transmit to. The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100, a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory, or a solenoid for a grand prize opening door. 82.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 performs all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the on / off operations in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. A function of causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on a signal (sound effect signal) from the effect control board 12, the sound (effect) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A processing circuit for executing sound signal processing for outputting sound (sound designated by a sound signal) is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on a signal (electric decoration signal) from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED A lamp driver circuit or the like that performs lighting / extinguishing driving (lighting / extinguishing according to the drive content indicated by the electrical signal) is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22 </ b> A and second start port switch 22 </ b> B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 is connected with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, such as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. The main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting a solenoid drive signal for driving the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door.

  A control signal (control command) transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted as an electric signal (details will be described later). Each of the effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to “0” in advance.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 is provided, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 is provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby realizing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the function of the main board 11 is realized). For the processing etc.). At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 102, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register different from the RAM 102. The random number value may be updated by updating the stored value periodically or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data etc. which comprise are memorize | stored.

  In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, for example, even if there is a power outage and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (so-called power outage), the backup power supply is powered by a predetermined period (for example, the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). Until the supply becomes impossible, the contents of a part or all of the RAM 102 are saved. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data stored in the backup RAM and backed up in this way is appropriately referred to as backup data.

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals are input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. The

  An information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall management computer (hall computer) is also mounted on the main board 11. Yes.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component (predetermined to the effect electric component). A process for realizing a function for executing the rendering operation) is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects, for example, effect control execution data (display control) associated with a determination value such as a process timer determination value. Data, voice control data, lamp control data, etc.) and process data including an end code.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the effect operation. Since the RAM 122 is not a backup RAM, the stored data is lost when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (that is, when there is a power interruption).

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 is based on a display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 120 (for example, the display control unit 123 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 by this command). The control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 is determined and executed. For example, the display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to perform variable display of decorative symbols and various types of effect display by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Control. As an example, the display control unit 123 only needs to be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a microprocessor for image processing called a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more generally a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  With the configuration as described above, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the sound control board 13 to output sound, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED via the lamp control board 14 and the like. Various effects are executed by performing lighting / extinguishing driving at, or displaying effect images in the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. The game value given in the gaming machine is directly payout of a game ball to be a prize ball or a score equivalent to this. The record information of the game balls and the score corresponding to the number of the game balls may be any value that can be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize according to the quantity. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for a second game on a gaming machine.

  In addition, the gaming value that can be given in the gaming machine is not limited to paying out a gaming ball as a winning ball or giving a score, for example, controlling to a big hit gaming state or a special gaming state such as a probable change state. In other words, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state is the first round number (for example, “15”) larger than the second round number (for example, “2”), and the variable that can be executed in the short time state. The upper limit number of times of display is a first number (for example, “100”) larger than the second number of times (for example, “50”), and the big hit probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The first that the probability of being a probability (for example, 1/20), the number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times of repeated control to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chunks (for example, “5”) Ren Chang (E.g., "10"), such as part or all of it to be, may include be a more favorable game situation for the player.

  As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is emitted based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. (The first start port switch 22A is turned on) or the like is satisfied. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The second start condition is satisfied by the fact that the 2 start port switch 22B is turned on). Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normal open state or closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2 (the gate switch 21 is turned on), the normal symbol display 20 performs variable display of the normal symbol. The usual chart start condition is established. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous normal symbol game has been completed. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed. Whether or not the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is set as “predetermined per symbol” as the predetermined specific display result is determined when the normal symbol game is started by the normal symbol display 20 or the like. Is determined (predetermined) before derivation display.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes “big jackpot” (specific display result), and the specific gaming state is advantageous for the player. It is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost”.

  As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “7” is a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, during the predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or the period until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls enter the grand prize opening and a winning ball is generated, the grand prize opening is continuously opened. A round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, a winning ball (game ball that has entered the big prize opening) is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. It is. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15”) is reached.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change” is included. For example, as a result of variable display of a special symbol, when the big hit symbol indicating the number “3” is derived and displayed, the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and when the big hit symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed, The type is “probable change”. When the jackpot type is “probability change” or “non-probability change”, as a round game in the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player (a jackpot opening state is opened). The normal opening round in which the upper limit time to be a predetermined time (for example, a first period such as 29 seconds) is executed for a predetermined number of times such as 15 rounds (15 times). Note that the big hit gaming state based on “big hit” when the big hit type is “non-probable change” is referred to as “non-probable big hit game state”. Also, the big hit gaming state based on “big hit” when the big hit type is “probable change” is referred to as “probability big hit game state”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit probability) may be controlled to a probability change state where the probability is higher than the normal state. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit gaming state is satisfied. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. The time-short state is a short-time end of one of a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) of variable display (special game) and the start of the next big hit gaming state. It is controlled to continue until the condition is satisfied first. Note that the remaining number of executions of variable display (such as a special figure game) until the time-shutdown condition is satisfied may be referred to as a time-save remaining number. The short-time state and the probability variation state are also advantageous for the player.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state after the non-probability big hit gaming state ends is a time-short state but does not become a probable variation state. In this embodiment, the gaming state after the probability variation big hit gaming state is ended is a short time state and a probability variation state.

  The normal state is a game state other than a state advantageous to the player, such as a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a short-time state, or a probability change state. The probability of “per figure” and the probability that the variable display result in the special figure game will be “big hit” is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  In the short time state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening than in the non-short time state that is not in the short time state such as the normal state. Alternatively, the state is changed between an enlarged open state and a second variable state (closed state or normal open state). For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is “general”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per figure”. By making the control longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. Thus, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time-short control” or “high base control”). Is done. By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is achieved.

  Time-short states are also referred to as “high base state”, “high base”, etc., and game states that are not time-short states are also referred to as “low base state”, “low base”, “non-time-short state”, “non-time-short state”, etc. Is called. The probability variation state in which probability variation control is performed is also referred to as “high probability state”, “high probability”, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is “low probability state”, “low probability”, “non-probability variation state”, “non-probability variation”. Is also said. The gaming state when in the probable change state and the short time state is also referred to as “high-accuracy high base state”, “high-accuracy high base”, or the like. The gaming state when the state is in the short-time state without being in the probable change state is also referred to as “low-accuracy base state”, “low-accuracy base”, or the like. The game state when the state is in the probabilistic state without being in the short-time state is also referred to as “highly accurate low base state”, “highly accurate low base”, or the like. The state that does not become either the short-time state or the probability variation state, that is, the normal state is also referred to as “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy low base”, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R In (variable display period), the decorative symbol variable display mode may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established).

  Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative design that has not yet been stopped when the decorative design that is stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination ("reach variation design"). Is also a display mode in which the variation continues, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R This is a display mode in which all or a part of the combination is changed and changed in synchronization.

  During the variable display of the decorative design, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a background image is displayed, An effect of reproducing and displaying different moving images is executed. These effects are called variable display effects together with the variable display of the decorative pattern itself (this is also an effect). That is, the variable display effect is an effect by an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a concept including the variable symbol display itself. Making the variable display mode a reach mode is one of the effects during variable display. In the variable display effect, in addition to the effect by the image (including the variable display of the decorative pattern itself) displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 along with the variable display of the special symbol, the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, effects such as lighting operation (flashing operation) in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included.

  In the variable display effect, a reach effect may be executed. The reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode. Reach effects can be achieved by reducing the fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern, displaying a character image (effect image imitating a person) different from the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5, or changing the display mode of the background image. It is an effect that performs an effect operation different from that before reaching the reach mode, by playing a video that is different from the decorative pattern, or by changing the change mode of the decorative pattern. The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. In this embodiment, a normal reach, a super reach A, and a super reach B having different production modes are prepared as reach productions (see FIG. 13 and will be described later in detail).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display of decorative symbols can indicate the possibility that the variable display status of decorative symbols will reach the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is executed depending on the mode or the like. The variable display effect is also included in the variable display effect. In this embodiment, the variable display effect is different from the effect in which the variable display mode is the reach mode. In this embodiment, a variable display effect such as “pseudo-continuous” can be executed, and whether or not to execute each effect operation in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side or the like. It is determined.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. This is the number of times that the decorative symbols re-variate in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As an example, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances of special combinations are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of the various types of lost combinations is displayed temporarily. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation display or changing the decorative symbol again immediately after stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the decoration design which is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol may be re-fluctuated after the decorative symbol is stopped to such an extent that the player recognizes that the decorative symbol once displayed is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, for example, as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) increases, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases. Thus, the player can recognize that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is performed by displaying the pseudo-continuous chance temporarily stopped, and the variable display result is increased as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. The expectation of becoming a “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the first start condition or the second start condition is established once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once or twice. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative design has been started 2 to 3 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations (revariations) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect may be, for example, four or five.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect is executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change (pseudo-continuous change). Also good. As an example, a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image may be displayed on the image display device 5 during the period of each variable display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. Further, for example, the most variable effect may be executed by performing an arbitrary effect operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and a lighting operation of another light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9.

  Note that “slip” may be performed as a variable display effect. In the variable display effect of “sliding”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or (2)) decorative symbol display area (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area 5L or “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or both), the decorative symbol is changed again and then stopped ( A temporary stop display may be performed), thereby performing an effect display for changing a decorative pattern to be stopped (or a temporary stop display may be performed).

  In this embodiment, as the effect mode of the variable display effect, there are a plurality of effect modes in which at least one of the background, the appearance character (for example, the character appearing in the same reach effect), the decorative design, and the like is different. It is prepared. Here, a normal mode and a probability variation mode are prepared as production modes. The probability change mode is an effect mode when the game state is in a probability change state. The normal mode is an effect mode when the gaming state is not a probable change state. In normal mode and probability change mode, for example, the background is different, or characters appearing in at least one of normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are different (for example, characters appearing in normal reach are characters in normal mode). A and B may be used in the probability variation mode), or the decoration pattern may be different (for example, an Arabic numeral decoration pattern is used on the one hand and a Chinese numeral decoration pattern is used on the other hand). In addition, it is good also as a several production | generation mode by making arbitrary production | generation operations different, for example, the audio | voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting operation of other light-emitting bodies, such as the game effect lamp 9, for example.

  In this embodiment, in the variable display effect, a notice effect for notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” (expected degree of big hit) is executed. In this embodiment, a plurality of notice effects having different expected degrees of jackpots are provided. The notice effect is also included in the variable table effect. In the notice effect, a predetermined image is displayed, so that the expected degree of jackpot corresponding to the image is notified (FIGS. 54 and 55 and the like will be described in detail later). The notice effect may be executed by any effect operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting operation of other light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9, for example.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, a normal mode, a special mode, and a notice mode are prepared as display modes of the hold display symbols. The normal mode is a normal display mode. The special mode is a display mode at a predetermined time, unlike the normal mode. The notice mode is a mode for notifying the expected degree of jackpot. In this embodiment, different display modes are represented by the display colors of the hold display symbols (see FIG. 23). As will be described later in detail, in the normal mode, the color of the hold display symbol is blue. In the special mode, the color of the reserved display symbol is white or gray. In the notice mode, the color of the hold display symbol is one of yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors. The shape of the hold display symbol is different depending on the effect mode. As will be described later, the hold display symbol is a circle mark in the normal mode and a square mark in the probability change mode (see FIG. 22, details will be described later).

  As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIG. 53 and the like, the hold display symbol H corresponding to the variable display (pending variable display) corresponding to the first special figure game is on the left side in the display area 5H. Is displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha. The hold display symbol H corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the second special figure game (pending variable display) is displayed in the second hold display area 5Hb which is the area on the right side in the display area 5H.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the hold display symbol H displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha or the second hold display area 5Hb corresponds to the variable display currently being executed. The hold display symbol H is displayed in the center current display area 5Hc in the display area 5H (see FIG. 53).

  Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the display mode of the hold display symbols (here, the first hold display area 5Ha, the second hold display area 5Hb, and the current display area 5Hc) displayed in this embodiment (here, Then, the display color) can be changed from the current display mode to another display mode. In addition, the display mode of the hold display symbol is more likely to change to the other notice mode, particularly the notice mode, in the normal mode than in the special mode.

  Maintaining the display mode of the hold display symbol in a predetermined display mode is also a kind of effect. For example, maintaining the display mode of the hold display symbols displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb as a notice form is also a kind of effect. An effect of maintaining the display mode of the hold display symbols displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb as the notice mode may be referred to as pre-reading notice. For example, maintaining the display mode of the hold display symbol displayed in the current display area 5Hc as a notice mode is a kind of effect. An effect of maintaining the display mode of the hold display symbol displayed in the current display area 5Hc as the notice mode may be referred to as a current hold notice.

  Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display symbol is changed, an action effect that changes the display mode as a result of the effect may be executed (FIGS. 56, 57, etc.). ). In this embodiment, a plurality of action effects having different aspects are prepared. When the action effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display symbol changes as a result of the action effect. The action effect may include an arbitrary effect operation such as a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and a lighting operation of another light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9.

  When the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the same on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” By deciding and displaying the decorative symbols all together, it is only necessary to derive and display the finalized decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination.

  When the big hit type is “non-probable change”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination may be derived. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols having the even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, they may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line as long as they are a certain type of fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). .

  When the jackpot type is “probable change”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination may be derived, or a definite decorative symbol that is a probable variable big hit combination may be derived. For example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are the fixed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. Among the decorative patterns of “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose pattern numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line as long as they are a type of a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the determined decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probable big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative pattern is changed again, and the decorative pattern (probable variable pattern) that is a combination of the probabilistic big hit and non-variable is displayed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern A re-lottery selection effect for deriving and displaying symbols is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern A re-lottery winning effect that stops and displays a symbol may be executed, or a re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

  When the big hit type is “probable change”, the decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination is displayed once during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the lottery effect is executed during the variable display, or the subsequent big hit gaming state A jackpot promotion promotion effect may be executed at the end of the middle or jackpot gaming state, and the start of control to be in a probable change state may be notified. The jackpot promotion effect is in the jackpot gaming state at the start of the jackpot gaming state, during the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, during the period from one of the rounds to the start of the next round in the jackpot gaming state Probability change notification is made as to whether or not to control to the probability change state in the period from the end of the final round to the start of the next variable display game. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”. These re-lottery effects and promotion effects during the big hit may not be executed, and the start of control to be in a probable change state may be notified.

  When the special figure display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode, and the decorative pattern constituting the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. There are cases in which a definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the decorative symbols constituting a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach-losing combination”) are stopped and displayed after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode. As a result, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-specific display result may be derived and displayed.

  Next, main operations (actions) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the following, the operation will be described with reference to a flowchart and the like, but in each operation (each process), a process that does not appear in the flowchart may be appropriately performed.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included. At the end of the game control timer interrupt process, the interrupt enabled state is set. As a result, the game control timer interrupt process is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, that is, every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) which is the supply interval of the interrupt request signal.

  The switch process is performed by determining whether a detection signal is input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. This is a process for determining for each switch whether or not it is in an ON state (that is, whether or not a game ball has entered or passed).

  The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result.

  In the information output process, pachinko gaming machines such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 as information to be output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. 1 is a process of outputting information (data) relating to 1 from the information output circuit.

  The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software. As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, It is only necessary to include the random number MR4 for pattern determination (see FIG. 6). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit game state with “1”. Any of the values of “65535” can be taken. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is a random value used to determine the big hit type as “probable change” or “non-probable change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It can take any value from “100” to “100”. The random number MR3 for determining the variation category includes a plurality of categories prepared in advance for categories of variation patterns (variation patterns categorized according to their contents, which will be described in detail later) in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is a random value used to determine any one of “1” to “900”. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern in the variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol, which is one of a plurality of variation patterns (variation patterns belonging to a variation category determined based on the random number MR3). This is a random value used to determine the value, and can take any value from “1” to “900”.

  In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special symbol game is regarded as a big hit. Determination of whether or not to control the game state, determination of variation pattern, control of display operation in the special symbol display device 4 based on the determination result (execution of special game), special variable winning ball device 7 in the big hit gaming state In order to perform the opening / closing operation setting (execution of round game or short-term opening control) of the special prize opening in the predetermined procedure, various processes are selected and executed. Although the details of the special symbol process will be described later, by executing the special symbol process every time a timer interrupt occurs, the variable display result and the variation pattern are determined, the special symbol game is executed based on the determination, and the jackpot gaming state Etc. are realized.

  In the normal symbol process, for example, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 (for example, when it is determined in the switch process that the gate switch 21 is turned on), the number of holds reaches the upper limit. If there is not, hold storage of the usual game (for example, extract a random value and store it in the RAM 102), or use the hold memory (random number stored in the RAM 102) to determine the variable display result of the usual game. Or, the variation pattern (variation time, etc.) of the regular game is determined, and the normal symbol display 20 is controlled according to the variation pattern to control the display operation (for example, lighting or extinguishing of the segment LED). First, the variable display result of the normal game can be derived and displayed, or when the variable display result is per general map, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened first. Or carried out the process of the state. By executing the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupt occurs, the execution of the normal game, the first variable state of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B at the time of the normal game, etc. are realized.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, and the like, transmission setting of a control command (production control command or the like) (for example, storing a storage address value of a control command to be transmitted is stored in the RAM 102) is performed. In the process, a process of actually transmitting the transmission-set control command to the effect control board 12 is performed. In this transmission process, an effect control INT signal or the like is used, and a control command is transmitted.

  After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Here, main effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be described with reference to FIG. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number.

  Command 8001 (H) is an effect control command (first variation start designation command) that designates the start of variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. Command 8002 (H) is an effect control command (second variation start designation command) that designates the start of variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a variation start designation command. Information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in a later-described variation pattern designation command. The first variation start designation command or the second variation start designation command is transmitted and set together with the variation pattern designation command and the like in later-described step S111 executed when the variation pattern is set.

  Command 81XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) that designates a variation pattern of a decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of a special symbol. In this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command corresponding to each variation pattern (see FIG. 13, details will be described later) is set. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and the number is set to “XX” in the command (for example, “01” for the variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern designation command is also a command for designating the start of variation of the decorative symbol, and is transmitted and set in step S111 described later that is executed when the variation pattern is set.

  Command 8CXX (H) is an effect control command (display result designation command) that designates whether or not to make a big hit and a big hit type (that is, a variable display result). In this embodiment, a display result designation command corresponding to each display result is set. For example, a unique number is assigned to each display result, and the number is set to “XX” in the command (for example, “00” for “losing”, “big hit” for the big hit type “probable change”). "01"). The display result designation command is transmitted and set in step S111 described later, which is executed when the variation pattern is set together with the variation pattern designation command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for designating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted and set at the end of the special figure game in step S112 described later.

  Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (game state designation command) for designating a game state. In this embodiment, a game state designation command corresponding to each game state is set. For example, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base), “XX” is set to “00”. For example, if the gaming state is a high probability low base state, “XX” is set to “01”. For example, “XX” is set to “02” if the gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state. The gaming state designation command is set to be transmitted at the time of execution of step S113 and step S117, which will be described later, in which the gaming state can be changed.

  Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (hit start designation command) for designating the start of a big hit gaming state (start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state and notifies that the big hit gaming state has been entered. This command is set to be transmitted when the big hit gaming state is started in step S113 described later.

  Command A300 (H) is an effect control command (hit end designation command) for designating the end of the big hit gaming state (start of ending). Note that the ending is an effect for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state, which is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. This command is set to be transmitted when the last round game is completed in step S116 described later.

  Command B100 (H) is an effect control command (first start opening winning designation command) for designating that the first starting winning is generated due to the entry of the game medium into the first start winning opening. Command B200 (H) is an effect control command (second start opening winning designation command) for designating that a second start winning has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the second start winning opening. The first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start opening prize designation command. These commands are transmitted and set in a start winning determination process (step S101) described later.

  Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first special figure reserved memory number designation command) for designating the first special figure reserved memory number. “XX” indicates the first special figure reservation storage number. Command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second special figure reserved memory number designation command) for designating the second special figure reserved memory number. “XX” indicates the second special figure reservation storage number. The first special figure reserved memory number designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command may be collectively referred to as a special figure pending memory number designation command. The special figure reserved memory number designation command is transmitted and set in later-described step S101 and step S111 in which the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number can change.

  Command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (designation designation command) for designating a display result among the determination results at the time of starting winning. Command C6XX (H) is an effect control command (variation category designation command) for designating a variation category among the determination results at the time of starting winning. As will be described in detail later, when the first start winning or the second starting winning occurs, the random number values MR1 to MR3 are extracted (step S101). In this embodiment, for the variable display corresponding to the extracted random number values MR1 to MR3, the random number values MR1 and MR3 among the extracted random number values MR1 to MR3 before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the variable display is “big hit” and the variable category of the variable display (FIG. 13). The determination at the time of starting winning means this determination, and this determination is performed in the winning random number determination process in step S211. Note that this determination may not be performed in a predetermined case. A unique number is assigned to the determination result (including no determination) for the display result, and the number is set to “XX” in the symbol designation command (for example, “00”, “ “01” for “losing” and “02” for “big hit”). A unique number is assigned to the determination result (including no determination) for the variation category, and the number is set to “XX” in the variation category designation command (for example, “00” if “no determination”). “11” for “PA1”, “12” for “PA2”, “13” for “PA3”, etc.). These commands are transmitted and set in a start winning determination process (step S101) described later.

  Next, the special symbol process will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is turned on ( Step S201). If it is determined in the switch process that the first start port switch 22A is on, for example, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the special game using the first special view It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number that is the number of reserved memories is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 stores the first stored value of a first special figure reserved memory number counter (counter that counts the first special figure reserved memory number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit). It suffices if the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved memory number count value. When the number of first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port that is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 The buffer value is set to “1” (step S203).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S204). If it is determined in the switch process that the second start port switch 22B is on, for example, and the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the special game using the second special view It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number that is the number of reserved memories is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 stores the second stored value of the second special figure reserved memory number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reserved memory number) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102. It suffices if the second special figure reserved memory number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved memory number count value. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S206). If the second start port switch 22B is not turned on (step S204; No), or if the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated.

  After either of the processes of steps S203 and S206 is executed, the special figure reservation storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure reserved memory number count value is increased. Add one. Thus, the first special figure reserved memory count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). Also, the second special figure reserved memory count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), is updated to add 1 (step S208).

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random data provided by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.) Numeric data (see FIG. 6) indicating the numeric value MR1, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. At this time, when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 can control the first hold indicator 25A and specify the first special figure hold memory number added by one. May be displayed on the first hold indicator 25A (for example, the number of lighted LEDs is increased by one). When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display a display that can specify the number of the second special figure hold memory added by one. You may make it make the 2nd holding | maintenance display device 25B perform (for example, increase the number of lighting of LED by 1).

  The first special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 7A is not started yet, although a game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first start winning has occurred. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball The stored number of random data MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, etc. extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like as reserved data Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is being held, and the variable display result ( On-hold storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect, etc.) It becomes.

  In addition, the holding number of the first special figure holding storage unit and the display position of the holding display symbol (controlled on the production control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. For this reason, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “1”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the leftmost first display position in the first hold display area 5Ha (FIG. 53, etc.). . For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “2”, the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first hold display area 5Ha toward the display area 5H. Display the hold display symbol. FIG. 53 shows a state when the hold data is stored up to the hold number “3”. In FIG. 53, the hold display symbol H corresponding to the hold data of the hold number “1” is the first hold display area 5Ha. The hold display symbol H corresponding to the hold data of the hold number “2” is displayed at the first display position (first display position) from the left toward the left in the first hold display area 5Ha. The hold display symbol H corresponding to the hold data of the hold number “3” is displayed at the third display position (second display position), and the third display position (first from the left) in the first hold display area 5Ha. 3 display position).

  The second special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 7B is not yet started, although the game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start winning has occurred. The reserved data of the special game (not shown special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, etc., which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. The data is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure (variable display) is held, and the variable display result (in this special figure game) On-hold storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect, etc.) It becomes.

  In addition, the holding number of the second special figure holding storage unit and the display position of the holding display symbol (controlled on the side of the effect control board 12) basically correspond to each other. For this reason, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “1”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the leftmost first display position of the second hold display area 5Hb (FIG. 53, etc.). . For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “2”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position in the second hold display area 5Hb. To do. FIG. 53 shows a state when the hold data is stored up to the hold number “2”. In FIG. 53, the hold display symbol H corresponding to the hold data of the hold number “1” is the second hold display area 5Hb. The hold display symbol H corresponding to the hold data of the hold number “2” is displayed at the first display position from the left (first display position) toward the left in the second hold display area 5Hb. Is displayed at the second display position (second display position).

  Following the process of step S210, a winning random number determination process is performed (step S211). As described above, the winning random number determination process is a process for determining the start winning prize, and based on the random values MR1 and MR3 among the random values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209, This is a process of determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is “big hit” and the variable category (FIG. 13) of the variable display. The winning random number determination process will be described in detail later. Thereafter, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S212). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (step S212; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S213), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “1” (step S212; “1”), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S214). The process proceeds to step S204. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S211 of FIG. 5 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is controlled as a “hit” in the special symbol normal process (step S110 in FIG. 4) to be described later. A determination is made whether or not. In addition, in a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 3) to be described later, determination of a variation category and variation pattern corresponding to the decorative symbol variable display mode is performed. In the winning random number determination process, apart from these determinations, the game ball is extracted at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). The determination of whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed of the random number (the random number extracted in step S209) is “big hit”, and which of the variable categories of the variable display of the decorative pattern is Judgment or the like is performed (so-called “look ahead”). As a result, the special figure display result is “big hit” before the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started (before the special game start condition is established). Or a rough variable display mode (variation category) of the decorative symbol is predicted, and the display mode of the hold display symbol is determined by the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control board 12 side based on the prediction result. can do.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 8, first, the CPU 103, for example, a short time flag (a flag that is turned on in the short time state) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 or a probability change. The current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by confirming the state of the flag (the flag that is turned on when the probability is changed) (step S401). In step S401, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit gaming state by confirming a value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a gaming control flag control unit) of the RAM 102. Specify whether or not. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is “4” to “7”, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified as the big hit gaming state.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state specified in this way is a big hit that is a big hit gaming state (step S402). At this time, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S402; No), it is further determined whether or not the time is short (whether or not the time reduction flag is on) (step S403). When it is determined in step S402 that a big hit is being made (step S402; Yes), or when it is determined in step S403 that time-shortening control is being performed (step S403; Yes), the start port buffer value is “2”. It is determined whether or not (step S404).

  When it is determined in step S403 that the time-saving control is not being performed (step S403; No), or when it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S404; Yes), the big hit determination is made. A range is set (step S405). For example, a special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state specified in step S401 in a later-described special figure display result determination table (see FIG. 10) prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. The range of the decision value assigned to the “big hit” is set as the big hit decision range. For example, if the current gaming state is a probability variation state (if the probability variation flag is on), “8000” to “9899” are set as the jackpot determination range, and the current gaming state is a non-probability variation state (not a probability variation state). State) (if the probability variation flag is off), “8000” to “8189” are set as the big hit determination range (see FIG. 10).

  Thereafter, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S209 is compared with the jackpot determination range set by the process in step S405 (step S406). Thereby, it is determined whether or not the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S407). As an example, the CPU 103 compares the individual determination values included in the jackpot determination range with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S209 shown in FIG. The presence or absence of a decision value that matches the numerical value MR1 may be determined. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range.

  In step S406, for example, the random value MR1 stored in the special figure storage unit in step S210 may be read, and the determination may be performed using the read random value MR1. Separately from step S210, the random number value MR1 is held in a predetermined area (an area other than the special figure storage area) of the RAM 102 or the storage area of the CPU 103, and the CPU 103 makes the determination based on the held random number value. May be. The same applies to a random value MR3 described later. Thus, the random value used in the winning random number determination process may not be the random value stored in the special figure storage unit.

  When it is determined in step S407 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S407; Yes), a later-described jackpot variation category determination table prepared by storing in the predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 14). ) Is selected and set in the use table (step S409). As will be described in detail later, the jackpot variation category determination table is a table for determining a variation category which is a variable display variation pattern category in which the variable display result is “big hit”, and each variation category has a random value MR3. The decision value to be compared with is assigned.

  In FIG. 14, the determination ratio is described instead of the range of the determination value. In the actual table, it suffices if a determined value in a range corresponding to the determined ratio in FIG. 14 is assigned to each variation category. The determination ratio is a ratio in which the entire range (1 to 900) of values that the random number MR3 can take is 100. For example, in FIG. 14, since the determination rate of the variation category PB3 is 20, the determination rate of the variation category PB4 is 40, and the determination rate of the variation category PB5 is 50, the variation category PB3 is compared with the random value MR3. Determination values 1 to 180 (range of 20%) are assigned, determination values 181 to 540 (range of 40%) to be compared with random value MR3 are assigned to variation category PB4, and random value MR3 is assigned to variation category PB5. Determined values 541-900 (40% range) are compared. The same applies to other tables in which the determination ratio is described.

  When it is determined in step S407 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S407; No), a later-described loss variation category determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 15). Is selected and set in the use table (step S408). Specifically, when the current gaming state identified in step S401 is a non-short-time state (low base state) (when the short-time flag is off), the variation category determination table for loss shown in FIG. Is set in the usage table, and the current gaming state identified in step S401 is in the short-time state (high base state) (when the short-time flag is in the on state), determination of the variation category for loss in FIG. Set the table as the used table. As will be described later in detail, the loss variation category determination table is a table for determining a variation category that is a variable display variation pattern category in which the variable display result is “losing”, and each variation category has a random value MR3. The decision value to be compared with is assigned.

  Thereafter, after step S408 or after step S409, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot variation category determination table set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the variation category determination random number MR3 extracted in step S209. Alternatively, the variation category assigned to the decision value matching the random number MR3 is determined with reference to the loss variation category determination table (step S409). As an example, the CPU 103 determines the variation category by determining whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR3 by comparing each decision value assigned to each variation category with the random value MR3 one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value assigned to each variation category may be set, and the CPU 103 may select the random value MR3, the minimum value, The variation category may be determined by comparing with the maximum value (the same applies when referring to other tables).

  After step S416 or when it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is not “2” (step S404; No), the CPU 103 sets the content according to the determination result in step S407 or step S416. The start winning command transmission is set (step S417), and the winning random number determination process is terminated. The start winning time command includes a start opening winning designation command, a special figure reserved memory number designation command, a symbol designation command, and a variation category designation command. When the starting port buffer value is “1”, as a start winning command, a first starting port winning designation command, a first special figure reserved memory number designation command, a symbol designation command, and a variable category designation command are: Configure transmission settings. When the starting port buffer value is “2”, as a start winning command, a second starting port winning designation command, a second special figure reserved memory number designation command, a symbol designation command, and a variable category designation command are: Configure transmission settings. The command set for transmission is transmitted by command control processing.

  The first special figure reserved memory number designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command to be set for transmission are commands for specifying the current first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number (the number of such memories). The special figure reserved memory number to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure reserved memory number counter or the second special figure reserved memory number counter. The symbol designating command to be transmitted is set to a command ("big hit") that specifies that the judgment result of the variable display result is "big hit" when the judgment result in step S407 is within the big hit determination range (step S407; Yes). If the determination result in step S407 is out of the big hit determination range (step S407; No), a command (“lost”) that specifies that the variable display result determination result is “lost”. And a determination result in step S404 is “start determination buffer value = 1” (step S404; No), it means “no determination” that the determination at the start winning prize is not performed. Command (command including EXT data corresponding to “no determination”) may be used.The variable category designation command to be set for transmission is a command (command including EXT data corresponding to the variation category that is the determination result) that designates the variation category that is the determination result when the variation category is determined in step S416, and step S404. If the determination result is that the starting port buffer value = 1 (step S404; No), it is determined that the determination at the time of the start winning prize is “no determination” (EXT data corresponding to “no determination”). Command).

  In the winning random number determination process, as described above, for the variable display corresponding to the random values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special game) becomes “big hit”. Whether or not and the variable category of the variable display (FIG. 13) are determined. That is, so-called prefetching is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state and not based on the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed. Therefore, the determination is not necessarily accurate but has some accuracy. Can predict variable display results and variable categories. Also, in the winning random number determination process, it is determined in step S402 that the big hit is being made, or in step S403 it is determined that the time-shortening control is being performed, and the start opening is performed by the process in step S404. It is determined whether or not the buffer value is “2”. At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” and not “2”, the process proceeds to the process of step S416 without executing the process of step S405 and the like, and the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. Thus, when the high opening control associated with the short-time control is performed or when the game is in the big hit game state, each of the above-mentioned each is based on the occurrence of the start winning (first start winning) due to the game ball entering the first start winning opening. Limit the decision not to be made. Thus, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start winning prize is given during the time-saving control or the big hit gaming state. The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the prefetch based on the game from being executed.

  After executing the start winning determination process at step S101 shown in FIG. Select one of these processes and execute it.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the like are stored on the basis of the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, if the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probable change” or “probable change”. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol holding storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second special figure reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), for example, the first area of the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) The numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read as the hold data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (step S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (second start winning) at the second start winning opening in the process of step S209 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second special figure reserved memory number count value by one, the second special figure reserved memory number is updated to be subtracted by one, and the second special figure reserved memory number is also subtracted. The stored contents in the holding storage unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the reservation data stored in the storage area lower than the holding number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure holding storage unit is higher by one entry ( Shift to storage areas corresponding to the holding numbers “1” to “3”. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first special figure reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  If the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the start winning opening regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening And the starting opening data indicating which game ball has entered into the second starting winning opening is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the holding number together with the holding data or separately from the holding data, What is necessary is just to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are established for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), for example, the first area of the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) The numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read as the hold data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (step S236). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (first start winning) at the first start winning opening in the process of step S209 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first special figure reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating it, the first special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the first special figure reserved memory number is updated. The stored contents in the holding storage unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the first special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time ( Shift to storage areas corresponding to the holding numbers “1” to “3”. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be decremented by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. For example, the CPU 103 sets the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10 as a use table. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates the special figure display result as “big hit” and “lost”. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of whether or not the game state is the probability variation state.

  The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state. Whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state to the determined value that matches the random value MR1 by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on whether or not there is numerical data indicating the random value MR1 Accordingly, the assigned determination result of “big hit” or “lost” may be determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 103 may determine that it is in the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is in the on state. For example, when the random value MR1 is “9000”, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the probability variation flag is in an on state (in the probability variation state), and the probability variation flag is turned off. In the case of a state (in the case of an uncertain change state), it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost”.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is determined as “big hit” at a higher decision ratio than in the non-probability variation state. Therefore, for example, based on the jackpot end process in step S117 shown in FIG. 4 (described in detail later), the probability variation flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is “probability variation”, or the like. When the current state is a probable change state, the special figure display result is likely to be a “hit” and more likely to be a big hit game state than in the non-probability change state. That is, it is advantageous for the player.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is “big hit” (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S240; Yes), a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is set to an on state (step S241). Further, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. For example, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11 as a use table. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 11, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”. As long as it is assigned to the determination result.

  The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type included in the game random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the jackpot read from the random number buffer for variation Select one of the jackpot types assigned to the decision value that matches the random value MR2 by referring to the jackpot type determination table set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the type do it.

  After executing the process of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 stores in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control buffer setting unit), a jackpot type buffer setting value indicating the determination result of the jackpot type (for example, “0” in the case of “non-probability change”). In the case of “probability change”, the value of “1”) is stored to store the jackpot type.

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S240; No), after step S243, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is determined (step S246). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, a plurality of types of big hits are made according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242 (according to the big hit type buffer setting value). Any one of the special symbols predetermined as the symbols may be determined as the confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S246, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S247), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in step S247, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

  In step S235, when the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S248), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, after setting the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration display setting is terminated. The effect control board 12 displays a demonstration screen when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Since the variation pattern designates the content (variable display mode) of the variable display of the decorative design, the content of the variable display of the decorative design is determined by this determination. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time (special diagram variation time) from the start of variable symbol special display until the finalized special symbol resulting in variable display is derived is determined. Is done. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S111 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the variation category corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S262). If the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), the variation category corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (step S263). After step S262 or after step S263, a variation pattern is determined based on the determined variation category (step S265). As described above, in this embodiment, by first determining the variation category, the type of rough variation pattern is determined, and then the detailed variation pattern is determined.

FIG. 13 shows a specific example of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment.
The variation category PA1 is a shortened / non-reach (losing) variation category. A variation pattern PA1-1 belongs to the variation category PA1. The variation pattern PA1-1 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure variation time is normal. This is a non-reach fluctuation pattern for short time. This is a variable display mode. The variation category PA1 is a grouping of non-reach variation patterns selected at the time of loss and time reduction.

  The fluctuation category PA2 is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns PA2-1 and PA2-2 belong to the variation category PA2. The variation pattern PA2-1 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, designates non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure variation time is normal. This is a non-reach variation pattern of length. The variation pattern PA2-2 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a non-reach variation that designates execution and non-reach (a variable display mode does not become a reach mode) once in a pseudo sequence. It is a pattern. The fluctuation category PA2 is a grouping of non-reach fluctuation patterns selected at the time of loss and non-time reduction.

  The fluctuation category PA3 is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 belong to the variation category PA3. The variation pattern PA3-1 is selected when the variable display result is “lost”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA3-2 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of one pseudo-continuation and execution of normal reach. The variation category PA3 is a group of reach variation patterns that are selected at the time of loss and specify normal reach.

  The variation category PA4 is a variation category of super reach A (losing). Variation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-3 belong to the variation category PA4. The variation pattern PA4-1 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of super reach A. The fluctuation pattern PA4-2 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of one pseudo-continuation and execution of super reach A. The variation pattern PA4-3 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of two pseudo-continuations and execution of super reach A. The variation category PA4 is a group of reach variation patterns that are selected at the time of losing and specify Super Reach A.

  The variation category PA5 is a variation category of super reach B (losing). Variation patterns PA5-1 to PA5-3 belong to the variation category PA5. The variation pattern PA5-1 is selected when the variable display result is “lost”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of super reach B. The fluctuation pattern PA5-2 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of one pseudo-series and execution of super reach B. The fluctuation pattern PA5-3 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of two pseudo-continuations and execution of super reach B. The variation category PA5 is a group of reach variation patterns that are selected at the time of losing and specify Super Reach B.

  The fluctuation category PB3 is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 belong to the variation category PB3. The fluctuation pattern PB3-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The fluctuation pattern PB3-2 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of one pseudo-continuation and execution of normal reach. The variation category PB3 is a group of reach variation patterns that are selected at the time of a big hit and specify normal reach.

  The variation category PB4 is a variation category of super reach A (big hit). Variation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-3 belong to the variation category PB4. The fluctuation pattern PB4-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of super reach A. The variation pattern PB4-2 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of one pseudo-ream and execution of super reach A. The fluctuation pattern PB4-3 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of two pseudo-continuations and execution of super reach A. The variation category PB4 is a group of reach variation patterns that are selected at the time of the big hit and specify the super reach A.

  The variation category PB5 is a variation category of super reach B (big hit). Variation patterns PB5-1 to PB5-3 belong to the variation category PB5. The fluctuation pattern PB5-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of super reach B. The fluctuation pattern PB5-2 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of one pseudo-series and execution of super reach B. The variation pattern PB5-3 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of two pseudo-continuations and execution of super reach B. The variation category PB5 is a group of reach variation patterns that are selected at the time of a big hit and specify the super reach B.

  In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 12, for example, using the big hit variation category determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in the big hit variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for variation category determination may be assigned to the determination result of the variation category. The CPU 103 is assigned to a decision value that matches the random value MR3 by referring to the jackpot variation category determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation category determination random value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. The variation category may be determined (selected) as the current variation category. In FIG. 14, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  In the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 12, for example, the variation category at the time of loss is determined using the variation category determination table for loss shown in FIG. 15 (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance). When the gaming state is the non-short-time state (the short-time flag is OFF), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation category determination table shown in FIG. When the gaming state is the short-time state (the short-time flag is on), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation category determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in each loss variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for variation category determination may be assigned to the determination result of the variation category. The CPU 103 is assigned to the decision value that matches the random value MR3 by referring to the loss variation category determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation category determination random value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. The variation category may be determined (selected) as the current variation category. In FIG. 15, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  In the variation category determination table for loss shown in FIG. 15, it is easy to select the variation category PA1 having a short special symbol variation time in the short-time state. By shortening the display time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of invalid start winnings, and to reduce the stop of the game ball being fired by the player (so-called “stopping”). Moreover, the execution frequency of variable display can be increased.

  Referring to FIGS. 14 and 15, at the time of big hit, the determination ratio of the fluctuation category PB5 for executing the super reach B is the highest, and the determination ratio is gradually increased in the order of the fluctuation category PB4 of the super reach A and the fluctuation category PB3 of the normal reach. It is low. At the time of a loss, the determination ratio of the fluctuation category for executing the non-reach fluctuation category PA1 or PA2 is the highest, and the normal reach fluctuation category PA3, the super reach A fluctuation category PA4, and the super reach B fluctuation category PA5 are determined in this order. The rate is gradually decreasing. For this reason, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result is “big hit” at the highest rate. Then, in the order of super reach A and normal reach, the rate at which the variable display result becomes “big hit” (so-called big hit expectation) decreases.

  In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 12, the change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 16A to 16H (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance) according to the change category determined in step S262 or S263. Is used to determine the variation pattern. If the variation category is PA1, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PA2, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PA3, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PA4, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PA5, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PB3, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PB4, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PB5, the variation pattern determination table in FIG.

  As an example, in each variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the variation pattern determination result. The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern from numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Then, by referring to the variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value MR4, the variation pattern assigned to the determination value that matches the random value MR4 is determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. That's fine. In FIG. 16, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in this embodiment, when super reach A or B is executed at the time of big hit, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the two pseudo-continuations is high, and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the one pseudo-continuation is the next. The determination rate of the variation pattern of zero pseudo-continuations is the lowest. On the other hand, the opposite is true when losing. In addition, when executing normal reach at the time of big hit, the determination rate of the variation pattern for one pseudo-continuous is high and the determination rate of the variation pattern for zero pseudo-continuous is the lowest. On the other hand, the opposite is true when losing. Further, at the time of non-reach at the time of losing (in the case of the fluctuation category PA2), the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern for one pseudo-series is low. For this reason, the expectation of jackpot is higher when the pseudo-run is executed, and the expectation of jackpot is higher when the number of pseudo-runs is larger.

  After executing the process of step S265, a special figure variation time (also referred to as a variation time), which is a variable symbol variable display time, is set (step S266). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 13, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the process of step S265. The special figure change time is set by, for example, setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure change time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Following the process of step S266, a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games for which the condition is satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Thereby, a special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display the first special figure hold memory number subtracted by 1 from the first display. You may make it carry out to the hold | maintain indicator 25A (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1). When starting the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display the second special figure hold memory number subtracted by one for the second display. You may make it carry out to the holding | maintenance indicator 25B (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1).

  After executing the process of step S267, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special figure display result, the variation pattern determination result, etc., transmission setting of a command (variation start command) at the start of special symbol variation Is performed (step S268). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends the first variation start designation command, the variation pattern designation command ( A command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S265), a display result specifying command (command including EXT data indicating the variable display result determined in step S246), a first special figure reserved memory number specifying command (step S237) The first special figure reserved memory count value decremented by 1 (that is, a command including EXT data indicating the first special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed when the special figure game is started) Configure transmission settings for transmission. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a second variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command ( A command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S265), a display result specifying command (a command including EXT data indicating the variable display result determined in step S246), and a second special figure reserved storage number specifying command (step S233). The second special figure reserved memory count value decremented by 1 (that is, a command including EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed when the special figure game is started) Configure transmission settings for transmission.

  After executing the process of step S268, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S269), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S269, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process in step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer. Then, when the timer value of the game control process timer (the timer value after subtracting 1) is not 0, the special figure variation time has not elapsed, so control for executing variable display of the special figure game (for example, the first The first special symbol display is performed by updating the display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (control for transmitting a driving signal to appropriately update the display for maintaining the special symbol display for a predetermined time. The same applies hereinafter). In the device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, a process for changing the special symbol is performed, and the special symbol changing process is ended. On the other hand, when the timer value of the game control process timer becomes 0 and the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display The apparatus 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol (the fixed special symbol set in step S110) that is the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) (the fixed special symbol is a predetermined time). It is good to control so that it is continuously displayed.) When the display is stopped, the symbol confirmation designation command transmission setting is also performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”. By repeatedly executing step S112 each time a timer interrupt occurs, special symbol variable display, fixed special symbol derivation display, and the like are realized.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 determines whether the big hit flag is on. When the big hit flag is on, the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag are reset (turned off), and the remaining number of variable displays executed in the time reduction state provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (time reduction remaining number) ) Is counted. The count value of the short time counter is counted as “0”. Then, a timer value corresponding to the fanfare waiting time (the waiting time from the start to the end of the fanfare in the big hit gaming state, which is a predetermined time) is set as an initial value in the game control process timer. Then, “15” is set as an initial value in a round number counter provided in the RAM 102 for counting round games. After that, it is set to send a hit start designation command and a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state (in this case, a command for designating the normal state), and the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. The symbol stop process is terminated. Since the gaming state is changed after the big hit gaming state, it is not necessary to transmit the gaming state designation command here.

  When the big hit flag is in the off state, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is in the on state. If it is in the on state, “1” is subtracted from the count value of the time reduction number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the count value after subtracting “1” is “0”. If the count value is “0”, the time-short end condition for ending the time-short state is satisfied (that is, Since a predetermined number of variable displays that can be executed in the state has been executed), the time reduction flag is turned off to end the time reduction state. Thereafter, a transmission setting for transmitting a game state designation command (here, a command for designating a highly accurate low base state) is performed based on the current game state. When the time flag is off, the count value after subtracting “1” is not “0”, or after the game state designation command transmission setting, the special process flag value is updated to “0”, etc. Then, the special symbol stop process is finished.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit release pre-processing, for example, 1 is subtracted from the timer value of the game control process timer. If the timer value after the subtraction is not “0”, the fanfare waiting time has not yet elapsed, so the big hit release pre-processing ends. When the timer value after subtraction is “0”, the fanfare waiting time has elapsed and the round game start timing has come. In this case, a process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and opening the grand prize opening (for example, a process of transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door), the big prize opening A process for setting a timer value corresponding to the upper limit (29 seconds in this case) of the period during which the game is opened to the game control process timer is executed. When the process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. By repeating step S114 every time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game (waiting until the end of the fanfare), opening of the big prize opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This big hit release process includes a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer, a timer value after 1 subtraction, and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 in one round game (switch Each time the count switch 23 is determined to be in the ON state in the process, the winning prize opening may be changed from the open state to the closed state (or the counter may be counted by a counter (provided in the RAM 102) or the like). Including a process for determining whether or not it is time to return to a partially open state).

  When it is determined that the timer value after decrementing by 1 has reached 0, or the number of detected game balls (count value of the counter) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 9), the big prize opening is closed. Therefore, the process of returning the special winning opening to the closed state (for example, the process of turning off the solenoid 82 by stopping the transmission of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door) Processing to set the timer value corresponding to the winning period closing period (a round game interval period, a preset period) in the game control process timer, or to decrement the count value of the round counter is executed Is done. If the timer value after subtracting 1 does not become 0 and the number of detected game balls has not reached the predetermined number, a process for maintaining the open state of the big prize opening (for example, the solenoid drive signal Etc.), and the process during the big hit release is completed. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. By repeating step S115 every time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the big prize opening is maintained until the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the processing after the big hit release, there are processing for determining whether or not the count value of the round number counter has become “0”, processing for decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 when it is not “0”, and the like. Done.

  When it is determined that the count value of the round number counter is “0”, it means that the round game has reached the upper limit number of times. Is a waiting time until the end of the game, and a timer value corresponding to a predetermined time is set in the game control process timer. In addition, a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command is performed, and processing for updating the special figure process flag to “7” is also performed.

  When the process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed, it is determined whether the timer value after decrementing by 1 is 0. If not, it is not the start timing of the round game, so the closed state Is maintained, and the processing after the big hit release ends. If it is 0, it is the start timing of the round game, so the timer value corresponding to the upper limit (29 seconds in this case) of the process for opening the big winning opening and the period for opening the big winning opening. A process for setting the game control process timer is executed. When the process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S115 and S116 after the big winning opening is opened in step S114 every time a timer interrupt occurs.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the big hit end process, a process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed. If the timer value decremented by 1 is not 0, the ending has not ended, and the jackpot end process is terminated as it is. When the timer value decremented by 1 reaches 0, the ending is completed. Therefore, depending on the big hit type (big hit type buffer setting value) stored in the big hit type buffer, the short time flag, short time counter, probability change flag, etc. Set the state.

  For example, if the big hit type is “probability change”, the time reduction flag and the probability change flag are turned on, and “100” is set as a count initial value in the time reduction counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. If the big hit type is “non-probable change”, only the hour / hour flag is turned on, and “100” is set as the initial count value in the hour / hour counter. In the jackpot end processing, after such setting, a transmission setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state corresponding to the setting is performed, and various data such as a gaming control process timer and a jackpot type buffer setting value (next value) The variable is not carried over to the variable display), and the special figure process flag value is updated to “0”.

Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described.
In the effect control board 12, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process, clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer mounted on the production control board 12). Circuit) register setting, etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122 is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process is executed. In the effect control process, for example, various effects such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the like. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the apparatus, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. Subsequent to the effect control process, an effect random number update process is performed, and numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter in the RAM 122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control. Thereafter, it is determined again whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a start winning prize command (start opening prize designation command, special figure reserved memory number designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command) has been received from the main board 11. (Step S681).

  When the start winning command is received (step S681; Yes), the received command is stored in the start winning command buffer (step S682). When a first start opening winning designation command or a first special figure reserved memory number designation command is received as a start winning command, a start winning command (first starting opening prize designation command, first special figure reserved memory number designation command) , Symbol designation command, variation category designation command) are stored in the first start winning command buffer (provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122). When a second start port winning designation command or a second special figure reserved memory number designation command is received as a start winning command, a start winning command (second start opening prize designation command, second special figure reserved memory number designation command) , Symbol designation command, variation category designation command) is stored in the second start winning command buffer (provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122).

  FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of the first start winning command buffer. The first start winning prize designation command, the first special figure reserved memory number designation command, the symbol designation command, the storage area having the smallest pending display number serving as the buffer number among the empty areas of the command buffer at the time of the first starting prize The variable category designation command is stored in order. A storage area is secured in the first start winning command buffer so that a set of effect control commands (start winning command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start winning can be stored in association with each other. Yes. The effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control commands (start prize command) received when the first start prize is generated, according to the reception order, and the hold display numbers “1” to “5” in the first start prize command buffer. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area in the storage area corresponding to "."

  FIG. 19B is a configuration example of the second start winning command buffer. Among the empty areas of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning prize, the second start opening prize specifying command, the second special figure reserved memory number specifying command, the symbol specifying command, The variable category designation command is stored in order. The second start winning command buffer has a storage area so that a set of effect control commands (start winning command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start winning can be stored in association with each other. Yes. The effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control commands (start prize command) received when the second start prize is generated, according to the reception order, and the hold display numbers “1” to “5” in the second start prize command buffer. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area in the storage area corresponding to "."

  The symbol designation command “C400 (H)” and the variation category designation command “C600 (H)” in FIG. 19 indicate “no determination” at the time of starting winning. The first special figure reserved memory number designation command “C101 (H)” indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number is one at the time of starting winning. “C102 (H)” of the first special figure reserved memory number designation command indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number is two at the time of starting winning. “C201 (H)” of the second special figure reserved memory number designation command indicates that the second special figure reserved memory number is one at the time of starting winning. “C202 (H)” of the second special figure reserved memory number designation command indicates that the second special figure reserved memory number is two at the time of starting winning. “C203 (H)” of the second special figure reserved memory number designation command indicates that the second special figure reserved memory number is three at the time of starting winning. The symbol designation command “C401 (H)” indicates that the determination result regarding the display result at the time of starting winning is “lost”. The symbol designation command “C402 (H)” indicates that the determination result regarding the display result at the time of starting winning is “big hit”. “C611 (H)” and “C625 (H)” of the variation category designation commands indicate predetermined variation categories corresponding to the EXT data. In FIG. 19, it is determined that the display result of the variable display corresponding to the third hold storage of the second special figure game is “big hit”. In addition, regarding the hold storage of the first special figure game, the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. For this reason, FIG. 19 exemplifies the contents of the first start prize command buffer and the second start prize command buffer in the time-saving state.

  The start winning command stored in the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer has a one-to-one correspondence with the hold display symbol. Specifically, the hold display number and the display position of the hold display symbol correspond to each other, whereby the start winning command corresponds to the hold display symbol on a one-to-one basis. The hold display number basically corresponds to the hold number in the first and second special figure hold storage units.

  For example, the hold display number “1” in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to the first display position from the left of the first hold display area 5Ha, and the hold display number “2” in the first start winning command buffer. Corresponds to the second display position from the left of the first hold display area 5Ha, and the hold display number “3” in the first start winning command buffer is the third display position from the left of the first hold display area 5Ha. In response to this, the hold display number “4” in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to the fourth display position from the left of the first hold display area 5Ha.

  For example, the hold display number “1” in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the first display position from the left of the second hold display area 5Hb, and the hold display number “2” in the second start winning command buffer. Corresponds to the second display position from the left of the second hold display area 5Hb, and the hold display number “3” in the second start winning command buffer is the third display position from the left of the second hold display area 5Hb. In response, the hold display number “4” in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the fourth display position from the left of the second hold display area 5Hb.

  For example, when the start winning command is stored in the hold display number “4” of the second start winning command buffer, the hold display symbol is displayed at the fourth display position from the left of the second hold display area 5Hb. At this time, since the start winning command should be stored in the hold display numbers “1” to “3” of the second start winning command buffer, the first to third from the left of the second hold display area 5Hb. A hold display symbol is also displayed at the display position.

  A target flag is provided corresponding to each hold display number in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting win command buffer. As will be described in detail later, the target flag is turned on when the hold display symbol corresponding to the start winning time command corresponding to the flag together with the hold display number is displayed as a target in a special mode or a notice mode.

  In the example of FIG. 19, the hold display symbol corresponding to the start winning command corresponding to the hold display number “3” in the second start winning command buffer is the target, and the display mode of the hold display symbol of this target is It becomes a special mode or a notice mode in the present or future.

  In this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, step S110 (first special figure reserved memory number or second special figure reserved memory number-1), step S101 (first special figure reserved memory number or second special figure reserved memory) There is a possibility that the processing is performed in the order of the stored number +1 and the start winning command transmission), step S111 (variation start command transmission). There is a possibility that there will be five start winning commands stored in the start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer (in this case, the hold display number does not correspond to the hold number). Therefore, in this embodiment, storage areas corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “5” are provided in the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer. Storage areas corresponding to “1” to “4” and storage areas corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “6” or more may be provided.

  After step S682 or when the start winning command is not received (step S681; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs other analysis processing (step S689) and ends the command analysis processing.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a table of processes performed in the command analysis process for each effect control command. In the processing content, S682 indicates that the processing is performed in step S682 described above. Other processing contents are, for example, processing performed in step S689. Each reception flag and each storage area in the table are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Also, setting the reception flag means turning on.

  When the first special figure reserved memory number designation command is received as the change start command, that is, when the first special figure reserved memory number designation command is received together with the first fluctuation start designation command, the first special figure pending memory number designation command is received. The memory number designation command is stored in the first special figure reserved memory number designation command storage area.

  When receiving the gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high-accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the contents of the received gaming state designation command. The high-accuracy flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122, and is turned on in response to the probability-changing state. Corresponding to the switching between the state and the off state, the on state and the off state are switched. The high base flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122, and is turned on in response to the short time state. The high time flag on the main board 11 side is turned on. Corresponding to the switching between the state and the off state, the on state and the off state are switched. For example, when the gaming state designation command designates the high-accuracy high-base state (for example, when the probability change flag and the time-short flag are designated to be on), the effect control CPU 120 designates the high-probability flag and the high Both base flags are turned on (if the flag is already on, the on state is maintained. The same applies to the on state and the off state for both flags). When the gaming state designation command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability variation flag is on and the time reduction flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and high base Turn off the flag. When the gaming state designation command specifies a low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are in an off state), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are set. Turn off. The production control CPU 120 turns on the high-accuracy flag (that is, when the production mode changes to the probability change mode) or turns off the high-accuracy flag (that is, the production mode changes to the normal mode). When a display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the currently displayed hold display symbol is changed to a shape (square mark or circle mark) corresponding to the effect mode. change.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display setting process (step S162).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hold display setting process. In the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the first start prize command buffer and the second start prize command buffer (step S501), and receives a new received command (start prize command). ) Is stored in the storage area corresponding to any of the hold display numbers “1” to “4” (step S502). If a new received command is not stored (step S502; No), the hold display setting process is terminated.

  When a new received command (start winning prize command) is stored in the storage area corresponding to any of the hold display numbers “1” to “4” (step S502; Yes), it is included in the received command. It is determined whether the symbol designation command and the variation category designation command are those for designating “no judgment” at the time of starting winning (step S503).

  If “no determination” is not designated (step S503; No), the hold display symbol is currently displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode, or the hold display symbol scheduled to be changed to a display mode other than the normal mode is currently It is determined whether it is displayed (step S504). This determination may be made, for example, by checking the state of the target flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Since the target flag is turned on when the display mode of the held display symbol is changed to a display mode other than the normal mode at present or in the future, if there is a target flag in the on state, the display mode other than the normal mode is displayed. It can be determined that the hold display symbol is currently displayed, or that the hold display symbol scheduled to be changed to a display mode other than the normal mode is currently displayed.

  Since all the target flags are in the off state, etc., the hold display design is not currently displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode, and the hold display design to be changed to a display mode other than the normal mode is currently displayed. If there is not (step S504; No), whether or not three or more start winning commands are stored in a buffer in which new received commands are stored in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer It is determined (whether the number of reserved memories is 3 or more) (step S505).

  When three or more start winning commands are stored (step S505; Yes), a hold display pattern is determined (step S506).

  Here, the hold display symbol will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, the on-hold display symbols are continuously displayed with different modes (shapes) depending on the production mode. Here, in the normal mode, the hold display symbol is a circle (FIG. 22A), and in the probability variation mode, the hold display symbol is a square mark (FIG. 22B).

  Moreover, there are a normal mode (blue), a special mode (white and gray), and a notice mode (yellow, green, red, and rainbow) as the display mode (display color here) of the hold display symbol (FIG. 23). reference). Among the notice modes, yellow is set with a low expectation degree for jackpot. For example, when the reserved display symbol is yellow at the end, the big hit expectation is low. Among the notice modes, the green color is set to have a big hit expectation degree. For example, when the hold display symbol is green at the end, the big hit expectation is medium. Among the notice modes, red is set to have a high expectation degree for jackpot. For example, when the reserved display symbol is red at the end, the big hit expectation is high. Among the notice modes, red is set to have a high expectation degree for jackpot. For example, when the reserved display symbol is red at the end, the big hit expectation is high.

  In addition, when three or more start winning commands are stored in the same start winning command buffer (when the first special figure hold memory number or the second special figure hold memory number is three or more), the hold display symbol The display mode of (target) may change. The change of the display mode is performed over a plurality of variable display of decorative symbols.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24A, when the third start winning command is stored in the same start winning command buffer (that is, three in the first special figure or the second special figure). The next variable display (next variation) and the next variable display (next variation) of the decorative display variable display (which may be a special game) executed at the time of occurrence) The display mode of the hold display symbol corresponding to the third start winning command (the target and the display position is shifted to the left each time the variable display is executed) can be changed. Moreover, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the target is executed, the display mode of the hold display symbol (target) displayed in the current display area 5Hc (see FIG. 53 and the like) is also changed. Can do.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24B, when the fourth start winning command is stored in the same start winning command buffer (that is, four in the first special figure or the second special figure). When the eye hold memory occurs), the next variable display (next variation), the next variable display (next variation) of the variable display of the decorative design (which may be a special game) executed at the time of occurrence In the next variable display (next-order fluctuation), the hold display symbol corresponding to the fourth start winning command (the target, the display position is shifted to the left each time the variable display is executed) The display mode can be changed. Moreover, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the target is executed, the display mode of the hold display symbol (target) displayed in the current display area 5Hc (see FIG. 53 and the like) is also changed. Can do.

  In step S506, the display mode pattern (holding display pattern) of the holding display symbol (target) at the start of target display (at the time of the hold), the next change, the next change, and the next change is determined. In step S506, the hold display pattern is determined with reference to any hold display pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 25 to 44 in accordance with the effect mode, the hold storage number when the hold occurs, and the variation category.

  When the production mode is the normal mode and the target is the third hold memory (that is, when the third hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs), the variable category is the variable category PA1. Alternatively, when it is PA2, the pending display pattern determination table of FIG. 25 is referred to, and when the variation category is the variation category PA3, the suspension display pattern determination table of FIG. 26 is referred to and the variation category is the variation category PA4 or PA5. In some cases, the hold display pattern determination table in FIG. 27 is referred to. When the variation category is the change category PB3, the hold display pattern determination table in FIG. 28 is referred to. When the change category is the change category PB4 or PB5, Refer to the pending display pattern determination table.

  When the production mode is the probability change mode and the target is the third hold memory (that is, when the third hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs), the fluctuation category is the fluctuation category PA1. Alternatively, when it is PA2, the pending display pattern determination table of FIG. 30 is referred to. When the variation category is the variation category PA3, the suspension display pattern determination table of FIG. 31 is referred to, and the variation category is the variation category PA4 or PA5. In some cases, the hold display pattern determination table in FIG. 32 is referred to. When the change category is the change category PB3, the hold display pattern determination table in FIG. 33 is referred to, and when the change category is the change category PB4 or PB5. Refer to the pending display pattern determination table.

  When the production mode is the normal mode and the target is the fourth hold memory (that is, when the fourth hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs), the variable category is the variable category PA1. Or, when it is PA2, the pending display pattern determination table of FIG. 35 is referred to. When the variation category is the variation category PA3, the suspension display pattern determination table of FIG. 36 is referenced, and the variation category is the variation category PA4 or PA5. In some cases, the hold display pattern determination table of FIG. 37 is referred to. When the change category is the change category PB3, the hold display pattern determination table of FIG. 38 is referred to, and when the change category is the change category PB4 or PB5, FIG. Refer to the pending display pattern determination table.

  When the effect mode is the probability change mode and the target is the fourth hold memory (that is, when the fourth hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs), the fluctuation category is the fluctuation category PA1. Alternatively, when it is PA2, the pending display pattern determination table of FIG. 40 is referred to. When the variation category is the variation category PA3, the suspension display pattern determination table of FIG. 41 is referred to, and the variation category is the variation category PA4 or PA5. Sometimes, referring to the hold display pattern determination table of FIG. 42, when the variation category is the change category PB3, reference is made to the hold display pattern determination table of FIG. 43, and when the change category is the change category PB4 or PB5, FIG. Refer to the pending display pattern determination table.

  Each hold display pattern determination table is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the hold display pattern determining random value SR1 updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter. In the hold display pattern determination table, a determination value to be compared with the random value SR1 is assigned to each hold display pattern as a determination result. The effect control CPU 120 refers to any of the hold display pattern determination tables of FIGS. 25 to 44, and displays the hold display pattern assigned to the determined value that matches the random value SR1 for hold display pattern determination. Determine (select) the display pattern. In each figure, the determination ratio of each holding display pattern is described instead of the determination value assigned to each holding display pattern.

  The color described in the column of the occurrence of hold in FIGS. 25 to 44 is the display color of the hold display symbol at the start of displaying the hold display symbol of the target (when the hold storage of the target occurs). The color described in the next variation column is the display color of the reserved display symbol in the next variation. The color described in the column of the secondary variation is the display color of the hold display symbol in the secondary variation. The color described in the column of the secondary fluctuation is the display color of the reserved display symbol in the secondary fluctuation. A column including an arrow indicates that the display color changes. For example, in H3-7, the display color of the reserved display symbol changes from blue to white in the next change. If only one color is listed, it also indicates that the display color does not change.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, there is a hold display pattern (H3-1, H3-4, etc.) in which the blue color, which is the normal mode, does not change from when the hold occurs. When this hold display pattern is selected, the display mode of the target hold display pattern remains in the normal mode and does not change until execution of variable display corresponding to the target.

  The determination ratio in each hold display pattern determination table can be arbitrarily set. However, for the hold display pattern in which the display color of the hold display symbol in the last change column in each hold display pattern (the display color after change when changed) is yellow, green, or red, the jackpot expectation is The determination ratio is set so that yellow is the lowest, green is the next lowest, and red is the highest. For example, in the case of the fluctuation categories PA4, PA5, PB4, and PB5 (may be only in the case of the fluctuation categories PB4 and PB5), the display color of the hold display symbol in the last change column is red. Set the decision ratio so that the pattern, green hold display pattern, and yellow hold display pattern can be selected in this order. Otherwise (in the case of the loss variation category), the last change display is displayed. The determination ratio may be set so that the display color of the symbol is easily selected in the order of the hold display pattern that becomes yellow, the hold display pattern that becomes green, and the hold display pattern that becomes red. The last fluctuation is a secondary fluctuation when the target is the third pending storage, and a secondary fluctuation when the target is the fourth. The display color of the reserved display symbol in the last variation column (the display color after the change if changed) is hereinafter referred to as the final color. The final color is also the last color of the hold display symbol displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha or the second hold display area 5Hb. In the hold display pattern determination table referred to in the case of the variation categories PA4, PA5, PB4, and PB5, there are relatively many hold display patterns whose final color is red or green, and the hold display whose final color is yellow. Since there are relatively few display patterns, basically, the red or green jackpot expectation is high. In addition, since the final color can be red only in the case of the variation categories PA4, PA5, PB4, and PB5, the big hit expectation degree of red is higher than that of yellow or green (the change categories PA4, PA5, PB4). , Because the big hit expectation degree when PB5 is selected is higher than the big hit expectation degree when other variable categories are selected).

  Note that the hold display pattern (J3-48 or the like) in which the final color is rainbow is only when the display result of the variable display of the target is a big hit (that is, when the variation category is the variation categories PB4 and PB5). ) Can be selected. For this reason, when the final color is rainbow, the target is determined to be a big hit.

  The determination ratio in each hold display pattern determination table is a hold display pattern (H3-2, H3-5, H3-7, etc.) including a pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode (yellow, green, red, rainbow) ) Is set higher than the hold display patterns (H3-7, H3-9, etc.) that include a mode in which the display color changes from white to the notice mode. For example, in each hold display pattern determination table, the display color of the notice mode from white is set to be higher than the determination ratio (total value or average value, hereinafter the same as appropriate) of the hold display pattern including the pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode. The determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the aspect that changes to be higher. In addition, the determination ratio in each hold display pattern determination table is from gray to the notice mode rather than the hold display patterns (H3-2, H3-5, H3-7, etc.) including the pattern that changes from blue to the notice color. The hold display pattern (H3-11, H3-12, etc.) including an aspect that changes to the display color is set so that it is easier to select. For example, in each hold display pattern determination table, determination of a hold display pattern including an aspect that changes from gray to the display color of the notice mode rather than a determination ratio of the hold display pattern that includes a pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode Make the percentage higher. As a result, when the hold display symbol is in a special mode, it becomes easier to change to a notice mode than in the normal mode.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, there is a hold display pattern (such as H3-3) in which the display color of the hold display symbol does not change in white since the occurrence of the hold. There is no hold display pattern in which the display color of the symbol remains gray since the time of the hold occurrence. For this reason, even if it is the same special aspect, when the display color is white and when it is gray, the ratio which changes to another display color will differ.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, the hold display pattern (H3-19, H3-20, J3-48) in which the display color of the hold display symbol changes from gray to red or iridescent. Etc.), but there is no hold display pattern that changes from white to red or rainbow. For this reason, even if it is the same special mode, when the display color is white and when it is gray, the selection ratio for changing to another display color is different.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, after the display color of the hold display symbol changes from yellow to gray, the hold from which the changed gray changes to green, red, or rainbow color. There are display patterns (H3-40, H3-47, H3-48, etc.). In addition, after the display color of the hold display symbol changes from green to gray, a hold display pattern (K3-41, K3-42, K3-51, etc.) that changes from the changed gray to green, red, or iridescent is displayed. is there. For this reason, the display mode of the hold display symbol may change from a display mode that can change from the special mode to the special mode, and may change from the special mode to another display mode. And especially the notice mode after changing from a special mode turns into a notice mode in which a big hit expectation is the same or becomes high compared with the mode of notice before change.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, when the target is the fourth hold memory, when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes to white or gray in the next change. Although the final display color is only green (K3-7, K3-11, K3-19, etc.), when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes to gray in the next change, the final display color is red in addition to green. And rainbow colors (K3-13, K3-14, K3-15, K3-22, K3-23, etc.). For this reason, the big hit expectation degree differs according to the timing when the display mode of the hold display symbol becomes the special mode.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, when the target is the fourth hold memory, the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from white or gray in the next-order fluctuation. Sometimes the final display color can be changed to red and iridescent (K3-42, K3-49 to 51, etc.), but when the display mode of the reserved display symbol changes from gray in the next change, the final display color is red or It does not become iridescent (K3-9, K3-18, K3-20, etc.). For this reason, the jackpot expectation differs depending on the timing when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from the special mode.

  The determination ratio in each hold display pattern determination table is the case where the target is the third hold memory (that is, when the third hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs) and the target Is the 4th hold memory (that is, when the 4th hold memory in the 1st special figure or the 2nd special figure occurs), and the hold display pattern becomes a special display form. The determination ratio (average value or total value of determination ratios of the hold display pattern) may be set differently. As a result, the appearance rate of the special mode can be changed according to the reserved storage.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, when the effect mode is the normal mode, the display color of the hold display symbol may be white (H3-3, H3-5, etc.). When the effect mode is the probability change mode, the display color of the hold display symbol is not white. In this way, the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display symbol to the special mode (here, white) is changed according to the effect mode.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, the display color of the hold display symbol is not changed from white at the start of display (at the time of hold occurrence) to white, such as H3-3. , Selected only in the variation categories PA1 and PA2 selected at the time of losing. On the other hand, the hold display pattern (H3-1, H3-4, etc.) whose final color is blue may be selected when the variation category PB3 is selected at the time of big hit. For this reason, the big hit expectation when the display mode of the reserved display symbol is changed from the beginning to the special mode is lower than when the final color of the held display symbol is set to the normal mode (expected big hit expectation = 0). In particular, when a hold display pattern that does not change the display color of the hold display symbol to white from the start of display is selected, the variable display of the target is not in a reach mode.

  After step S506, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the hold display pattern determined in step S506 does not change the display color of the hold display symbol from the start of display (when the hold occurs) to blue (normal mode) (H3-1). Etc.) (step S507).

  When the display color of the hold display symbol is not changed from the display start time (at the time of hold occurrence) to blue (normal mode) (step S507; No), the setting corresponding to the determined hold display pattern is set to the target flag and the notice buffer. (Step S508). Specifically, the target flag corresponding to a new received command (start winning command) is turned on (by this, the display mode of the corresponding on-hold display symbol can be other than the normal mode) and selected. The contents of the hold display pattern are stored in a notice buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As shown in FIG. 45, the notice buffer stores the contents of the hold display pattern for each change. The contents of the stored display pattern to be stored may be the display color, the display color before and after the change, or the like. When the display color is not changed in a certain change, the storage area corresponding to the change may be blank (empty). The notice buffer may be set so that the content of the hold display pattern can be understood by looking at the notice buffer.

  After step S508, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the probability variation mode (step S509). Whether or not the mode is the probability variation mode may be determined based on whether or not the high-accuracy flag is in an on state. When the high-accuracy flag is off, the current effect mode is the normal mode (step S509; No), so the effect control CPU 120 displays the display color (when the display starts at the start of display) of the determined hold display pattern. The display of the hold display symbol is started with the display color) and the normal mode shape (circle shape) (step S510). The effect control CPU 120 displays a hold display symbol at a display position corresponding to a hold display number corresponding to a new received command by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Start that.

  When the high-accuracy flag is on, the current effect mode is the probability-changing mode (step S509; Yes), so the effect-control CPU 120 displays the display color (when the display starts at the time of display start) in the determined hold display pattern. The display of the hold display symbol is started with the display color) and the shape for the probability variation mode (square mark shape) (step S511). The effect control CPU 120 displays a hold display symbol at a display position corresponding to a hold display number corresponding to a new received command by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Start that.

  If the symbol designating command and the variable category designating command specify “no judgment” (step S503; Yes), the target flag may be in an on state, etc. When any one of the display modes is a display mode other than the normal mode or is scheduled to become a display mode other than the normal mode (step S504; Yes), when three or more start winning prize commands are not stored ( Step S505; No), when the display color of the hold display symbol is a pattern that does not change from the display start time (when the hold occurs) to the blue color (normal mode) (Step S507; Yes), the display mode of the hold display symbol is normal In order not to make it other than the aspect, the CPU 120 for effect control has a display color of blue (normal aspect) and a display of the reserved display symbol. The start (step S512). At this time, if it is currently in the probability variation mode, the hold display symbol is displayed in the shape for the probability variation mode (the shape of the square mark). If the current mode is the normal mode, the hold display symbol is displayed in the normal mode shape (circle shape). The effect control CPU 120 displays a hold display symbol at a display position corresponding to a hold display number corresponding to a new received command by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Start that.

  If any one of the currently displayed hold display symbols is in a display mode other than the normal mode or is scheduled to be in a display mode other than the normal mode (step S504; Yes), the hold display symbol is displayed. Includes the case that is or is scheduled to become a notice mode. In this way, during the execution period of the pre-reading notice for the hold display design other than the target display display target this time (including the period from the decision to execute the pre-reading notice to the execution of the pre-reading notice) Compared to other cases, the ratio of the display mode of the hold display symbol to the special mode or the notification mode is different.

  Returning to FIG. 20, after step S <b> 162, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the value of the effect process flag (initially “0”) provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122. Thus, any one of the following processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command from the main board 11 is received (whether or not each reception flag is in an ON state). Based on this, it includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5. When the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is received and it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”. Is done. In other cases, the variable display start waiting process is terminated without updating the value of the effect process flag.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the special figure display result based on, for example, a display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. Is determined to be “lost” (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S521; Yes), for example, a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (a command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area). Whether or not the variation pattern specified by the item is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-2) corresponding to the case of “non-reach” in which the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode. Is determined (step S522).

  If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a decorative symbol of a non-reach combination updated by a random counter for performance provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122 is extracted. Then, by referring to a non-reach combination decoration design determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, a finalized design (non-reach combination decoration design) is determined.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating random values for determining a decorative combination of a reach combination updated by the random number circuit 124 or an effect random counter is extracted and stored in the ROM 121 in advance. For example, the determined decorative design (the decorative design of the reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative design determination table of the reach combination.

  When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S521; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the jackpot combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted. Subsequently, for example, by referring to the jackpot determination symbol determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121 in accordance with the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the image display device 5. The decorative symbols with the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined.

  After steps S523, S524, and S525, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control pattern setting processing (step S530). FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control pattern setting process. In the effect control pattern setting process, the effect control CPU 120 reads the start winning command from the start winning command buffer (step S701). When the first symbol variation start designation command is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 receives the start winning command corresponding to the highest “1” among the hold display numbers in the first start winning command buffer. Read the state of the target flag. When the second symbol variation start designation command is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 starts the winning prize command corresponding to the highest “1” among the hold display numbers in the second starting prize command buffer. Read the state of the target flag.

  Next, data of the contents of the hold display pattern stored corresponding to the next change is read from the notice buffer (if blank, nothing is read if no contents are stored in the notice buffer) (step S702). ).

  Next, following step S702, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the stored contents of the start winning command buffer from which the start winning command is read out one by one in step S703. Specifically, the start winning command and the target flag state stored corresponding to the hold display numbers “2” to “5” are shifted to the hold display numbers “1” to “4”, respectively. In step S703, the effect control CPU 120 stores data corresponding to the next change and the next change in the notice buffer in correspondence with the next change and the next change, respectively. In addition, when the data of the content of the hold display pattern is not stored in the notice buffer, the shift may not be performed.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the notice effect after step S703 (step S704). In step S704, the effect control CPU 120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the notice effect execution that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, etc., and notifies based on the extracted numerical data. With reference to the effect execution determination table (stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121), the presence / absence of the execution of the advancement effect and the type of the advancement effect in the case of execution are determined. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the notice effect execution determination table of FIG. 48A when the special figure display result is “lost”. When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the notice effect execution determination table in FIG. 48B is referred to. In the notice effect execution determination table, a determination value to be compared with the random value SR2 is assigned to each of the determination results of no execution, notice effect A, and notice effect B. The effect control CPU 120 determines that the notice effect is not executed when the determined value that matches the random value SR2 is assigned to “no execution”, and the determined value that matches the random value SR2 is “notice effect A”. If it is assigned to, it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed, and if the determined value that matches the random number SR2 is assigned to “notice effect B”, it is determined that the notice effect B is to be executed. In FIG. 48, the determination ratio is described in place of the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of the notice effect B is the highest, the determination ratio of the notice effect A is the next highest, and the determination ratio of no execution is the lowest. When the special figure display result is “losing”, the reverse is true. Therefore, when the notice effect B is executed, the big hit expectation is high, and when the notice effect A is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the notice effect is not executed.

  After step S704, it is determined whether the data read from the notice buffer in step S702 is data that changes the display mode of the held display symbol ((change color before and after display)) (step S705). If it is data of the contents to be changed (step S705; No), it is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed (step S706) If the notice effect is to be executed (step S706; Yes), the action effect is not held It is determined to change the display mode of the display symbol (step S707).

  When the notice effect is not executed (step S706; No), it is determined whether or not the effect effect is executed (step S708). In step S708, the effect control CPU 120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the effect of execution, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like, and operates based on the extracted numerical data. With reference to the effect execution determination table (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 in advance), the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect and the type of effect effect in the case of execution are determined. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the action effect execution determination table of FIG. 49A when the special figure display result is “lost”. When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the action effect execution determination table of FIG. 49 (B) is referred to. In the action effect execution determination table, determination values to be compared with the random value SR3 are assigned to the determination results of no execution, action effect A, and action effect B, respectively. When the determined value that matches the random value SR3 is assigned “no execution”, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the effect, and the determined value that matches the random value SR3 is “action effect A”. If the action effect A is determined to be executed, the action effect B is determined to be executed if the determined value that matches the random value SR2 is assigned to the “action effect B”. In FIG. 49, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of the action effect B is high, the determination ratio of the action effect A is the next highest, and the determination ratio of no execution is the lowest. When the special figure display result is “losing”, the reverse is true. For this reason, when the action effect B is executed, the big hit expectation degree is high, and when the action effect A is executed, the big hit expectation degree is higher than when the action effect is not executed. That is, the big hit expectation differs depending on the type of action effect.

  If the data read from the advance notice buffer in step S702 is not data (the display color before and after the change) that changes the display mode of the hold display symbol (including the case where no data is stored in the advance notice buffer). .) (Step S705; No) determines whether the target flag read in Step S701 is on (Step S709), and if it is on (Step S710; Yes), it is executed this time. Whether or not the current hold notice is executed is determined for the hold display symbol displayed in the current hold area 5Hc corresponding to the variable display (step S710).

  In step S710, the change display pattern (first hold display area 5Ha (first special figure game of the first special game) corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command and the start winning time command corresponding to the hold data to be digested this time. In the case of execution) or in the second hold display area 5Hb (in the case of execution of the second special figure game), the display mode (the hold display symbol displayed at the leftmost display position) of the current hold display symbol Whether or not to execute the current hold notice is determined on the basis of the current color). Specifically, using a correspondence table (previously stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121) as shown in FIG. 50, a reference table (previously stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 121) corresponding to the variation pattern and the current color. And the presence or absence of execution of the hold notice this time is determined with reference to the specified reference table.

  In FIG. 50, a row is a variation pattern and a column is a current color. In FIG. 50, the reference table of the table name described in the column where the row corresponding to the current variation pattern and the column corresponding to the current current color intersect is used as the reference table referred to this time. For example, if the current variation pattern is PB5-3 and the current current color is red, the reference table TA7 is specified (selected) as a reference table to be referred to this time. Note that “-” in FIG. 50 indicates that there is no combination of the current variation pattern and the current color in this column.

  Each reference table is shown in FIG. In each table, a determination value to be compared with the random number SR4 for determining the current hold notice execution is assigned to each determination result of no change and each display color after the change. When the reference table to be referred to is specified, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random value SR4 updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and is specified above based on the extracted numerical data. With reference to the reference table, the presence / absence of execution of the pending notice is determined. The CPU 120 for effect control refers to the reference table identified above, and when the determined value that matches the random value SR2 is assigned “no change”, the on-hold display symbol displayed in the current display area 5Hc. When it is determined that the display color is not changed (that is, the reservation notice is not executed this time) and the determined value that matches the random number SR4 is assigned to each display color such as “green”, the assigned display color is set. Then, it is determined to change the display color of the hold display symbol (current color hold display symbol) displayed in the current display area 5Hc (that is, to execute the hold display advance notice for changing to the assigned display color). In FIG. 51, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  Referring to FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, the current color is low in the big hit expectation even though the fluctuation pattern is high in the big hit expectation (for example, one specifying super reach or two pseudo-reams). (For example, in the case of a combination of PB5-3 and red, etc.), a reference table (for example, reference table TA-) having a high determination ratio for changing the display color of the held display symbol to a color with a high expectation degree of jackpot. 4 etc.) will be referred to. Thus, in this embodiment, if the current variation pattern has a high jackpot expectation, if the current color of this time is low in the big hit expectation, the current hold notice is executed and the hold display symbol is displayed. It is easy to change the display color to a color with a high expectation level for jackpots.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the current current color is white, the reference table TA-1 is referred to. Since all the determination values of the reference table TA-1 are assigned to “no change”, in this case, the current hold notice is not executed. In other words, when the hold display symbols displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb are in a special mode, the display mode may change to another display mode (see the hold display pattern). When the displayed hold display symbol is in a special mode, it does not change to another display mode. As described above, in this embodiment, when the special-type hold display symbol is displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb, and when it is displayed in the current display area 5Hc. Thus, the display mode changes to another display mode at a different rate (here, one rate is “0”).

  After step S708, after step S707, after step S710, or when it is determined in step S709 that the target flag is off (step S709; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines as determined above. An effect control pattern corresponding to the content is set as a usage pattern to be used this time (step S711). Here, for example, an effect control pattern is prepared for each action effect, a change in display color of the hold display symbol, and a variable display effect (reach effect, variable display effect, or notice effect), and these effect control patterns are appropriately set in step S711. They may be combined and set as one production control pattern.

  In step S711, for example, when it is determined that the action effect A or B is to be executed, the action effect A or B is executed. An effect control pattern for changing the display mode is set. For example, when it is determined to execute the notice effect A or B, an effect control pattern for executing the notice effect A or B is set. When it is determined to execute the current hold notice, an effect control pattern for executing the current hold notice to be changed to the determined display color is set.

  The effect control pattern that is set is an effect control pattern that executes a variable display of a decorative pattern with a change pattern specified by a change pattern specifying command, and an effect that executes an effect during variable display of contents according to the effect mode. It is also a control pattern.

  The effect control pattern to be set is the first hold display area 5Ha (when the first change start specifying command is received because the first change start specifying command reception flag is on) or the second hold. Displayed in the leftmost display position of the hold display symbols displayed in the display area 5Hb (when the second variation start designation command reception flag is received because the second variation start designation command reception flag is in an ON state or the like). When the hold display symbol that has been displayed is moved and displayed in the current display area 5Hc, and the hold display symbol is displayed at another display position in the same hold display area, the hold display symbol is moved to the left one display position. It is also a thing to move and display. This moving display is performed at the time of disclosing the variable display of decorative symbols. In the case of the moving display of the hold display symbol, the display mode is maintained. However, if the content read from the notice buffer in step S702 changes the display mode of the hold display symbol, the content is displayed. Accordingly, when the display is moved, the display color of the hold display symbol is changed to the display color after the change indicated by the content.

  Returning to FIG. 46, after step S530, the effect control CPU 120, for example, corresponds to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 ( An initial value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set (step S531).

  Then, a setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 (a start setting for effect operation control) is performed (step S533). At this time, for example, the display control unit 123 is controlled based on the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined (set) as the use pattern in step S530, and the “left” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 is controlled. ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be changed. At this time, the movement display of the hold display symbols is also started. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S536), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display effect process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time (special drawing change time) corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, for example. (Step S551). As an example, in the process of step S551, the timer value of the production control process timer is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the data associated with the process timer determination value that is the same value as the timer value decremented by 1 is an end code. By doing so, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed.

  If it is not the end code, that is, if the special figure fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S551; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present is the notice effect execution period for executing the notice effect. (Step S552). The said period should just be predetermined in the production | presentation control pattern used as a use pattern. The notice effect execution period is indicated by the fact that the data corresponding to the process timer judgment value of the same value as the timer value of the effect control process timer (data included in the effect control pattern) indicates the notice effect execution period. Is determined (step S552; Yes), effect operation control for executing the notice effect is performed (step S553). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the notice effect associated with the process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer in the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) for execution, the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the production image on the image display device 5, or the audio control board. 13 outputs sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals), and turns on the game effect lamps 9 and decoration LEDs by outputting commands (lighting signals) to the lamp control board 14. Production operation control such as turning off / flashing is performed. By executing step S553 repeatedly for each timer interruption, execution of the notice effect is realized.

  After step S553, if it is not the advance notice execution period (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present hold notice execution period is for executing the current hold notice (step S554). ). The said period should just be predetermined in the production | presentation control pattern used as a use pattern. This pending advance notice execution period, for example, indicating that the data corresponding to the process timer judgment value of the same value as the production control process timer value (data included in the presentation control pattern) is the current pending advance notice execution period. When it is determined that it is (step S554; Yes), the presentation operation control for executing the current hold notice is performed (step S555). For example, the CPU 120 for effect control presently holds the current hold notice associated with the process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer in the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) for executing the image, the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the production image on the image display device 5, or the audio control is performed. Sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. / Performs production control such as turning off / flashing. By repeatedly executing step S555 for each timer interrupt, execution of the current hold notice is realized.

  After step S554, if it is not the current hold notice execution period (step S554; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present is the action effect execution period for executing the action effect (step S554). . The said period should just be predetermined in the production | presentation control pattern used as a use pattern. The action effect execution period is indicated by the fact that the data corresponding to the process timer judgment value having the same value as the timer value of the effect control process timer (data included in the effect control pattern) is the action effect execution period. If it is determined (step S554; Yes), effect operation control for executing the effect effect is performed (step S555). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the action effect associated with the process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer in the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) for execution, the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the production image on the image display device 5, or the audio control board. 13 outputs sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals), and turns on the game effect lamps 9 and decoration LEDs by outputting commands (lighting signals) to the lamp control board 14. Production operation control such as turning off / flashing is performed. Execution of the effect is realized by repeatedly executing step S557 for each timer interruption.

  After step S557, when it is not the action effect execution period (step S556; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present is the reach effect execution period for executing the reach effect (step S558). The said period should just be predetermined in the production | presentation control pattern used as a use pattern. The reach effect execution period is indicated by the fact that the data corresponding to the process timer judgment value having the same value as the timer value of the effect control process timer (data included in the effect control pattern) represents the reach effect execution period. If it is determined (step S558; Yes), the production operation control for executing the reach production is performed (step S559). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the reach effect associated with the process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer in the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) for execution, the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the production image on the image display device 5, or the audio control board. 13 outputs sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals), and turns on the game effect lamps 9 and decoration LEDs by outputting commands (lighting signals) to the lamp control board 14. Production operation control such as turning off / flashing is performed. By executing step S559 repeatedly for each timer interruption, execution of reach production is realized.

  After step S559, when it is determined that it is not the reach production execution period (step S558; No), other production operation control is performed (step S560). For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control execution associated with a process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer in the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.), the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the effect image on the image display device 5, and the sound control board 13 is instructed (sound effect signal). ) To output sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and to turn on / off / flash the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Perform motion control. By repeatedly executing step S560 for each timer interruption, execution of other effects (for example, a variable display operation of decorative symbols, a moving display of a pending display advance notice, etc.) is realized. After step S560, the effect process during variable display ends.

  When the data corresponding to the timer value decremented by 1 in the process of step S551 is an end code, and the special figure variation time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols (also a special figure game) (step S551; Yes) ), It is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S561). At this time, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not received (step S561; No), the variable display effect process is terminated and waits. If the predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation designation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is performed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation designation command normally. It may be executed.

  If a symbol confirmation designation command is received in step S863 (step S863; Yes), for example, a variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 is performed. Then, control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (determined ornament symbol) (determined ornament symbol of the combination determined in step S171) that becomes the variable display result in step S562. At this time, a timer value corresponding to the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set in the effect control process timer (step S563). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S564), and the variable display effect process is terminated.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special chart waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command has been received, for example. When it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the effect control pattern for executing the effect corresponding to the big hit gaming state is selected as the use pattern, and further, the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern is executed. A timer initial value corresponding to the time is set in the effect control process timer. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”.

  If it is determined that no hit start designation command has been received, the timer value of the effect control process timer is decremented by 1. If the timer value obtained by decrementing by 1 is not 0, the special figure waiting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the timer value obtained by subtracting 1 is 0 (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed), it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “losing”, and the effect process Update the value of the flag to the initial value “0” (At this time, each reception flag, data stored in each storage area, etc. (things that you do not want to carry over to the next variable display) are reset as appropriate) .

  The hitting process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this hit process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the timer value of the effect control process timer by 1, and the same value as the timer value after subtracting 1 from the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) associated with the process timer determination value, the display control unit 123 is controlled to produce the production image on the image display device 5. Displaying or outputting sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and game effect lamps by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 9 and effect operation control such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the decoration LED. By repeatedly executing step S174 for each timer interruption, the execution corresponding to the big hit gaming state (for example, an effect including fanfare and excluding ending) is realized. In the hit processing, it is further determined whether or not a hit end designation command has been received. If no hit end designation command has been received, all round games have not ended, so the value of the effect control process flag should be updated. The process is terminated without hitting. Further, when the winning end designation command is received, all the round games are ended, and therefore the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to step S175 in order to start the ending effect. Update to 5 ". At the time of this update, an effect control pattern for executing ending is selected as a use pattern, and a timer initial value corresponding to the execution time of the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern is set in the effect control process timer.

  The ending process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending process, the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the timer value of the production control process timer, and the same value as the timer value after subtracting 1 from the data included in the production control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) associated with the process timer determination value, the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the production image on the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And effect operation control such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the decoration LED. The execution of the ending effect is realized by repeatedly executing step S175 for each timer interruption. If the timer value after decrementing by 1 is “0”, or if the data associated with the process timer judgment value that is the same as the timer value after decrementing by 1 is the end code, the rendering process Update the value of the flag to the initial value “0” (At this time, each reception flag, data stored in each storage area, etc. (things that you do not want to carry over to the next variable display) are reset as appropriate) .

  Next, the effect image displayed by the series of processes will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the first hold display area 5Ha displays the hold display symbol H corresponding to the variable display held for the first special game, and the second hold. In the display area 5Hb, a hold display symbol H corresponding to a variable display or the like held for the second special game is displayed. Among these hold display symbols H, a hold display symbol corresponding to the variable display executed this time is displayed. H is displayed in the current display area 5Hc. The hold display symbol H displayed in the display area 5Hc this time is deleted when the variable display ends. In FIG. 53, when the next variable display is performed, the hold display symbol H displayed at the leftmost display position of the second hold display area 5Hb is moved to the current display area 5Hc and displayed (the display color is displayed). Maintained). Further, the other on-hold display symbol H of the second on-hold display area 5Hb moves to the left display area. If there is no hold for the second special figure game, the hold display symbol H displayed at the leftmost display position of the first hold display area 5Ha is moved to the current display area 5Hc at the next variable display execution. (The display color is maintained.) Further, the other on-hold display symbol H of the first on-hold display area 5Ha moves to the left display area. In FIG. 53, an arrow indicates a state in which decorative symbols are variably displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 54, when the notice effect A is executed, for example, the notice effect A is executed when the character C1 appears. As shown in FIG. 55, when the notice effect B is executed, for example, the notice effect B is executed when the tank C2 appears.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the effect effect A is executed, for example, the boomerang S1 moves toward the target, and the boomerang S1 hits the hold display symbol H of the target (the rightmost symbol of the second hold display region 5Hb). Then, the display color of the held display symbol H that has been hit changes. Even if the effect is performed, the display color of the hold display symbol H may not be changed. In this case, for example, the boomerang S1 disappears in the middle (the image on the right side of the second row in FIG. 56). ).

  As shown in FIG. 57, for example, when the effect effect B is executed, the star S2 moves toward the target, and the star S2 collides with the target hold display symbol H (the rightmost symbol of the second hold display region 5Hb). Then, the display color of the held display symbol H that has been hit changes. Even if the effect is performed, the display color of the hold display symbol H may not be changed. In this case, for example, the star S2 disappears in the middle (the image on the right side of the second row in FIG. 57). ).

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the current hold notice is executed, the display color of the hold display symbol H displayed in the current display area 5Hc is changed. The display color may be changed so as to be switched, or may be changed by gradually changing the display color. Further, the display color may be changed after an effect such as an effect is executed. This pending notice may be performed at a predetermined timing before the reach is established, or at a predetermined timing before the variability display result is derived after the reach is established.

  As described above, in this embodiment, there is a hold display pattern (such as H3-3) in which the display color of the hold display symbol does not change white from the time when the hold occurs, but the display color of the hold display symbol is when the hold occurs. There is no hold display pattern that remains gray and has not changed (FIGS. 25 to 44). For this reason, even if it is the same special aspect, when the display color is white and when it is gray, the ratio which changes to another display color will differ. Thereby, the player pays attention to which of the special aspects, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, there are on-hold display patterns (H3-19, H3-20, J3-48, etc.) in which the display color of the on-hold display symbol changes from gray to red or rainbow, but from white There is no on-hold display pattern that changes to red or iridescent (FIGS. 25 to 44). For this reason, even if it is the same special mode, when the display color is white and when it is gray, the selection ratio for changing to another display color is different. Thereby, the player pays attention to which of the special aspects, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, there are on-hold display patterns (H3-40, H3-47, H3-48, etc.) in which the display color of the on-hold display symbol changes from gray to green, red, or iridescent. In addition, after the display color of the hold display symbol changes from green to gray, a hold display pattern (K3-41, K3-42, K3-51, etc.) that changes from the changed gray to green, red, or iridescent is displayed. Yes (FIGS. 25-44). For this reason, the display mode of the hold display symbol may change from a display mode that can change from the special mode to the special mode, and may change from the special mode to another display mode. As a result, the change pattern of the hold display can be embodied, and the interest of the game is improved. And especially the notice mode after changing from a special mode turns into a notice mode in which a big hit expectation is the same or becomes high compared with the mode of notice before change. This can prevent the player from being discouraged.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the current current color is white, the reference table TA-1 is referred to (FIGS. 50 and 51). Since all the determination values of the reference table TA-1 are assigned to “no change”, in this case, the current hold notice is not executed. In other words, when the hold display symbols displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb are in a special mode, the display mode may change to another display mode (see the hold display pattern). When the displayed hold display symbol is in a special mode, it does not change to another display mode. As described above, in this embodiment, when the special-type hold display symbol is displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb, and when it is displayed in the current display area 5Hc. Thus, the display mode changes to another display mode at a different rate (here, one rate is “0”). Thereby, the player pays attention to the special aspect together with the display area of the special display of the hold display symbol, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the case where the target is the fourth hold storage, when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes to white or gray in the next change, the final display color is only green. (K3-7, K3-11, K3-19, etc.) However, when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes to gray in the next change, the final display color is also green or red or rainbow (K3). -13, K3-14, K3-15, K3-22, K3-23, etc.) (FIGS. 25-44). For this reason, the big hit expectation degree differs according to the timing when the display mode of the hold display symbol becomes the special mode. Thereby, the player pays attention to the special mode as well as the timing of the special mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the target is the fourth hold storage, when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from white or gray in the next-order variation, the final display color is red, Although it can change to a rainbow color (K3-42, K3-49 to 51, etc.), the final display color does not change to red or rainbow color when the display mode of the reserved display symbol changes from gray in the next change (K3- 9, K3-18, K3-20, etc.) (FIGS. 25-44). For this reason, the jackpot expectation differs depending on the timing when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from the special mode. Thereby, the player pays attention to the change timing from the special mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, the determination ratio in each hold display pattern determination table is the third hold memory in the target (that is, when the third hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs). And when the target is the fourth hold memory (that is, when the fourth hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs), the display form of the hold display symbol is a special form. You may set so that the determination ratio (average determination ratio of the said holding | maintenance display pattern) of the holding | maintenance display pattern which becomes becomes different. Thereby, the appearance rate of the special mode can be changed according to the number of reserved memories. Thereby, the player pays attention to the special mode of the target as well as the number of reserved memories when the target hold display is generated, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of the action effect B is high, the determination ratio of the action effect A is the next highest, and the determination ratio of no execution is the lowest. When the special figure display result is “losing”, the reverse is true. For this reason, when the action effect B is executed, the big hit expectation degree is high, and when the action effect A is executed, the big hit expectation degree is higher than when the action effect is not executed. That is, the big hit expectation differs depending on the type of action effect. Thereby, the player pays attention to the special aspect as well as the action effect changing from the special aspect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the effect mode is the normal mode, the display color of the hold display symbol may be white (H3-3, H3-5, etc.), but when the effect mode is the probability change mode. The display color of the hold display symbol is not white (FIGS. 25 to 44). In this way, the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display symbol to the special mode (here, white) is changed according to the effect mode. Thereby, the player pays attention to the special mode as well as the production mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, during the execution period of the pre-reading notice for the hold display design other than the target display display design target this time (including the period from the decision to execute the pre-reading notice to the execution of the pre-reading notice) Compared to other cases, the ratio of the display mode of the hold display symbol to the special mode or the notification mode is different. Thereby, the player can concentrate on the special aspect and pay attention, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the hold display pattern (such as H3-3) that does not change the display color of the hold display symbol from white at the start of display (when hold occurs) to white is a variation category selected at the time of loss. Selected only for PA1 and PA2. On the other hand, the hold display pattern (H3-1, H3-4, etc.) in which the final color is blue may be selected in the variation category PB3 selected at the time of big hit (FIGS. 25 to 44). For this reason, the big hit expectation when the display mode of the reserved display symbol is changed from the beginning to the special mode is lower than when the final color of the held display symbol is set to the normal mode (expected big hit expectation = 0). In particular, when a hold display pattern that does not change the display color of the hold display symbol to white from the start of display is selected, the variable display of the target is not in a reach mode. Thereby, the player pays attention to the special aspect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has, for example, identification information (for example, a game ball or the like) after a game medium (for example, a game ball) has entered a start area (for example, a first start winning opening or a second start winning opening) provided in the game area. The display result is derived by executing variable display of the identification information based on the fact that the start condition for allowing the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative design, etc. to be started is established, and the display result is predetermined. If a gaming machine is in a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player when a specific display result (for example, a special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol or a finalized combination symbol for a big hit combination) is derived. Well, this specific configuration is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, for example, a holding storage unit that stores holding information for variable display of identification information in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the gaming medium has entered the start area (for example, Variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information based on the hold information corresponding to variable display of identification information for which the start condition is satisfied, and the like. (For example, the CPU 103 that performs the processes of steps S112 and S113 and the CPU 120 for the effect control that performs the processes of steps S171 and S172). The specific configuration of each unit is the same as that of the above embodiment. It is not limited to the configuration.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays, for example, a specific display (for example, the first hold display area 5Ha, the second hold display area 5Hb, etc.) corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage unit (for example, the first hold display area 5Hb, the second hold display area 5Hb, etc.). , On-hold display symbols, etc.) (for example, the image display device 5 that displays the on-hold display symbols in the first on-hold display area 5Ha and the second on-hold display area 5Hb), and the variable of identification information being executed Corresponding to the display, current display means for displaying the specific display in the current display area (for example, the current display area 5Hc) (for example, the image display device 5 for displaying the hold display symbol in the hold display area 5Hc), What is necessary is just to be provided, and the specific structure of each means is not restricted to the structure of the said embodiment.

  The specific display displayed in the current display area or the hold display area is configured as an image called a hold display symbol in the above embodiment. However, the specific display may be expressed by lighting of a light source such as an LED (in this case, the hold display means and the current display means are light sources provided in a predetermined area that is a hold display area or a current display area. ). The specific display may be another image such as a character. The specific display may be either a moving image or a still image. Note that the hold display symbol may not be displayed in the current display area. That is, the configuration of the current display means may be omitted.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines the display color of the hold display symbol by, for example, display mode control means for controlling the display mode of the specific display (for example, referring to the hold display pattern and each table in FIG. 51). And the like, as long as it is equipped with an effect control CPU 120 that performs control to display or change the hold display symbols with the determined display color, and the specific configuration of this means is the same as the configuration of the above embodiment. Not limited. For example, the hold display pattern, the contents of FIG. 50, the contents of each table of FIG. 51, and the like can be changed as appropriate so as to satisfy the conditions of each configuration described below. The specific display to be controlled by the display mode control means may be only the specific display displayed in the hold display area by the hold display means, or the specific display displayed in the hold display area by the hold display means. It may be a specific display displayed in the current display area by the current display means. In the above embodiment, both specific displays are targeted.

  The display mode control means may change the display mode of the specific display from the current display mode to another display mode (for example, change the display color of the hold display symbol). The general configuration is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  The display mode of the specific display includes, for example, a normal mode (for example, blue), a special mode (for example, white and gray) different from the normal mode, and the normal mode and the special mode. It is only necessary to include a different notification mode (for example, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.) for notifying the proportion of the specific gaming state. The display mode is a display color in the above embodiment, but may be a shape, a size, or the like, for example. For example, the normal mode, the special mode, and the notice mode may have different shapes or different sizes. In addition, changing the display mode includes putting characters or the like in the specific display. For example, when the target is a variable display in which a pseudo-ream is performed (for example, a group of pseudo-reams may be provided in a variable category and notified to the production control board side), a “pseudo” character is displayed, In the case of a variable display in which super reach is performed, the character “SP” is displayed, and in the case of a variable display in which a battle effect in which the character fights is performed (for example, when super reach B is a battle effect). The letter “B” may be displayed. Such a change in display mode using characters may be performed only for the specific display displayed in the reserved area this time.

  For example, there may be other modes as the display mode of the specific display. Moreover, only one kind may be sufficient as a special aspect and a notice aspect. Conversely, there may be a plurality of types of normal modes. The display color as the display mode is not limited to the color used in the above embodiment. When displaying a specific display with a light source such as an LED, for example, the light source can emit light in a plurality of emission colors, and the display color may be changed by changing the emission color.

  Note that changing to another display mode may include changing to another display mode belonging to the same group. For example, it may include changing from white to gray or changing from yellow to green.

  Further, the display mode control means, for example, has a ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the notice mode when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode rather than the normal mode. What is necessary is just to change the display mode of the said specific display to the said notice mode so that it may become high, and this specific structure is not restricted to the structure of the said embodiment.

  The target for changing the display mode of the specific display to the notice mode so that the ratio is high may be only the specific display displayed in the hold display area by the hold display unit, or the hold display unit. May be a specific display displayed in the hold display area and a specific display displayed in the current display area by the current display means. When the target is only the specific display displayed in the hold display area, the above-described condition may be satisfied by adjusting the determination ratio of the hold display pattern as in the above embodiment. . For example, in each of the hold display pattern determination tables of FIGS. 25 to 44, the display color changes from gray or white to the display color of the notice mode rather than the determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode. Each determination ratio (total value or average value) of the hold display pattern including the aspect is set higher. When the target is a specific display displayed in the hold display area by the hold display means and a specific display displayed in the current display area by the current display means, the determination ratio of the hold display pattern or reference to FIG. The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the table decision ratio and the contents of the decision result that can be decided by the reference table. For example, in each of the hold display pattern determination tables of FIGS. 25 to 44, the display color changes from gray or white to the display color of the notice mode rather than the determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode. Each determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the aspect is set to be higher, and a reference table that changes from white to the notice aspect is provided, and the determination ratio that changes from white to the notice aspect is increased (for example, 100%). ) Etc.

  In addition, when the specific display to be changed also includes the specific display displayed in the current display area, the display color (current hold column) of the hold display symbol in the current hold area as shown in FIG. 59 is also specified. 21 is prepared, and in step S506 of FIG. 21, an all-period hold display pattern determination table (for example, for selecting the all-period hold display pattern) is prepared. With reference to the hold display patterns in the tables in FIGS. 25 to 44 replaced with the hold display pattern for the entire period including the display color of the hold display symbols of the current hold area (current hold field), the hold display area and the current You may determine collectively the transition of the display mode of the specific display displayed on a display area. Note that FIG. 59 is an example, and the contents of the all-period hold display pattern are naturally changed according to the purpose, and all-period hold display patterns other than those shown in FIG. 59 are naturally set. In such a case, steps S709 and S710 in FIG. 47 may be omitted. In such a case, the specific display to be changed is the contents of the all-period hold display pattern determination table (the contents and determination of the all-period hold display pattern) as in the case where only the specific display displayed in the hold display area is the target. The ratio may be set to satisfy the above condition. For example, in each all-period holding display pattern determination table, the notification mode of the notification mode is changed from gray or white to the determination ratio (total value or average value) of all-period holding display patterns including a pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notification mode. It is preferable that the determination ratio of the all-period holding display pattern including the aspect that changes to the display color is higher. Note that this can also be applied to other conditions described below. In other words, regarding the display mode of the specific display described below, when the specific display displayed in the current display area is also targeted, a whole-period hold display pattern is prepared and only the specific display displayed in the hold display area is displayed. The content of the all-period hold display pattern determination table may be set based on the same concept as that for the target. When using the all-period hold display pattern determination table, the notice buffer is provided with a change field (current change field) when the specific display is displayed in the current hold display, and the specific display is displayed in the current hold display. The content of whether to change the display mode of the specific display (the content of the hold display pattern for the entire period) is also stored, and the display mode when the specific display is displayed on the current hold display based on this content is also stored. An effect control pattern corresponding to the change is set.

  As in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the variable information display result (display result based on the hold information corresponding to the variable information display of the identification information for which the start condition is satisfied. Predetermining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes step S239) that determines whether or not to make a specific display result, whether or not to enter a specific gaming state, and the like, and the predetermination The hold information may be any hold information extracted when a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) enters the start area before the means, or may be hold information temporarily stored in the hold storage means. And may be a hold display held separately from the hold storage means.) Whether the identification information corresponding to the hold information is displayed as a variable display display result (whether the display result is a specific display result) Or a determination means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes step S211) that determines whether or not to enter a specific gaming state, etc. (the specific configuration of each means is the above embodiment) Not limited to.)

  The variable display execution means may execute variable display of the identification information based on the determination result of the prior determination means as in the above embodiment (the CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps S111 and S112, etc. An effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step S171 and step S172 based on the effect control command from the main board 11).

  In the above embodiment, the display mode control means determines the hold display pattern for the specific display displayed in the hold display area based on the determination result of the determination means (based on whether or not the big hit. An effect control CPU 120 that determines a hold display pattern (that is, how to control the display mode of the specific display, etc.) based on the determined variation category (variation category designation command). In other words, the display mode control unit controls the specific display displayed in the hold display area based on the determination result of the determination unit. However, for example, whether the display mode of the specific display is the normal mode or the special mode is determined by a table and a random value based on the determination result (for example, one-to-one) and determined to be the normal mode. Refer to the table set so that it is easier to decide when it is changed to the notice mode when it is decided to make it a special form than when it is done, whether to make a notice form based on the judgment result of the judging means or notice You may determine the kind of aspect etc. with a table and a random value.

  Further, the display mode control means determines whether or not to change the specific display based on the determination result of the pre-decision means for the specific display displayed in the display area this time (whether or not it is a big hit) Effect control CPU 120 that determines whether or not there is a hold display notice based on a variation pattern (variation pattern designation command) determined based on the When determining the transition of the display mode of the specific display including the change of the display mode of the specific display to be displayed, the display mode control means determines the display mode of the specific display based on the determination result of the determination means. Transition is decided. That is, the display mode control means controls the specific display displayed in the current display area based on the determination result of the determination means or the determination result of the prior determination means (or may be based on both). Also good.

  In the above embodiment, the transition of the display mode of the specific display is determined based on the variation category and variation pattern (such as the variation category designation command and the variation pattern designation command). It is a decision based on the results and judgment results.) Even if the table to be referenced is decided based on whether or not it is a big hit (design designation command or display result designation command), the transition of the display mode of the specific display can be decided directly Good. Note that the transition of the display mode of the specific display may be determined by determining a table to be referred to based on both the variation category, the variation pattern, and whether or not it is a big hit. Further, the transition of the display mode of the specific display may be determined by determining a table to be referred to according to the jackpot type or the like. For example, even with the same variation category or the like, it is possible to diversify the production by varying the contents and determination ratio of the hold display pattern depending on whether or not the big hit (big hit type). Note that, as the big hit, a 15R big hit gaming state, a 2R big hit gaming state, and the like may be prepared, and a big hit type for specifying each may be prepared.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is further configured as follows. In addition, you may combine the following structures suitably.

  (Configuration 1) The special aspect includes a first special aspect (for example, white) and a second special aspect (for example, gray) different from the first special aspect, and The display mode control means has a ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode depending on whether the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode or the second special mode. Differently, the display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display color of the hold display symbol does not change in white since the occurrence of the hold (such as H3-3) (a hold display pattern that does not change after becoming white) may be used. However, there is no hold display pattern in which the display color of the hold display symbol does not change in gray since the occurrence of the hold (it may be a hold display pattern that does not change after turning gray) (FIGS. 25 to 44). This configuration is realized. That is, here, the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode is 100% (100%) in the second special mode and less than 100% in the first special mode. The content and determination ratio of the hold display pattern may be adjusted so that the ratio in the first special mode is 100%, the ratio in the second special mode may be less than 100%, It is good also as a ratio which is mutually less than 100%. When both ratios are less than 100%, for example, in each determination table for determining a hold display pattern or the like, a determination ratio that satisfies the above one condition (the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode) When the display mode of the specific display is changed to the other display mode, the determination rate of the holding display pattern including the content to change the display mode to the other display mode and the determination rate of the one satisfying the other condition (the specific display) When the display mode is the second special mode, the display rate of the specific display is changed from the display mode of the specific display to the other display mode. You can do it.

  In addition, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-time hold display in the same way as the hold display pattern A pattern determination table (for example, a table in which the hold display patterns in FIGS. 25 to 44 are replaced with the hold display patterns for the entire period. The same applies hereinafter) may be prepared. For example, there is an all-period holding display pattern that does not change in white since the time when the holding occurred (the display color of the holding display pattern may be a whole-period holding display pattern that does not change after becoming white). It is sufficient that there is no full-period hold display pattern (the display color may be a full-period hold display pattern that does not change after turning gray) that does not change in gray since the occurrence of the hold. Similarly to the above, the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode is adjusted by adjusting the content and determination ratio of the all-period holding display pattern, and the ratio in the case of the first special mode is set to 100%. The ratio in the case of 2 special modes may be less than 100%, or both ratios may be less than 100% and may be different from each other.

  In addition, the display color of the display pattern of the hold display has been kept gray since the time of the hold occurrence, and the hold display pattern that does not change has been prepared. By doing so, a pachinko gaming machine that satisfies the above conditions may be configured.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special mode (especially which is a special mode), the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 2) The special mode includes a first special mode (for example, white) and a second special mode (for example, gray) different from the first special mode, and The display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display to any of the other display modes depending on whether the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode or the second special mode. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio is different.

  In the above embodiment, there are on-hold display patterns (H3-19, H3-20, J3-48, etc.) in which the display color of the on-hold display symbol changes from gray to red or rainbow, but from white to red or rainbow This configuration is realized by the fact that there is no pending display pattern that changes to (FIGS. 25 to 44).

  In addition, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-time hold display in the same way as the hold display pattern A pattern determination table or the like may be prepared. For example, there is an all-period holding display pattern in which the display color of the holding display symbol changes from gray to red or rainbow, but there may be no all-time holding display pattern that changes from white to red or rainbow. The contents of the reference table (FIGS. 50 and 51) for the pending notice this time may be adjusted to satisfy the above configuration. Note that the selection ratios are different. The other display modes that can be changed are the same in the first special mode and the second special mode, but the ratio of the other display modes after the change is different. In addition, it includes a case where other display modes that can be changed are different between the first special mode and the second special mode, or are partially common. For example, in the first special mode, it changes to another display mode A at 100% (that is, when it changes, only the other display mode A changes), and in the second special mode, other display mode The mode B may be changed by 50%, and the other display mode C may be changed by 50%. The display modes A to C are all different. Further, in the first special mode, it changes to another display mode A at 100% (that is, when it changes, only the other display mode A changes), and in the second special mode, other display mode The aspect A may be changed by 50% and the other display aspect B may be changed by 50%. Further, in the first special mode, the display mode changes to 50% for the other display mode A and 50% to the other display mode B (that is, when it changes, it changes only to the other display mode A). In the second special mode, the display mode A may be changed to 70% for the other display mode A and 30% to the other display mode B. The same applies to other selection ratios.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special mode (especially which is a special mode), the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 3) The display mode control unit further includes a notification unit configured to perform a predetermined notification when the display mode of the specific display is set to the special mode. The notification unit is configured so that the display mode control unit Different notification is performed when the display mode is the first special mode and when the display mode is the second special mode.

  For example, when the display color of the reserved display symbol is set to white (displayed in the color (here, white) from the beginning) and changed from another display color to that color (here, white). , “Same”), the first voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and when the display color of the hold display symbol is gray, the second voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. This configuration is realized. Such a sound should just be prescribed | regulated previously with the production | presentation control pattern.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention with a special aspect with an audio | voice, the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 4) The display mode control means is configured such that the display mode is the second special mode when the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode and the second special mode. Only when it is a mode, the display mode of the specific display is always changed from the second special mode to another display mode.

  In the above embodiment, there is a hold display pattern (such as H3-3) in which the display color of the hold display symbol does not change in white since the occurrence of the hold (such as H3-3) (may be a hold display pattern that does not change after becoming white). However, since there is no hold display pattern (the hold display pattern that does not change after becoming gray) that the display color of the hold display symbol does not change in gray since the occurrence of the hold (FIGS. 25 to 44). Configuration is realized. Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, in the all-time hold display pattern determination table, the hold display pattern There is an all-period hold display pattern that does not change in white since the occurrence of the hold (although it may be a hold display pattern that does not change after becoming white), but the display color of the hold display symbol is held It is sufficient that there is no all-period hold display pattern that does not change in gray since time (it may be a hold display pattern that does not change after turning gray).

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special mode (especially which is a special mode), the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 5) The display mode control means is configured such that the display mode is the second special mode when the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode and the second special mode. Only when it is a mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second special mode to the first specific display mode.

  In the above embodiment, there are on-hold display patterns (H3-19, H3-20, J3-48, etc.) in which the display color of the on-hold display symbol changes from gray to red or iridescent, but from white to red or iridescent. This configuration is realized by the fact that there is no changing hold display pattern (FIGS. 25 to 44). Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, in the all-time hold display pattern determination table, the hold display pattern There is a full-period hold display pattern in which the display color changes from gray to red or rainbow, but there is no full-time hold display pattern that changes from white to red or rainbow.

  According to said structure, the change of a specific display can be diversified and the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 6) The display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display to another display mode at any of a plurality of timings, and the display mode of the specific display when a game medium enters the start area. Determine the timing to change.

  In the above embodiment, this configuration is realized by determining the hold display pattern (or the all-period hold display pattern) in step S162. Note that changing the display mode to another display mode may be performed a plurality of times in one variable display.

  According to said structure, determination of the timing which changes the display mode of specific display can be made easy.

  (Configuration 7) The variable display execution means includes variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of identification information to be executed, and the display mode control means is configured to execute the variable display of identification information during execution of variable display. When the display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode, an action effect that changes the display mode as a result of the effect is executed, and the display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode. Depending on the variable display pattern of the variable display of the identification information, the effect mode of the effect is varied or the ratio of executing the effect is varied.

  The variable display pattern includes an execution mode of other effects (such as a notice effect) executed during variable display of the decorative symbols, in addition to the decorative pattern change mode. In this embodiment, the above configuration is realized by determining whether or not the action effects A and B are executed in accordance with whether or not the notice effect is executed in step S162. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the type of action effect (effect mode) may be varied depending on whether or not the notice effect is executed.

  According to said structure, the presence or absence and effect aspect of an effect effect can be determined according to the content of the variable display pattern, and the display aspect of a specific display can be changed in a suitable aspect.

  (Configuration 8) The display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display to the second specific display mode only when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode.

  In the above embodiment, there is a holding display pattern (such as J3-48) in which the display color of the holding display symbol changes from gray to rainbow, but the holding display pattern that changes from normal mode or other notice modes to rainbow color is This configuration is realized by the absence (FIGS. 25 to 44). Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, in the all-time hold display pattern determination table, the hold display pattern There is a whole-period hold display pattern in which the display color changes from gray to rainbow, but it is sufficient that there is no full-time hold display pattern that changes from the normal mode or other notice modes to the rainbow color.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 9) When the display mode of the specific display is a predetermined display mode among the display modes that can be changed from the special mode (when the display mode is a predetermined display mode from the beginning When the predetermined display mode is reached, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the special mode.

  In the above embodiment, there is a hold display pattern (H3-40, H3-47, H3-48, etc.) in which the display color of the hold display symbol changes from gray to green, red, or iridescent, and the display of the hold display symbol There are pending display patterns (K3-41, K3-42, K3-51, etc.) that change from gray to green, red, or iridescent after the color changes from green to gray (FIGS. 25 to 44). This configuration is realized.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, gray to green , Red, or iridescent all-period hold display pattern, after the change of the display color of the hold display symbol from green to gray, then change from gray to green, red, or iridescent for all periods There should be a display pattern.

  According to said structure, the change pattern of a specific display can be diversified and the interest of a game improves. The predetermined display mode may be all of the display modes that can be changed from the special mode, or may be a part of the special mode.

  (Configuration 10) The display mode control means is the special mode when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode changed from the predetermined display mode and the special mode not changed from the predetermined display mode. You may make it change the display mode of the said specific display to another display mode so that the ratio which changes the display mode of the said specific display to another display mode changes with time. The percentages to be compared are 80% on one side and 20% on the other side, and 10% (100%) on one side and 0% (0%) on the other side. It may be. When one ratio is 80% and the other is 20%, for example, in each determination table for determining a hold display pattern, etc., the determination ratio (the specific display When the display mode is the special mode changed from the predetermined display mode, the total display rate or the average value of the holding display pattern determination ratio for changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode), and Determination ratio of the condition that satisfies the other condition (when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode not changed from the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode. What is necessary is just to make it different from the total value or average value of the determination rate of a display pattern. Moreover, in order to make one ratio 100% (100%) and the other ratio 0% (0%), for example, the above-mentioned one condition is satisfied in the hold display pattern and the all-period hold display pattern. There is something, but there should be no one that satisfies the other condition. This is the same in the case of making the ratios different, and also in the case of making one ratio higher (or lower) than the other ratio.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, the one or more hold display patterns (including those in the special mode from the beginning) that change the display mode of the specific display from the predetermined display mode to the special mode are included. There is a hold display pattern that does not change from a special mode to another display mode, but one or more on-hold display patterns that change the display mode of a specific display from a predetermined display mode to a special mode. There is no hold display pattern that does not change the mode. Or, the reverse may be applied. For example, there is no hold display pattern that does not change the special display mode from the special display mode to one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display from the predetermined display mode to the special mode. Among the one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode from the predetermined display mode to the special mode, there may be a hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period holding display pattern determination table, one or more all-period holding display patterns (including those in the special mode from the beginning) that change the display mode of the specific display from a predetermined display mode to a special mode. There is a whole-period hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode, but among the one or more all-time hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display from the predetermined display mode to the special mode The whole-period hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode is avoided. Or, as described above, the reverse may be used.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention to a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 11) The display mode control means is the special mode when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode changed from the predetermined display mode and the special mode not changed from the predetermined display mode. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio for changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode is different.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, the one or more hold display patterns (including those in the special mode from the beginning) that change the display mode of the specific display from the predetermined display mode to the special mode are included. There is no hold display pattern that changes from a special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow), but one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode of a specific display from a predetermined mode to a special mode There is a holding display pattern for changing from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow). Or, the reverse may be applied. For example, the display mode of the specific display is changed from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode from the predetermined mode to the special mode. There is a hold display pattern, but one or more hold display patterns for changing the display mode of the specific display from the predetermined display mode to the special mode, and from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) There may be no hold display pattern to be changed.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period holding display pattern determination table, one or more all-period holding display patterns (including those in the special mode from the beginning) that change the display mode of the specific display from a predetermined display mode to a special mode. There is no whole-period holding display pattern for changing from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow), but one or more changing the display mode of the specific display from the predetermined display mode to the special mode The whole-period hold display pattern is changed from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color). Or, as described above, the reverse may be used.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention to a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 12) The notice mode includes a plurality of notice modes having different ratios of entering the specific gaming state to be notified, and the display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display from the notice mode to the special mode. When changing from the changed special mode to the notification mode, the notification mode that changes from the special mode to the ratio of the specific game state that the notification mode that changes to the special mode notifies The display mode of the specific display is changed so that the proportion of the specific gaming state to be notified is likely to be higher.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in the pending display pattern determination tables of FIGS. 25 to 44, the notice mode after changing from the special mode has the same or higher jackpot expectation as compared to the pre-change mode. The first hold display pattern that becomes the notice mode to be prepared is prepared. The notice mode after the change from the special form is the second hold display pattern that is a notice mode having a lower degree of jackpot expectation than the notice mode before the change. This configuration is realized by not preparing. A second hold display pattern may also be prepared. In this case, the determination ratio in the hold display pattern determination table is higher in the first hold display pattern than in the second hold display pattern. To.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, For the notice mode after the change, a first full-period hold display pattern is prepared, which becomes the notice mode in which the degree of jackpot expectation is the same or higher than the notice mode before the change, and the notice after the change from the special mode This configuration is realized by not preparing a second all-period hold display pattern that is a notification mode with a lower jackpot expectation than the notification mode before the change. Note that a second all-period hold display pattern may also be prepared. In this case, the determination ratio in the all-period hold display pattern determination table is the first all-period hold display pattern rather than the second all-period hold display pattern. The display pattern may be higher.

According to said structure, a player's discouragement can be reduced and the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 13) When the display mode of the specific display is a partial display mode among the display modes that can be changed from the special mode, the display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display to the special mode. The display mode of the specific display is not changed to the special mode when the display mode of the specific display is the remaining part of the display modes that can be changed from the special mode.

  For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, when there is a hold display pattern that changes from a special mode to green and yellow, there is a hold display pattern that changes from green to a special mode (for example, gray), but from yellow to a special mode ( For example, there is no hold display pattern that changes to gray). Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, If there is an all-period hold display pattern that changes from green to yellow, there is an all-period hold display pattern that changes from green to a special mode (eg, gray), but all changes that change from yellow to a special mode (eg, gray). There should be no period hold display pattern.

  According to said structure, it can be made to pay attention to the display mode of a specific display, and the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 14) The notice mode includes a plurality of notice modes having different ratios to be notified of the specific gaming state, and the display mode control means is configured to display the specific mode when the display mode is the special mode. When the display mode of the specific display displayed by the display unit this time is the special mode, the ratio of the display mode of the specific display to the specific gaming state to be notified in the plurality of notification modes is set. The display mode of the specific display is changed to the specific notice mode so that the rate of change to the specific notice mode higher than a predetermined threshold is different.

  In the above embodiment, when the current current color is white, the reference table TA-1 is referred to (FIGS. 50 and 51). Since all the determination values of the reference table TA-1 are assigned to “no change”, in this case, the current hold notice is not executed. In other words, when the hold display symbols displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb are in a special mode, the display mode may change to another display mode (see the hold display pattern). This configuration is realized by not changing to another display mode when the displayed on-hold display symbol is in a special mode.

  In addition, when determining the transition of the change of the display mode of the specific display at once using the all-period hold display pattern determination table, for example, the special mode is displayed in red while the specific display is displayed in the hold display area. And a second all-period hold display pattern that changes from a special mode to red and iridescent when a specific display is displayed in the current display area without preparing a first all-period hold display pattern that changes to a rainbow color. The above configuration may be realized by preparing Alternatively, both the first all-period hold display pattern and the second all-period hold display pattern may be prepared so that the above condition is satisfied depending on the determination ratio.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect (especially whether the specific display of a special aspect is displayed on a holding area this time or displayed on a holding display area), the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 15) The display mode control means is more suitable when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the current display unit is the special mode than when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode. The display mode of the specific display is changed to the specific warning mode so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the specific warning mode becomes high.

  For example, when determining the transition of the change in the display mode of the specific display at once using the all-period hold display pattern determination table, for example, while the specific display is displayed in the hold display area, The second all-period holding display pattern that changes from the special mode to red and rainbow when the specific display is displayed in the current display area without preparing the first all-period holding display pattern that changes to the rainbow color. The above configuration may be realized by preparing. Alternatively, both the first all-period hold display pattern and the second all-period hold display pattern may be prepared so that the above condition is satisfied depending on the determination ratio.

  According to said structure, a player can have a feeling of expectation in the specific display of the special aspect currently displayed on the display area, and the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 16) The display mode control means may include the case where the display mode of the specific display is the special mode and the case where the display mode of the specific display displayed by the current display unit is the special mode. Only when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the display means this time is the special mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed to a predetermined notification mode of the plurality of notification modes.

  For example, when determining the transition of the change in the display mode of the specific display at once using the all-period hold display pattern determination table, for example, when the specific display is displayed in the hold display area, The above configuration is realized by preparing a whole-period hold display pattern that changes from a special mode to a rainbow color when a specific display is displayed in the current display area without preparing a whole-period hold display pattern that changes to May be.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the specific display of the special aspect currently displayed on the display area, the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 17) The variable display execution means includes variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of identification information to be executed, and the display mode control means is the specific display displayed by the current display means. The display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit immediately before the current display unit displays the specific display, the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit, Based on the above, it is changed to one of the plurality of notice modes.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, this configuration is determined by referring to a reference table corresponding to the variable display pattern and the current color, and determining whether or not the current hold notice is executed and the contents of the current hold notice. Is realized. In the above embodiment, in one variable display, the random value MR3 is not extracted again once extracted. For example, the random value MR3 is extracted once at the time of starting winning. The variable category may be re-determined by extracting MR3 at the start of variable display.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to combine the current hold notice and the variable display, and it is possible to make it difficult for production to be chewed. This is particularly effective when the expectation degree of jackpot of a variation category is greatly different from the expectation degree of jackpot of a variation pattern within the variation category. In addition, for example, the super-reach A with two quasi-continuations has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the super-reach B without the quasi-continuation, and the big hit expectation degree of the fluctuation pattern and the big hit expectation degree of the fluctuation category It is also effective when is different.

  (Configuration 18) The display mode control unit sets the display mode of the specific display to the special mode at any one of a plurality of timings, and sets the display mode of the specific display at the first timing of the plurality of timings. The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of entering the specific gaming state differs between when the special mode is selected and when the special mode is changed at the second timing later than the first timing.

  In the above embodiment, in the hold display pattern in the case where the target is the hold storage fourth, when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes to white or gray in the next change, the final display color is only green. (K3-7, K3-11, K3-19, etc.) When the display mode of the hold display symbol changes to gray in the next change, the final display color becomes green or red or rainbow (K3-13). , K3-14, K3-15, K3-22, K3-23, etc.) (FIGS. 35 to 44), the jackpot expectation of the notice mode of the hold display symbol will be different, so the above configuration is realized. Is done.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the target in the all-period hold display pattern determination table is held. In the hold display pattern in the case of the fourth storage, when the display form of the hold display symbol changes to white or gray in the next variation, the final display color (here, the final color in the current display area (the current hold area) Including the color after changing due to the advance notice.)) Is only green, but when the display pattern of the hold display symbol changes to gray in the next change, the final display color will be red and rainbow colors as well as green Like that.

  Even when the target is the fourth hold storage, the hold display pattern determination table or the all-period hold display pattern determination table may be set so that the above-described condition of the configuration 18 is satisfied (the following configuration) But the same).

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect (especially timing which becomes a special aspect), the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 19) The display mode control means is configured to change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode at a third timing among the plurality of timings and at a fourth timing that is later than the third timing. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display of the special mode to another display mode is different from that when the special mode is changed. The third timing may be the same as or different from the first timing, and the fourth timing may be the same as or different from the second timing (hereinafter referred to as the first to first timings). Same for the fourth timing).

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, among one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next variation, there is a hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode. In the one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next variation, no hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode is set. Alternatively, the determination ratio may be adjusted so that both of the hold display patterns exist.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, the entire period during which the display mode of the specific display is changed from the special mode to another display mode in one or more all-period hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next change. There is a hold display pattern, but one or more all-period hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next variation, the all-period hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode Not to be.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the timing which becomes a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 20) When the display mode of the specific display is set to the special mode at the third timing among the plurality of timings, the display mode control unit is configured to perform the display at the fourth timing that is later than the third timing. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display of the special mode to another display mode is different from when the special mode is changed. Change.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, in one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next variation, the special mode is changed to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color). There is no pending display pattern to be changed, but one or more on-hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next-order variation, from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) There is a hold display pattern to be changed.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, one or more all-period hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next change include other predetermined display modes (for example, There is no holding display pattern to be changed to (rainbow), but one or more all-period holding display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next variation are changed from the special mode to another predetermined display mode. There is a whole-period hold display pattern that is changed to (for example, rainbow).

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the timing which becomes a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 21) The display mode control means sets the display mode of the specific display of the special mode to the first mode only when the display mode of the specific display is set to the special mode at a predetermined timing among the plurality of timings. To a specific display mode.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, one or more hold display patterns for changing the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next-order variation, and other predetermined display modes (for example, rainbow colors) from the special mode There is a hold display pattern to be changed, but in one or more hold display patterns to be changed to a special mode at other timings, a hold to change from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) There should be no display pattern.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, the all-period hold display pattern in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above conditions may be satisfied by adjusting the content, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, one or more all-period hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next variation are changed from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, There is a whole-period hold display pattern to be changed to a rainbow color), but one or more whole-period hold display patterns to be made special at other timings may include other predetermined display forms (for example, In other words, there is no whole-period hold display pattern to be changed to (rainbow).

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the timing which becomes a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 22) The said display mode control means is provided with the change suggestion effect execution means which performs the change suggestion effect which suggests changing the display mode of the said specific display.

  The change suggestion effect is realized, for example, by an effect of displaying boomerang S1 or the like in the effect effect. Since such a presentation may change the display mode of the specific display, it is suggested that the display mode of the specific display is changed. Note that the change suggestion effect may be one that changes the specific display in addition to displaying an image other than the specific display. For example, although the display color of the specific display is white or gray, an effect that makes the specific display cracked may be used as the change suggestion effect. Further, an operation means such as a push button may be provided so that the change suggestion effect proceeds according to the operation of the operation means. For example, the crack may be increased in accordance with the number of times the push button is repeatedly pressed (however, the timing at which the display mode is actually changed may be determined in advance). The change suggestion effect includes a period suggestion effect described later.

According to the above configuration, since the player pays attention to the change suggestion effect, the interest of the game is improved.
(Configuration 23) The display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode at any one of a plurality of timings, and changes the display mode of the specific display among the plurality of timings. The specific gaming state is determined when the special mode is changed to another display mode at the first timing and when the special mode is changed to another display mode at a second timing later than the first timing. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the ratio becomes different.

  In the above embodiment, when the target is the fourth hold memory and the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from white or gray in the next-order fluctuation, the final display color can be changed to red or rainbow. (K3-42, K3-49-51, etc.) When the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from gray in the next change, the final display color does not become red or rainbow (K3-9, K3-18, K3-20 etc.) (FIGS. 25 to 44), the above-described configuration is realized.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the target in the all-period hold display pattern determination table is held. In the case of the fourth memory, when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from white or gray in the secondary change, the final display color can change to red or rainbow, but in the secondary change, When the display mode changes from gray, the whole-period hold display pattern is set so that the final display color does not become red or rainbow.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a specific aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 24) The display mode control means is slower than the third timing and the ratio at which the display mode of the specific display is changed from the special mode to another display mode at the third timing of the plurality of timings. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the ratio of changing from the special mode to another display mode is different at the fourth timing.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in each hold display pattern determination table, the determination ratio (total value or average value) of the hold display pattern that changes the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode in the next variation, and the special mode in the next variation The determination ratio (total value or average value) of the hold display pattern to be changed from one display mode to another display mode is made different.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in each all-period hold display pattern determination table, the determination ratio of the all-period hold display pattern that changes the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode in the next variation, and the special mode in the next variation The determination ratio of the whole-period hold display pattern to be changed to the display mode is made different.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the change timing from a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 25) The display mode control means is configured to select the display ratio of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode at the third timing of the plurality of timings and the third display mode. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio of changing from the special mode to the other display mode is different at a fourth timing later than the above timing.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, there is no hold display pattern for changing the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in the next variation, but the display mode of the specific display is In the next variation, there is a holding display pattern for changing from a special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color).

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period holding display pattern determination table, there is no all-period holding display pattern that changes the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in the next variation. There is a whole-period holding display pattern that changes the display mode from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in the next variation.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the change timing from a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 26) The display mode control means is configured to change the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode at a predetermined timing of the plurality of timings. Is changed to the first specific display mode.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, there is a hold display pattern that changes the display mode of the specific display from a special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in the next variation, but it is special at other timings. There is no hold display pattern for changing from a mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color).

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period holding display pattern determination table, there is a whole-period holding display pattern that changes the display mode of the specific display from a particular mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in the next variation. At this timing, there is no whole-period holding display pattern for changing from a special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color).

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the change timing from a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 27) The display mode control means includes period suggestion effect execution means for executing a period suggestion effect that suggests a period until the display mode of the specific display is changed from the special mode to another display mode.

  For example, in step S172, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a period suggesting effect that suggests a period until the special mode is changed to another display mode. The period suggesting effect may be defined by the effect control pattern. For example, a period suggestion is performed by displaying an image as shown in FIG. 60 and displaying “5 more seconds”.

According to the above configuration, since the player pays attention to the period suggesting effect, the interest of the game is improved.
(Structure 28) The display mode control means may store the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means when the hold storage means stores the hold information as new hold information (for example, the new hold information). The holding information is not included in the stored number.) When the first number is different from the first number and when the second number is different from the first number, The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the special mode is different.

  In the above embodiment, the determination ratio in each hold display pattern determination table is the time when the target holds the third hold memory (that is, the third hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs, In the case where the number of stored hold information stored in the hold storage means is 2), the target is the fourth hold memory (that is, the fourth hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure). The display of the hold information stored in the hold storage means is 3), and the display mode of the hold display pattern becomes a special mode at any timing. This configuration is realized by setting the determination ratio (the average or total value of the determination ratios of the hold display pattern) to be different (the contents of the hold display pattern may be changed as necessary). For example, the determination ratio or the like is adjusted so that the ratio in which the fourth direction becomes a special mode is higher.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, the determination ratio and pattern of each all-period hold display pattern determination table When the target is the third hold memory (that is, when the third hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs) and the target is the fourth hold memory (that is, the first special figure) The determination ratio of the whole-period hold display pattern in which the display mode of the hold display symbol becomes a special mode at any timing when the fourth hold memory in the 1 special figure or the second special figure occurs) This configuration is realized by setting so that (the average or total value of the determination ratios of the hold display pattern) is different. For example, the determination ratio or the like is adjusted so that the ratio in which the fourth direction becomes a special mode is higher.

  According to said structure, since a player pays more attention to a special aspect by paying attention to the number of the hold information which a hold | maintenance memory | storage means memorize | stores, the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 29) The display mode control means is configured such that when the hold storage means stores the new hold information, the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means is a first specific storage number. When the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is changed to the special mode, the hold storage means stores the new hold information when the hold storage means stores the new hold information. The specific indication displayed in correspondence with the new hold information when the storage number of the hold information is other than the first specific storage number is made more specific than when the special display is set to the special mode. The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of entering the gaming state increases. Note that the first specific storage number may be either the first number or the second number.

  For example, even when the number of stored hold information stored in the hold storage means is one when the hold storage means stores the new hold information, the hold display pattern is determined and the hold display is displayed. In the hold display pattern determination table that can control the mode and is referenced when the number of stored hold information is 1, the hold display pattern of which the rainbow color or red is the final display color is compared to the other stored numbers. This is achieved by increasing the decision rate.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is a specific display displayed in the hold display area and a specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, refer to when the number of stored hold information is one. In the all-period hold display pattern determination table that is displayed, the hold display in which the rainbow color or red becomes the final display color (here, the last color of the display color displayed in the current display area), as compared with other memory numbers. This is achieved by increasing the pattern determination ratio.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  (Structure 30) The display mode control means may be configured such that when the hold storage means stores the new hold information, the hold information stored in the hold storage means is a third number. The hold stored in the hold storage means when the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is in the special mode and when the hold storage means stores the new hold information. When the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is changed to the special mode when the number of stored information is a fourth number different from the third number, You may make it change the display mode of the said specific display to another display mode so that the ratio which changes the display mode of the said specific display to another display mode differs. The third number or the fourth number may be the same as or different from the first number or the second number (hereinafter the same).

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, one or more hold displays that are selected when the number of stored hold information is a third number and that make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode There is no hold display pattern in the pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode, but is selected when the stored number of the hold information is the fourth number, and the specification corresponding to the hold display Among the one or more hold display patterns that make the display mode of display special, there is a hold display pattern that changes from the special mode to another display mode.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, one or more that is selected when the storage number of the hold information is a third number and that makes the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode There is no all-period hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode in the all-period hold display pattern, but is selected when the storage number of the hold information is the fourth number, and Among the one or more whole-period hold display patterns that make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode, there is a whole-period hold display pattern that is changed from the special mode to another display mode.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  (Structure 31) When the display mode control unit stores the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage unit when the hold storage unit stores the new hold information, the display mode control unit is a third number. The hold stored in the hold storage means when the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is in the special mode and when the hold storage means stores the new hold information. When the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is changed to the special mode when the number of stored information is a fourth number different from the third number, The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio for changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode is different.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, one or more hold displays that are selected when the number of stored hold information is a third number and that make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode There is no pending display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in the pattern, but is selected when the number of stored hold information is the fourth number, and Among the one or more hold display patterns that make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode, a hold display pattern that changes from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) To be.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, one or more that is selected when the storage number of the hold information is a third number and that makes the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode There is no all-period hold display pattern in the all-period hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color), but the number of stored hold information is the fourth number. Among the one or more all-period holding display patterns that are selected at times and make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display in a special mode, other special display modes (for example, rainbow colors) from the special mode ) So that there is a whole-period hold display pattern to be changed.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  (Structure 32) The display mode control means is configured such that when the hold storage means stores the new hold information, the hold information stored in the hold storage means is a second specific storage number ( When the specific display displayed in correspondence with the new hold information is set to the special mode when the number is the same as or different from the first specific storage number) Corresponding to the new hold information when the stored number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means is a number other than the second specific stored number. The specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information when the stored number of the hold information is the second specific stored number, when the displayed specific display is in the special mode. Only when the display is in the special mode, The specific display of the display mode of the special embodiment is changed to a first specific display mode.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, one or more hold display patterns that are selected when the number of the hold information stored is a predetermined number and that make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode. There is a holding display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color), but is selected when the stored number of the holding information is other than the predetermined number, and There is no hold display pattern for changing from the special form to another predetermined display form (for example, rainbow color) in one or more hold display patterns that make the display form of the specific display corresponding to the hold display special. To.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display pattern determination table or the all-period hold The above conditions may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the display pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, one or more all periods that are selected when the number of stored hold information is a predetermined number and that make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode When there is an all-period hold display pattern in the hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color), but the number of stored hold information is other than the predetermined number Among the one or more whole-period hold display patterns that are selected and the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display is a special mode, the special mode is changed to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color). Make sure that there is no hold display pattern for the entire period to be changed.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  (Structure 33) When the display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display to the special mode, the display mode control unit executes any one of a plurality of types of effect effects that change the display mode as a result of the effect. The proportion of the specific gaming state differs between when the first action effect of the plurality of types of action effects is executed and when the second action effect different from the first action effect is executed. As described above, the action effect is executed.

  In the above embodiment, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of the action effect B is high, the determination ratio of the action effect A is the next highest, and the determination ratio of no execution is the lowest. When the special figure display result is “losing”, the opposite is true, so that this configuration is realized. It should be noted that the execution ratio of the effect and the determination ratio of the type may be different depending on which color the display mode of the specific display is changed to. For example, when changing to red or rainbow, the action effect B is easy to be executed, and in other cases, the action effect A is easy to be executed. In addition, it is also possible to make it easier to execute the effect when the expectation level for big hits is greater before and after the change (when it is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold).

  When the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, the action effect A or B can be executed even in the current hold notice. do it. At this time, the action effect may be executed at the same determination ratio as the action effect in the hold display area.

  According to said structure, since a player pays more attention to a special aspect by paying attention to which action effect changed to a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 34) The display mode control means does not change the display mode of the specific display despite the execution of the action effect.

  For example, an action effect (image on the right side of the second stage in FIG. 56) that causes the boomerang S1 to disappear midway may be executed. For example, in step S162, even if there is no change in the display mode, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect is determined. The production control pattern to be set is set. Then, based on this, an action effect may be executed in step S172.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to an effect production, the interest of a game improves. Thereby, the execution frequency of the effect presentation can be increased. In addition, when the specific display is in a special mode, the effect is made easier to execute than in other display modes, so that the player can easily expect the change to the notice mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

  (Structure 35) When the said display aspect control means performs the 4th effect production different from the said 3rd effect effect, when performing the 3rd effect effect among the said multiple types of effect effects. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the other display mode after changing to the special mode is different. The third action effect and the fourth action effect may be the same as or different from the first action effect and the second action effect (hereinafter the same).

  For example, in step S162, the effect control CPU 120 checks the data stored in the notice buffer and changes the data read from the notice buffer this time when the display form is changed to the special form this time. The ratio of determining whether to execute one of the effects A and B according to whether or not the special mode of the screen further changes to another display mode and whether or not to change to another display mode The presence or absence of execution of the effect A or B is determined with reference to the tables with different values.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention to an effect production, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 36) When the said display mode control means performs the 4th effect production different from the said 3rd effect effect, when performing the 3rd effect effect among the said multiple types of effect effects. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio for changing the display mode of the specific display after changing to the special mode to another display mode is different.

  For example, in step S162, the effect control CPU 120 checks the data stored in the notice buffer and changes the data read from the notice buffer this time when the display form is changed to the special form this time. It is checked whether the special mode is changed to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color). When the special mode is changed to another predetermined display mode, the action effect A is executed, and the other predetermined display mode is executed. When it does not change, action effect B is executed.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention to an effect production, the interest of a game improves.
(Configuration 37) When the display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display from the normal mode to another display mode, and when the display mode of the specific display changes from the special mode to another display mode The effect production is executed at different rates.

  For example, in step S162, the effect control CPU 120 or the like changes the display mode from the normal mode to another display mode this time, and the data read from the notice buffer changes from the normal mode to another display mode. What is necessary is just to make it determine the decision ratio which performs an effect production by what is to change. The determination ratio of the determination table or the like may be different depending on whether the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another display mode or when the display mode is changed from the special mode to another display mode (one side) May be “0”).

According to said structure, an effect production can be performed suitably and the interest of a game improves.
(Arrangement 38) The gaming machine includes presentation execution means for executing presentation in any of a plurality of presentation modes in response to variable display of identification information executed by the variable display execution section. When the production mode of the production executed by the production execution means is the first production mode among the plurality of production modes, and when the production mode is the second production mode different from the first production mode, The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the special mode is different. In the above-described embodiment, the production mode is different in the probability variation state and the non-probability variation state. For example, the production mode (low accuracy base or high accuracy base and different performance modes in other cases ( Probability latent mode and other modes) may be prepared. Further, a plurality of types of variation pattern tables and variation category tables are provided depending on the mode, and the rendering mode is changed depending on which table is referred to (notification from the CPU 103 to the rendering control CPU 120 by the rendering control command). Also good. The production mode may differ depending on the execution of the pre-reading notice production. In addition, the effect mode may be switched independently on the effect control CPU 120 side without being based on the notification from the CPU 103.

  In the above embodiment, in the hold display pattern determination table, when the effect mode is the normal mode, the display color of the hold display symbol may be white (H3-3, H3-5, etc.), but the effect mode is the probability change mode. In this case, the display color of the hold display symbol is not white (FIGS. 25 to 44). In this way, by changing the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display symbols to the special mode (here, white) according to the production mode (not only 0% and 100%, but also 20% and 80%, etc.) This configuration is realized. Note that the ratio of white and gray may be varied according to the production mode (adjusted by the determination ratio or the like).

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, when the effect mode is the normal mode, the display color of the hold display symbol may be white (H3-3, H3-5, etc.), but when the effect mode is the probability change mode. The display color of the hold display symbol is not white (FIGS. 25 to 44). In this way, by changing the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display symbols to the special mode (here, white) according to the production mode (not only 0% and 100%, but also 20% and 80%, etc.) This configuration is realized. Note that the ratio of white and gray may be varied according to the production mode (adjusted by the determination ratio or the like).

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 39) In the display mode control means, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is a third effect mode (may be the same as the first effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes. The display mode of the specific display is made different between the time and the fourth effect mode (which may be the same as the second effect mode) different from the third effect mode.

  In the said embodiment, this structure is implement | achieved by making the shape of a holding | maintenance display symbol differ according to whether production mode is probability change mode or normal mode. The display mode includes not only the shape but also the size and position. In addition, when the normal mode, the special mode, and the notice mode are expressed in a color other than the display color, the display color may be changed according to the effect mode. When the display position is changed according to the effect mode, for example, the hold display symbols are displayed in a single horizontal row in the normal mode, but may be displayed in a vertical row in the probability change mode. Alternatively, the hold display symbols are displayed in a horizontal row in the normal mode, but may be displayed side by side in the probability changing mode by changing the vertical position. Further, if the production mode is the normal mode, the size of the hold display symbol may be reduced, and if the effect mode is the probability change mode, the hold display symbol may be increased.

According to said structure, an effect diversifies and the interest of a game improves.
(Arrangement 40) It further comprises a game state control means for controlling any one of a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player, and the effect execution means is characterized in that the gaming state control means is one of the plurality of gaming states. The production mode is made different between when controlling to the first state and when controlling to the second state different from the first state.

  In the above-described embodiment, a probability variation state and a non-probability variation state are prepared. When the probability variation state is established, the effect mode is the probability variation mode, and when the probability variation state is established, the effect mode is the normal mode. .

According to said structure, an effect diversifies and the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 41) The variable display execution means includes variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of identification information to be executed, and the display mode control means is configured such that the variable display execution means has a predetermined variable display. When the variable display of the identification information is executed by the pattern, the display mode of the specific display is shifted to a predetermined state that makes it easier to make the special mode than usual.

  For example, each variable display pattern determination table or each whole period reserved display pattern determination table that is referred to in a predetermined state is to be shifted to a predetermined state when a variable display is executed with a variation pattern of reach loss, Each hold display pattern decision that refers to the determination ratio (average value or total value) of the hold display pattern or the whole-period hold display pattern that makes the display mode of the specific display the special mode in a state other than a predetermined state (particularly the normal state) In the table and each all-period hold display pattern determination table, the display mode of the specific display is set higher than the determination ratio (average value or total value) of the hold display pattern or the all-period hold display pattern that makes the special mode. The variable display pattern may be an effect pattern during variable display or a variation pattern. When the variable display of the identification information is executed with the predetermined variable display pattern, for example, when a plurality of variation pattern tables are prepared and the variation pattern table is switched, or when the effect control CPU 120 switches the effect mode. May be. The change of the variation pattern table may be triggered by, for example, the occurrence of a small hit (display result different from the big win). In this case, a reach loss effect is produced and the opening period of the big prize opening is very short. By doing so, it is difficult to recognize that a small hit has occurred, and the game performance is improved.

According to said structure, an effect diversifies and the interest of a game improves.
(Configuration 42) The display mode control means executes a specific effect in which the display mode of the specific display is the notice mode, and the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit is the normal mode. The specific effect is executed so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the notice mode is higher when the special mode is selected, and the execution period of the specific effect and a period other than the execution period The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of the display mode of the other specific display that is not the target of the specific effect displayed by the hold display unit or the current display unit differs from the special mode. . Here, the execution period of the specific effect may be a period including at least one of a period for changing the display mode of the specific display to the notice mode and a period for displaying the specific display of the notice mode.

  In the above embodiment, during the execution period of the pre-reading notice for the hold display symbols other than the hold display symbol that is the target this time (the effect that uses the hold display symbols as the notice mode), the display mode of the hold display symbols is set in the current target. It is forbidden to use anything other than the normal mode (including special modes). It should be noted that this prohibition target may or may not include the specific display displayed in the current display area (this is the target in the above embodiment). Thereby, this configuration is realized. In addition, during the execution period of the pre-reading notice for the hold display symbols other than the target hold display symbols this time (the effect that uses the hold display symbols as the notice mode), the display mode of the hold display symbols is compared to other periods. The ratio of making other than the normal mode may be decreased or conversely increased. In addition, during the current hold notice execution period for hold display symbols other than the hold display symbol that is the target this time, the ratio of prohibiting the display mode of the hold display symbol from being other than the normal mode in the current target is low. Or it may be higher. Moreover, you may prohibit or make a ratio low only about making it a special mode.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Arrangement 43) The gaming machine includes a specific effect executing unit that executes a specific effect for notifying the ratio of the specific game state for the specific display, and the display mode control unit includes an execution period of the specific effect and the specific effect. The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the special mode differs depending on the period other than the execution period.

  For example, a pre-reading notice effect (for example, an effect of changing the background of the display image in the image display device 5) other than changing the display mode of the hold display symbol to the notice mode is executed for the hold display symbol displayed in the hold display area. It is assumed that the presentation control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display symbol other than the normal mode in the current target during the execution period of the pre-reading notice effect for the hold display symbol other than the hold display symbol that is the target this time (special Including the aspect) is prohibited. The prohibited display may include a specific display displayed in the current display area. In addition, during the execution period of the pre-reading notice effect for the hold display symbol other than the target hold display symbol this time, the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display symbol to something other than the normal mode compared to other periods. You may make it low or conversely high. Moreover, you may prohibit or make a ratio low only about making it a special mode. The pre-reading notice effect may be defined by the effect control pattern.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 44) The display mode control unit or the specific effect executing unit includes an execution determining unit that determines to execute the specific effect, and the execution determining unit performs the specific effect during an execution period of the specific effect. The period from when it is determined to be executed until the specific effect is executed is included.

  For example, in the above embodiment, at the time of starting winning (step S162), the target flag is turned on (step S508) when it is determined that the hold display symbol is other than the normal mode (step S508), and thereafter, the hold is held in step S504. This configuration is realized by prohibiting the display symbol from being other than the normal mode.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Arrangement 45) The display mode control means or the specific effect execution unit may be configured such that the ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on whether the display mode of the specific display is the special mode or not. The specific effect is executed.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S162 whether or not to execute the prefetching notice effect or the prefetching notice. At this time, when the display mode of the other reserved display symbols is a special mode, When it is not an aspect, the ratio to be determined to execute the prefetching notice effect or the prefetching notice is changed. The prefetching notice effect and the prefetching notice may be defined in the effect control pattern.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 46) It comprises a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect for notifying the proportion of the specific game state displayed on the specific display displayed by the hold display means, and the specific effect executing means is a display mode of the specific display. The specific effect is executed so that the ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on whether the is a special aspect or not.

  For example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice in step S162. At this time, when the display mode of the other reserved display symbols is a special mode and when it is not a special mode. , The rate at which the pre-reading notice is executed is varied. The pre-reading notice only needs to be specified in the production control pattern.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 47) The display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit to the special mode (other than the case of changing to the special mode from the beginning, and changing the display mode from the middle to the special mode. The display of the specific display displayed by the hold display means when the special mode is not changed to another display mode until the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the specific display is executed. The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of the specific gaming state is lower than when the mode is the normal state at the end. Alternatively, the display mode control unit may change the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit to the special mode (in addition to the case of changing to the special mode from the beginning, the special mode from the middle) The special mode is changed to another display mode until a predetermined timing in the variable information display execution period of the identification information corresponding to the specific display (for example, it may be the end of the display period of the specific display). When not changed, the percentage of the specific gaming state is lower than when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit is the last normal state. In addition, the display mode of the specific display is controlled.

  In the above embodiment, in the hold display pattern determination table, a hold display pattern (such as H3-3) that does not change the display color of the hold display symbol from white at the start of display (when the hold occurs) to white is selected at the time of loss. It is selected only for the fluctuation categories PA1 and PA2. Alternatively, a hold display pattern that changes from white to white and remains white until the end may be prepared, and the hold display pattern may be selected only in the variation categories PA1 and PA2 selected at the time of loss. On the other hand, the hold display pattern (H3-1, H3-4, etc.) in which the final color is blue may be selected in the variation category PB3 selected at the time of big hit (FIGS. 25 to 44). Thereby, this configuration is realized. The display color of the on-hold display symbol is changed from white at the start of display (at the time of the on-hold) to white (may be gray) so that the on-hold display pattern that is not changed is selected even at the time of big hit, and the specific gaming state is determined at a determined rate. The ratio may be changed. That is, one ratio may not be “0” (the same applies hereinafter).

  When the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the contents of the all-period hold display pattern in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the determination ratio and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, the all-period hold display pattern that does not change the display color of the hold display symbol from white at the start of display (at the time of hold occurrence) to white is displayed in the variation categories PA1 and PA2 selected at the time of the loss. On the other hand, the hold display pattern that is selected only when the final color is blue may be selected when the variation category PB3 is selected when the big hit. The predetermined timing in the execution period of the variable display of the identification information may be an appropriate timing such as before the start of reach, after the start of reach, or before the derivation of the variable display result. Note that a whole-period hold display pattern that changes to white from the middle and remains white until the end is prepared, and the all-period hold display pattern is selected only for the variable categories PA1 and PA2 selected at the time of loss. Also good.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Configuration 48) When the variable display of the identification information executed by the variable display execution unit does not reach the reach mode and the display result does not become the specific display result, the display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display. After the special mode, the display mode is not changed. When the variable display does not become a specific mode such as a pseudo-ream, the display mode of the specific display may be changed to the special mode and not changed to another display mode. In addition, when the display mode of the specific display is not changed to another display mode after changing to the special mode (for example, it may be specified based on the hold display pattern determined at the time of starting winning), the target is held. Regardless of the variation pattern at the time of variable display corresponding to the display symbol, variable display may be executed so as not to reach the reach mode (or specific mode) (such an effect control pattern is set).

  In the above-described embodiment, in the hold display pattern determination table, the hold display pattern is selected so that the display color of the hold display symbol is changed to white from the start of display only when the variable categories are PA1 and PA2. When the display color of the target is changed to white from the start of display and is not changed, the variable display of the target is not in the reach mode. Thereby, this configuration is realized. Alternatively, a hold display pattern that changes from white to white and remains white until the end may be prepared, and the hold display pattern may be selected only in the variation categories PA1 and PA2 selected at the time of loss.

  When the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the contents of the all-period hold display pattern in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the determination ratio and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, only when the variable category is PA1 and PA2, the all-period hold display pattern that does not change the display color of the hold display symbol to white from the start of display is selected. When the display color of the hold display symbol is changed to white from the start of display and is not changed, the variable display of the target is made not to reach the reach. Thereby, this configuration is realized.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Configuration 49) The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes suggestion effect execution means for executing an suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display is changed from the special mode to another display mode.

  The change suggestion effect is realized, for example, by an effect of displaying boomerang S1 or the like in the effect effect. Since such a presentation may change the display mode of the specific display, it is suggested that the display mode of the specific display is changed.

  According to the above configuration, the player expects the display mode of the specific display to change from the special mode due to the suggestion effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  (Configuration 50) The specific gaming state is a state in which a predetermined gaming value can be given more than usual, and the gaming machine has the display mode control unit set the display mode of the specific display to the special mode. Provided with a privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege different from the game value when not changing to another display mode.

  For example, when a hold display pattern that does not change the display color of the hold display pattern to white from the start of display is selected in the hold display pattern determination table, or the display color of the hold display pattern is displayed in the all-period hold display pattern determination table When a whole-period hold display pattern that is white and does not change from the start is selected, points such that a premium image can be viewed may be given to the player after the timing at which the hold display may change (for example, FIG. 61). For example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the points in the RAM 122 and outputs the accumulated points as a two-dimensional code or the like at a predetermined timing. A player can view a premium image or the like by reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile phone or the like.

  According to said structure, even if the display mode of a specific display does not change from a special mode, the interest of a game can be maintained.

  (Modifications) The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment and the like, and the one described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. The structure of the part may be provided. Below, the modification of the said embodiment is shown. You may combine at least one part about each of the following modification.

  Note that the change in the display mode of the specific display displayed in the hold display area may be determined for each change. For example, the display mode change of the specific display may be determined with reference to commands stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer.

  What is necessary is just to satisfy | fill said each structure by adjusting the determination ratio of the hold display pattern of each hold display pattern determination table of FIGS. 25-44, and the determination ratio of each table of FIG.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 120 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of the pseudo-ream, one change pattern command is used when starting the change. Although an example of transmission is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 120 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-continuity, whether there is a slip effect, etc. before reaching reach (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach does not reach, the so-called first You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control board 120 may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 120 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various production operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, it may be distributed in a pre-installed manner in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  With regard to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, it has been described that processing (information output processing) for outputting information (data) related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the information output circuit to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by such an information output process may include a winning information signal that can identify the winning opening where the game ball has won and the number of winning.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a plurality of types of winning ports such as a first starting winning port, a second starting winning port, a large winning port, and a general winning port are provided. Then, the winning of the game balls in these winning holes is detected by a winning detection switch such as the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the winning port switch, and the detection signal is a game. Input to the control microcomputer 100.

  The game control microcomputer 100 can perform processing for counting and storing the number of game balls (winning number) won in each winning port during a predetermined period based on a detection signal input from the winning detection switch. It is possible, and by performing such processing, winning information that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won during a predetermined period is stored. Then, the game control microcomputer 100, based on such winning information, every time a predetermined period elapses, a winning information signal that can identify the winning mouth and the winning number that the game ball has won in each predetermined period. Is output from the information output circuit to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The number of winnings specified by the winning information signal that can be counted and stored in the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the winning opening and the winning number that the game ball has won can be specified is, for example, every predetermined elapsed time such as every 10 minutes. Information on the number of winnings (output every predetermined elapsed time), information on the number of winnings for each period required to generate one big hit gaming state (output every time a big winning gaming state occurs), each day Information regarding the number of winnings since the power was turned on (output every predetermined elapsed time), and information regarding the number of winnings for each player (when the player can be specified by player specifying information such as game card information) In addition, any information may be output when the end of the game is selected by each player.

  In addition, as the winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the winning number that the game ball has won, the winning opening and the winning number (one piece) that are output every time the gaming ball wins any of the winning holes, and May be a winning information signal that can identify the

  Further, as another example of outputting the winning information signal to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in order to perform an operation test on a part of the output terminals of the main board 11 with a test device provided outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. These connection parts may be connected, and a winning information signal indicating the latest winning information in the current gaming state may be output from the gaming control microcomputer 100 to the outside via the connecting portion.

  In this way, a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning points of the game balls is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the winning opening where the gaming balls have won outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. It is possible to recognize winning information that can specify the number of winnings.

[Second Embodiment]
As the second embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine having the game control as an example of the game control, such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the first embodiment, is configured as an enclosed circulation pachinko machine (pachinko gaming machine). An example of a system for managing the pachinko machine and the card unit will be described. Note that the gaming machine, card unit, and system for managing them described as the second embodiment below may be applied to any of the gaming machine and card unit described as the first embodiment.

  The present invention shown by the embodiment described below is a gaming machine that uses a gaming machine that is played by a player and a gaming value owned by the player that is specified by a recording medium that is connected to the gaming machine and received. A game system including a gaming device that enables a game of a player, and a game in a gaming machine using a gaming value owned by the player, which is specified by a recording medium connected to a gaming machine in which a game is played by the player And a gaming device that enables gaming on a gaming machine using a gaming value owned by the player that is specified by a recording medium connected to and received by the gaming machine on which the game is played by the player The present invention relates to a game control device for controlling a device.

  Conventionally, as authentication information for mutual authentication, the SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in the ROM of the CU communication control unit at the chip manufacturing stage, and the SID of the main control unit is stored in the CU communication control unit at the time of CU manufacture. It is known that the control unit downloads and stores the SID of the CU communication control unit from the key management server as authentication information (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-1000076).

  Also, there is known a gaming machine control board configured to monitor an illegal act with respect to a control chip mounted on one gaming machine via another control chip (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-89701). .

  However, among information transmitted and received at the time of mutual authentication, a storage method for particularly important information in terms of security is not described, and it cannot be said that security is sufficiently considered.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to appropriately store information that is particularly important in terms of security, thereby enabling a gaming system and game capable of further improving security. Device and game control device.

(1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (a sealed circulation pachinko machine (P 2F), a medal-free slot machine (S 2SF)) in which a game is played by a player, and a record that is connected to the gaming machine and received. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F, a call lamp device, etc.) that enables a game on the gaming machine using a gaming value owned by a player specified by a medium,
The gaming device is:
Including information transmission means (FIG. 113: communication control IC 325aF) for transmitting predetermined information,
The gaming machine is
Storage means (FIG. 113: payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
Arithmetic processing means that reads the user program from the storage means and can execute the read user program (FIG. 113: the payout control circuit 171aF reads and executes the user program stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF); ,
Communication means for receiving the predetermined information (FIG. 113: communication control circuit 171bF),
The arithmetic processing means stores the predetermined information received by the communication means in the storage area of the arithmetic processing means without notifying the user program (the payout control circuit 171aF notifies the user program of the predetermined information). Without being stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF).

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information is stored only in the storage area of the arithmetic processing unit, and is not notified to the user program and is not stored in the storage unit. For this reason, it is possible to prevent outflow of predetermined information due to access to the storage means, and thus security can be improved.

(2) In (1) above,
The arithmetic processing means determines whether or not it is possible to return from the incommunicable state using predetermined information stored in the storage area (the payout control circuit 171aF uses the “store code” to make communication impossible) Whether or not it is possible to recover from the normal state).

  According to the above configuration, security can be improved because it is possible to determine whether or not it is possible to recover from a state in which communication is not possible using predetermined information that can prevent outflow.

(3) In (2) above,
The arithmetic processing means updates or deletes the predetermined information stored in the storage area when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the payout control circuit 171aF causes the P stand 2F to respond to a card insertion response). It is updated when it is transmitted to the CU 3F. The payout control circuit 171aF is erased when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2F is given.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information stored in the storage area is updated or deleted only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the predetermined information is not updated or deleted without permission. In addition, since the processing from storage to deletion of the predetermined information is performed only within the arithmetic processing means, it is possible to prevent outflow to the outside.

(4) In any one of the above (1) to (3),
The gaming device is:
Count processing means for counting the game points as points based on a count request from the gaming machine to give a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a prize (FIG. 76: CU3F is state information including information of count request = ON When the response is received, the requested counting ball number is added to the holding ball number.)
The gaming machine is
History information storage means for storing count history information of count processing executed by the count processing means (FIG. 77: P base 2F counts from the P base 2F side between the count request ON state and the count request OFF state. The history of the number of game balls paid out to the CU3F side as the requested number of balls is stored as a counting history.

  According to the above configuration, since the counting history information is stored on the gaming machine side, it is possible to reflect the past counting history on the gaming device by referring to the counting history information on the gaming device side at the time of recovery. it can. Also, if the gaming device is out of order when returning the counting ball from the gaming machine to the gaming device, the counting ball will be lost, so the counting history is stored on the gaming machine side for maintenance. It also becomes a countermeasure.

(5) In the above (4),
When the communication means returns from the communication disabled state, the communication means transmits the count history information of the past predetermined number of count processes stored in the history information storage means based on the count history request from the gaming device. (The communication control circuit 171bF transmits the past two count histories (count history 1 and count history 2) to the CU3F),
The gaming device is:
It further includes history information receiving means (communication control IC 325aF of CU3F) for receiving the counting history information of the counting processing for the past predetermined number of times.

  According to said structure, a count log | history can be referred back to the past predetermined number of times. Thereby, the accuracy of the recovery process can be improved.

(6) In the above (4) or (5),
The predetermined information transmitted by the information transmitting means includes store information (store code) and device specifying information (SC board ID) that can specify a game control device included in the gaming device.

  According to said structure, the movement of the game apparatus to another store and the change of the combination of a game apparatus and a game machine in a store can be considered. Thereby, problems, such as taking over count history data between different stores, can be prevented.

(7) In any one of the above (4) to (6),
The information transmission means transmits count request reception information indicating the reception of the count request (status information response in a count response ON state) and time information (count reception time) when the count request is received to the gaming machine. ,
The history information storage means stores the time information in association with the count history information corresponding to the count request (stores the count reception time in the count history 1).

  According to the above configuration, since the count reception time is stored in association with the count history, it is possible to grasp which count history corresponds to which count request.

(8) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (a sealed circulation pachinko machine (P stand 2F), a medal-free slot machine (S stand 2SF)) in which a game is played by a player, and is specified by the received recording medium. A gaming device (CU3F, call lamp device, etc.) that enables a game in the gaming machine using the gaming value owned by the player,
An information transmitting means (FIG. 113: communication control IC 325aF) for transmitting predetermined information is provided.
The information transmitting means is not notified to the user program executed by the arithmetic processing means (FIG. 113: payout control circuit 171aF) of the gaming machine, but is stored in a storage area (register in the payout control circuit 171aF) of the arithmetic processing means. A gaming apparatus for transmitting the stored predetermined information to the gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information is stored only in the storage area of the arithmetic processing unit, and is not notified to the user program and is not stored in the storage unit. For this reason, it is possible to prevent outflow of predetermined information due to access to the storage means, and thus security can be improved.

(9) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (a sealed circulation pachinko machine (P stand 2F), a medal-free slot machine (S stand 2SF)) in which a game is played by a player, and is specified by the received recording medium. A game control device (FIG. 66: CU control unit 323F) for controlling a game device (CU3F, a call lamp device, etc.) that enables a game on the gaming machine using the game value owned by the player,
An information transmitting means (FIG. 113: communication control IC 325aF) for transmitting predetermined information is provided.
The information transmitting means is not notified to the user program executed by the arithmetic processing means (FIG. 113: payout control circuit 171aF) of the gaming machine, but is stored in a storage area (register in the payout control circuit 171aF) of the arithmetic processing means. A game control apparatus for transmitting the stored predetermined information to the gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information is stored only in the storage area of the arithmetic processing unit, and is not notified to the user program and is not stored in the storage unit. For this reason, it is possible to prevent outflow of predetermined information due to access to the storage means, and thus security can be improved.

(10-1) A gaming machine (P stand 2F) including first control means (main control unit 161F) and second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas that can store user programs (main control storage unit 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF),
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF, 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit for storing the predetermined information (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 114, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 115, etc.);
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control units 600F, 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and the return process On the condition (SF 292 in FIG. 117: recovery completion flag 618F and recovery request / completion register 718F are written with a flag indicating the completion of recovery), the predetermined information is generated by executing the user program. 117 (SF293 in FIG. 117: A signal for starting the processing of the user program is transmitted, or the processing of the user program stopped by the stopping unit is canceled and the processing of the user program is restarted).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(10-2) In the above (10-1),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control unit and the second control unit include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the processing is appropriately restarted in both the first control unit and the second control unit. be able to.

(10-3) In the above (10-1) or (10-2),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuit (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).
When transmitting the predetermined information, the communication control circuit also transmits arrival confirmation information that is updated according to a predetermined update pattern in order to confirm the arrival of the predetermined information (FIG. 120: to the payout control unit 171F) Send the power-on notification command including the serial number sent last time (main control serial number = n + 1)),
The communication control circuit of one of the first control means and the second control means resends the arrival confirmation information transmitted last time when returning from the communication disabled state (FIG. 120: power supply for power-on notification command) Send response of input / output)
The first control means or the second control means including the other communication control circuit includes the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the communication disabled state and the arrival confirmation information received before communication is disabled. Is not based on the predetermined information (FIG. 120: main control sequence number = n + 1 and payout control sequence number = n do not match) based on the predetermined information transmitted by the one communication control circuit by the return processing. Information update processing (FIG. 120: execute recovery processing) is executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the communication disabled state and the arrival confirmation information received before the communication is disabled are not in a predetermined relationship, one communication control is performed by the return process. Since the information updating process based on the predetermined information transmitted by the circuit is executed, the communication burden between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced.

(10-4) In the above (10-1) to (10-3),
The information storage unit includes a nonvolatile storage area (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 114, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 115) and a volatile storage area (for example, a register other than the transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 114). 115, registers other than the data reception register 713F shown in FIG.

  According to the above configuration, since the information storage unit has the nonvolatile storage area and the volatile storage area, it is possible to suppress the amount of data required in the recovery process when communication is resumed.

(10-5) In the above (10-1) to (10-4),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set a valid period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written in the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner has expired (FIG. 115: main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting) The register 719cF sets an effective time during which the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written into the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is cut off. ).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit can set a valid period during which the predetermined information can be written to the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner expires. It is possible to reliably store the necessary information even after. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between nails of the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the predetermined information is continuously displayed. By setting an effective period writable in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information that the floating ball has won.

(10-6) A game board (game board 26F) provided with first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means includes
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (payout control unit 171F) included in the game frame (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 114) for storing the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control unit 600F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined manner (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 161bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the return process. 117 (SF 292 in FIG. 117: flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F), the generation of the predetermined information by execution of the user program is resumed (SF 293 in FIG. 117: user program). A signal for starting the above process is transmitted, or the process of the user program stopped by the stopping means is canceled and the process of the user program is resumed).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(10-7) A game frame (front frame 5F) provided with second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control unit 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F). There,
The second control means includes
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 115) that stores the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control unit 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the return process. 117 (SF292 in FIG. 117: a flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery request / completion register 718F), the generation of the predetermined information by execution of the user program is resumed (SF293 in FIG. 117: user A signal for starting the program processing is transmitted, or the processing of the user program stopped by the stopping means is canceled and the processing of the user program is resumed).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(11-1) A gaming machine (P stand 2F) provided with first control means (main control part 161F) and second control means (payout control part 171F) communicating with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas that can store user programs (main control storage unit 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF),
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF, 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit for storing the predetermined information (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 114, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 115, etc.);
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF);
Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF) for transmitting encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is a decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information transmitted by the other (for example, the communication control circuit 161bF decrypts the information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF). including.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit encrypts the information stored in the information storage unit by the encryption unit of the communication control circuit and transmits the information transmitted by the other decryption unit. Since the information is decrypted, the processing of the encrypted communication performed between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced, and the contents of the encrypted information can be prevented from leaking and the security from being lowered. it can.

(11-2) In the above (11-1),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control unit and the second control unit include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the encrypted communication process is performed in both the first control unit and the second control unit. In addition to mitigation, it is possible to prevent the content of encrypted information from leaking and reducing security.

(11-3) In the above (11-1) or (11-2),
The communication control circuit generates an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when power is turned on (for example, an encryption key and a decryption key are generated by an authentication sequence performed when the power is turned on shown in FIG. 117); A process of performing cryptographic communication using the encryption key and decryption key generated by the process is executed (after the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 117, encrypted communication is possible using the generated encryption key and decryption key).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit executes a process of generating an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when the power is turned on, and a process of performing encryption communication using the encryption key and the decryption key generated by the process Therefore, it is possible to reduce the encryption communication process performed between the first control unit and the second control unit, and to appropriately restart the process in at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit. .

(11-4) In the above (11-1) to (11-3),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set a valid period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written in the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner has expired (FIG. 115: main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting) The register 719cF sets an effective time during which the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written into the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is cut off. ).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit can set a valid period during which the predetermined information can be written to the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner expires. It is possible to reliably store the necessary information even after. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between nails of the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the predetermined information is continuously displayed. By setting an effective period writable in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information that the floating ball has won.

(11-5) A game board (game board 26F) including first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means includes
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (payout control unit 171F) included in the game frame (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 114) for storing the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF);
The second control including decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF) Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(11-6) A game frame (front frame 5F) provided with second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control unit 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F). There,
The second control means includes
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 115) that stores the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF);
The first control including decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, information encrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF). Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(12-1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that grants a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and is connected to the gaming machine in a communicable manner, and uses the valuable value owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 67: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 75). Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 78: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P table 2F sends a status information response command including information of counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
The gaming device is:
Based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means, the counting processing means for counting the gaming points to the possession points (FIG. 78: CU3F is requested when receiving a status information response including information of counting request = ON. The number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 62: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 78: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F) for processing the holding points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 78: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 78: CU3F is ready to return a card when the card can be removed) Information on status OFF and card waiting for card removal is notified to P stand 2F.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(12-2) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and uses the valuable value possessed by the player to play a game in the gaming machine. A gaming device (CU3F) that enables
Count processing means for counting the game points based on the count request from the gaming machine (FIG. 78: When the CU3F receives a status information response including information of count request = ON, the requested counting ball And add the number to the number of balls.)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 62: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 78: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F) for processing the holding points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 78: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 78: CU3F is ready to return a card when the card can be removed) The P table 2F is notified of information indicating that the state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(12-3) The present invention is connected to a gaming device (CU3F) that enables a game using a valuable value owned by the player so as to be communicable, and gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs ( P stand 2F)
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 67: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 75). Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 78: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P table 2F sends a status information response command including information of counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
When the points counted based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means are processed in a manner that can be specified by the recording medium received by the gaming device, and the recording medium is returned, the recording medium is awaiting removal. (FIG. 78: When the card 2F is ready for card removal, the CU 3F notifies the card return preparation state OFF and card removal waiting ON information from the CU 3F. Receive.)

  According to the above configuration, since the game device receives a notification that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is in a removal waiting state, the game machine prompts the player to remove the recording medium. This makes it possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(12-4) In the above (12-1) to (12-3),
The gaming device includes notification means (for example, a display 312F shown in FIG. 62) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, so that it is possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(12-5) In the above (12-1) to (12-3),
The gaming machine includes display means (for example, a variable display device 278F shown in FIG. 62) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed based on the notification from the gaming device.

  According to the above configuration, since it is possible to visually notify the gaming machine that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented.

(12-6) In the above (12-1) or (12-2),
The removal waiting state notification means notifies the gaming device or a device connected to the gaming machine (for example, a hall computer, a call lamp on P units) that the recording medium is waiting to be removed. .

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the recording medium by notifying a device other than the gaming machine or gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

(12-7) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a prize is generated, and is connected to the gaming machine in a communicable manner, and uses the valuable value owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 62: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
When the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means, a game hall specifying information notifying means (FIG. 70) for notifying the gaming machine of game hall specifying information capable of specifying the game hall in which the gaming device is installed. When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including the “store code” added by the security board 325F to the P unit 2F.
The gaming machine is
Game hall identification information storage means for storing the game hall identification information notified by the game hall identification information notification means (FIG. 70: P stand 2F stores “store code” included in the insertion notification command). ,
The game room specifying information newly notified by the game hall specifying information notifying means when the communication is restored after recovering from the communication incapable state where the gaming machine and the gaming device cannot communicate, and the game hall specifying When a recovery request including a “store code” is transmitted from the CU 3F to the game hall specifying information comparing means for comparison with the game hall specifying information stored in the information storage means (FIG. 79: the P store 2F) ”And the stored“ store code ”are determined to match.)
Game prohibition means for prohibiting continuation of the game when the game hall identification information is determined to be inconsistent by the game hall identification information comparison means (P store 2F stores “store code” from CU3F. If the store code does not match, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  According to the above configuration, if the newly notified game hall specifying information and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means do not match, the continuation of the game is prohibited. It is possible to prevent fraud in which the store is moved in the stored state.

(12-8) In the above (12-7),
The gaming device is:
A device capable of specifying a game control device (for example, security board 325F shown in FIG. 65) included in the game device when the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means and when the communication is restored. Device specific information notifying means for notifying the gaming machine of specific information (SC board ID) (FIG. 70: When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the CU 3F receives the “SC board ID” added by the security board 325F. And a card insertion notification command including:
The gaming machine is
Device specifying information storage means for storing the device specifying information notified by the device specifying information notifying means (FIG. 70: P base 2F stores “SC board ID” included in the insertion notification command);
When the communication is recovered, the device specifying information comparing unit (P 2F) compares the device specifying information newly notified by the device specifying information notifying unit with the device specifying information stored in the device specifying information storing unit. Further compares “SC board ID” from CU3F with the stored “SC board ID”),
The game prohibiting means prohibits continuation of the game when the device specifying information comparing means determines that the device specifying information is inconsistent (in the case of mismatch, prohibiting continuation of the game).

  According to the above configuration, when the newly notified device identification information and the device identification information stored in the device identification information storage means do not match, the game is prohibited from being continued, so the counting balls are stored in the game medium. Unauthorized movement of the gaming machine in the state can be prevented.

(12-9) In the above (12-7) or (12-8) above,
The gaming machine is
A game hall identification information reading means for reading the game hall identification information added to the game medium used for the game (for example, a sensor is provided in the collection ball passage path of the P stand 2F, and the sensor is provided in the game ball. Read certain identification information (such as surface markings).
The game hall specifying information comparing means includes the game hall specifying information added to the game medium read by the game hall specifying information reading means, and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means. Compare (by the read identification information, it is determined whether or not it matches the identification information of the game ball of the own store. To do.)

  According to the above configuration, if the game hall identification information added to the game medium read by the game hall identification information reading means and the game hall identification information stored in the game hall identification information storage means do not match, the game medium It is possible to notify that game balls from other stores are mixed.

  Hereinafter, a second embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as “embodiment”) will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Configuration of pachinko machines>
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A plurality of game islands (not shown) arranged in the game hall (hall) may be abbreviated as an enclosed circulation pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a game machine, a pachinko machine, or a P machine) as an example of a game machine. ) 2F is attached. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3F, which is an example of a gaming device, is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2F at a side position on a predetermined side of the P table 2F. Yes. The card unit will be described below as an example of the gaming device according to the present embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but it is connected to the P stand 2F to collect game information such as jackpots and abnormalities, and the number of winnings. It may be a calling lamp device or the like.

  The P stand 2F encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the firing motor 18F (see FIG. 65) is driven to make one shot of the enclosed ball. The game board 26F is configured so that it can be played one by one in the game area 27F on the front side. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the hitting operation handle 25F, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the hitting operation handle 25F. Is detected by a touch sensor, and the firing motor 18F is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted according to the amount of turning operation of the hitting operation handle 25F by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27F.

  The launch strength of the pachinko ball (hereinafter simply referred to as launch strength T) can be adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting ball operating handle 25F (hereinafter also simply referred to as handle manipulation amount), and the handle manipulation amount is increased. The firing intensity T increases accordingly. Therefore, the player can adjust the firing strength T so that the pachinko ball passes through the region he / she aims by adjusting the handle operation amount.

  A P stand 2F shown in FIG. 62 is a so-called first type pachinko gaming machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278F is provided in the center of the game area 27F. In addition, the game area 27F is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27F shown in FIG. 62, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271F, three normal winning holes 272F, 273F, 274F, and three start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276F is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278F includes a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols), and based on the detection signals of the start winning balls that have won the respective start winning openings 275F, 276F, 277F. Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271F is opened.

  Further, the display result of the variable display device 278F becomes a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves). And a probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved after the end of the jackpot state.

  Pachinko balls that have been struck into the game area 27F are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 154F without winning. The pachinko balls won in any one of the winning openings and the pachinko balls collected in the out opening 154F are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the P stand 2F. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27F.

  The P base 2F causes the indicator 54F extending from the CU 3F to be fitted to the connection surface 54aF provided on the front surface of the P base 2F by installing the CU 3F in a lateral position. Therefore, a display 54F is provided at a position below the game area 27F in the P stand 2F. The display device 54F is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the points, the remaining card amount, or the display of the variable display device 278F to the player. Further, the display 54F is fitted to the P base 2F by connecting a connection terminal (not shown) provided on the back surface to a connection terminal 54bF provided on the connection surface 54aF of the P base 2F. Thus, if it is the structure which fits the indicator 54F of CU3F to the connection surface 54aF of P stand 2F, CU3F and P stand 2F can be connected more strongly and fraud can be prevented. Furthermore, fraud can be further prevented by preventing the connection and locking with the display 54F from being released unless the glass door 6F or the lower door provided with the hitting ball operating handle 25F is opened. As shown in FIG. 62, the display unit 54F is not limited to a configuration formed integrally with the CU 3F and fitted to the connection surface 54aF of the P base 2F. The display 54F is formed independently of the CU 3F and is formed on the front surface of the P base 2F. The structure which can be attached may be sufficient.

  In addition, a game ball number display for displaying the number of game balls is provided above the connection surface 54aF of the P stand 2F. The game ball number display 29F is composed of a 7-segment LED display and is controlled by a payout control unit 171F described later. The number of game balls display 29F displays the number of game balls to be described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like. The game ball number display 29F is not limited to a 7-segment LED display, and may be configured with a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  Furthermore, a counting button 28F for counting the gaming balls to the holding balls is provided on the left side of the gaming ball number display 29F on the P stand 2F. In the present embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the time for which the counting button 28F is kept pressed. It should be noted that, regardless of the pressing duration time, if the button is pressed once, a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) may be counted from the gaming ball to the holding ball, or when the counting button 28F is pressed once. All of the game balls currently owned by the player may be counted regardless of the pressing time (regardless of whether the button is pressed for a long time). Further, the counting speed is further improved when a card return operation is performed, and a smooth card return process is realized.

  Thus, since the counting button 28F is provided on the P table 2F side, the operability of the player sitting facing the P table 2F can be improved as compared with the case where the counting button 28F is provided on the CU 3F side. . In addition, the P platform 2F is provided with speakers 270F for outputting music data to be reproduced in accordance with the effects displayed on the variable display device 278F at the upper right position and the upper left position of the game area 27F. Note that the position and number of speakers are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 62, and the position and number may be changed as necessary.

  The P stand 2F according to the present embodiment can be divided into a game board 26F and another front frame (game frame) 5F. In particular, the game board 26F is different for each model of pachinko gaming machine developed by each company, while the front frame 5F is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, the game store only needs to replace the game board 26F when replacing a new stand.

  As described above, the P stand 2F is configured such that a game machine that performs game control like the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is configured as an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, and the basic game control and effect control are performed as described above. Controls similar to those of the gaming machine 1 (for example, variable display control based on hold storage information, big hit game control based on hold storage information, and probability change control based on hold storage information) are performed.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the CU3F according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This CU3F is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, and a member player who has registered as a member in the playground. A membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to, is accepted. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The CU3F that has received these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, or the number of accumulated balls) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. . In the P stand 2F, a ball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the game ball data is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining balls that can be fired. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the CU3F, a bill insertion slot 302F for inserting bills, a card insertion / discharge port 309F for inserting membership cards and visitor cards, and the like are provided. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  On the front side of the CU3F, when a member card is received, the display unit 312F is identified by the member card ID (also simply referred to as a card ID or C-ID) recorded on the member card and the member card ID. A replay button 319F for performing a replay game using the number of stored balls is provided.

  The display 312F displays the prepaid balance (also referred to as card balance or simply the balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), but can display the number of game balls and other various information. In addition, the surface is configured by a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312F with a finger.

  When the replay button 319F is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game by the P stand 2F. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possession balls is not recorded and the storage ball is recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the storage ball is withdrawn and becomes a game ball. It is converted and the game by P stand 2F becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. In addition to the replay button 319F, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the holding ball may be provided, and the replay button 319F may be a button dedicated to savings ball withdrawal.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The storage ball is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Mochitama” is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by paying out the possessionball. The number of possessed balls is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall. That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  A “game ball” is a ball that can be fired by a gaming machine. As described above, the data on the number of game balls is generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card, holding balls, or storing balls.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but stored in association with the membership card number on a server installed in a game hall such as a hall management computer, and the corresponding storage ball is searched based on the membership card number. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. When storing the hall server 801F in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801F may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  In addition, the timing of storing the holding ball in a card (member card, visitor card) or hall server is stored in a fixed period, for example, in real time every time the counting button 28F is operated and the counting process is performed. It is conceivable that the timing is such that it is stored in a lump or when the card is returned.

  Also, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the CU3F, the holding ball stored in the CU3F is temporarily stored as a stored ball in the hall server 801F, and the date when the player receives the return of the card When the card is inserted into the same or another CU3F again on the same day, only the possession balls for the day that are once stored as accumulated balls are stored again in the CU3F, and the game balls are added within the range of the possession balls. You may be able to do it.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302F is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320F, a ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321F, and a card return button 322F are further provided on the front side of the CU 3F. The IR photosensitive unit 320F is an IR photosensitive unit 320F that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a game attendant, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal. The ball lending button 321F is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the remaining amount recorded on the inserted card and using it in a game by the P stand 2F. The card return button 322F is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 63, the P base 2F opens and closes a front frame (hereinafter also referred to as a cell) 5F and a glass door 6F with respect to the frame-shaped outer frame 4F with the left side edge as a swing center. It is provided as possible.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging projections 6aF and 6bF are provided near the edge of the front frame 5F opposite to the center of swing (the free end side). The engaging protrusions 6aF and 6bF are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF of the outer frame 4F. When the open front frame 5F is pressed against the outer frame 4F, the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF get over the engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF, and the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF are moved downward by the urging force of the spring in the state of being over. Move and become locked.

  Then, a game attendant inserts a key into the key hole 10F shown in FIG. 62 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, clockwise rotation), so that a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6aF against the biasing force of the spring, 6bF is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6aF and 6bF are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF to be in the unlocked state, and the front frame 5F is released.

  Further, the front frame 5F is also provided with an engaging protrusion 8F for the glass door 6F, and an engaging hole 9F is provided in the glass door 6F portion facing the engaging protrusion 8F. The engaging protrusion 8F is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engaging protrusion 8F is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engaging hole 9F by pressing the opened glass door 6F against the front frame 5F. By getting over, the engagement protrusion 8F is pushed down by the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8F and the engagement hole 9F are engaged with each other to be in a locked state. In this state, a game attendant inserts a key into the keyhole 10F shown in FIG. 62 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation), whereby the engagement protrusion 8F is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring. Then, the engagement between the engagement protrusion 8F and the engagement hole 9F is released, and the lock door is released, and the glass door 6F is opened.

  A front frame opening detection switch 13F is provided at a position in contact with the outer frame 4F in the lower portion of the front frame 5F, and it is detected that the front frame 5F has been opened. Further, a glass door open detection switch 12F is provided in a contact portion with the glass door 6F in the upper portion of the front frame 5F, and the glass door open detection switch 12F detects that the glass door 6F has been opened.

  The number of times the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F are opened is counted by a counter not shown. The counting counter is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by a backup power supply even when the power supply of the P stand 2F is interrupted. And the count value can be transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Here, the backup power source is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P stand 2F.

  A main control board 16F is provided on the back surface of the game board 26F (the surface opposite to the surface facing the glass door 6F). Since the back surface of the outer frame 4F is closed, the main control board 16F can be detached from the game board 26F by first opening the front frame 5F and removing the game board 26F from the front frame 5F. That is, in order to remove the main control board 16F from the game board 26F or replace the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F, it is necessary to open the front frame 5F, so the front frame opening detection switch 13F is used. The work can be detected without fail. Therefore, if the main control board 16F is illegally removed from the game board 26F, or the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F is illegally replaced, the front frame opening detection switch 13F can always detect.

  Further, a payout control board 17F is provided on the back surface of the front frame 5F. The payout control board 17F also needs to be removed from the back surface of the front frame 5F after first opening the front frame 5F. Therefore, if the payout control board 17F is illegally removed from the back surface of the front frame 5F or the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F is illegally replaced, the front frame open detection switch 13F can always detect.

  Next, the structure which installs the game board 26F in the front frame 5F is demonstrated. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a state before and after the game board 26F is attached to the front frame 5F. As shown in FIG. 64, attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF are provided on the back surface of the front frame 5F so as to be openable and closable around hinges 35aF and 35bF, respectively. The attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF have a square shape and have a bottom having a width corresponding to the game board 26F. By pushing the game board 26F in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 64B with respect to the front frame 5F, the game board 26F is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF as shown in FIG. 64A. When the game board 26F is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF, the convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F side is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33F provided on the front frame 5F side. Here, the convex-type drawer connector 32F and the concave-type drawer connector 33F are floating connectors having flexibility with respect to displacement.

  Further, when the game board 26F is installed on the front frame 5F, the convex drawer connector 32F is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33F, so that the main control board 16F on the game board 26F side and the payout control board on the front frame 5F side. 17F is connected. Further, the game board 26F is fixed at a fixed position, and the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F have flexibility with respect to a certain degree of positional deviation, so that the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer These can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship with the connector 33F. Even if the game board 26F is installed on the front frame 5F with only the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F without the mounting mechanisms 34aF and 34bF, the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are provided. Since they are flexible connectors themselves, they can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship between the game board 26F and the front frame 5F. Here, the convex drawer connector 32F is connected to the main control board 16F via an internal wiring (not shown) of the game board 26F, and the concave drawer connector 33F is a payout shown in FIG. 63 via the signal cable 36F. It is connected to the control board 17F.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the CU 3F and the P platform 2F. With reference to FIG. 65, the outline of the control circuit of CU3F and P stand 2F is demonstrated.

  The CU 3F is provided with a CU control unit 323F composed of a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323F is a main control function unit of the CU3F, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program and control data for operating the CPU, A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area for the CPU, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323F is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801F (see FIG. 66) for security management. Connected to the CU control unit 323F is a security board (SC board) 325F for communicating with the payout control board 17F of the P platform 2F while ensuring security. The security board 325F is a security monitoring function unit of the CU 3F. Note that the CU control unit 323F may be provided on the security board 325F, or the CU control unit 323F may be provided on a board different from the security board 325F. The CU3F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the P stand 2F side, and the P stand 2F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the CU3F side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325F on the CU3F side and the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side are connected to be communicable via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325F is provided with a communication control IC 325aF for controlling communication between the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F, and a security chip (SC) 325bF for monitoring the security of the P base 2F. Further, the SC 325bF includes a fraud detection unit 1325F, and the fraud detection unit 1325F performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323F to the P stand 2F. The server 800F (see FIG. 66) is notified. Also, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800F as board control information.

  To the CU control unit 323F, the authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input. In addition, when the IR photosensitive unit 320F receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, a light reception signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. The card reader / writer reads the recorded information of the inserted card into the CU control unit 323F, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323F, and the CU control unit 323F writes the information to the card reader / writer. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card recording information includes a card ID. The CU control unit 323F stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the game ends.

  The CU control unit 323F manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as the remaining amount or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323F to the display control unit 350F, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350F. Display data converted by the display control unit 350F is transmitted to the display 312F provided on the front surface of the CU3F and the display 54F disposed on the front surface of the P stand 2F as shown in FIG. The display data transmitted to the display 54F is first input to the relay board 14F. Images corresponding to the display data are displayed on the display 312F and the display 54F. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F via the display control unit 350F. When the player operates the ball lending button 321F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the ball lending button 321F is not limited to the configuration provided on the CU 3F, and may be configured to be provided on the P base 2F and to input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the replay button 319F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the card return button 322F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F.

  The P base 2F has a main control board 16F that controls the progress of the game of the P base 2F, a payout control board 17F that manages and stores game balls, and a drive control of the firing motor 18F based on commands from the payout control board 17F. A launch control board 31F, a variable display device 278F, and an effect control board 15F that controls display of the variable display device 278F based on a command transmitted from the main control board 16F.

  The main control board 16F and the effect control board 15F are provided on the game board 26F. The main control board 16F is equipped with a game control microcomputer which is a main control unit 161F. The main control unit 161F is a main control function unit of the gaming machine. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161F is connected to a winning sensor 162F and a radio wave sensor 163F provided on the game board 26F.

  The main control unit 161F draws random numbers for determining big hits (or further including small hits) / off when the balls win the start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F, and stores the random numbers. This is called reserved storage. The maximum value of the number of reserved memories is “4”, for example. When the variable display device 278F can start a new variable display, the main control unit 161F digests one reserved memory, makes a jackpot determination based on the reserved memory, and derives the display result from the variable start. The variable display time to reach is determined from multiple types. Further, when the big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not the probability fluctuation is caused. The main control unit 161F transmits the result of the jackpot determination (including whether or not to change the probability) and information regarding the variable display time to the effect control unit 151F mounted on the effect control board 15F as commands.

  The command related to variable display transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the production control unit 151F specifies a variable start command indicating the start of variable display, a display result command indicating the result of variable display (big hit / miss), and a variable display pattern. A variable display time command that is possible, a variable stop command that indicates the timing for deriving and displaying a variable display result, and the like are included. Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the production control unit 151F include a command that can identify the progress status of the big hit during the big hit, a command that indicates the occurrence of a new reserved memory, and an occurrence of a gaming state error. There are commands to show.

  The effect control unit 151F determines the variable display content of the variable display device 278F based on these commands transmitted from the main control unit 161F. For example, the effect control unit 151F specifies a variable display result and a variable display time based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 161F, determines a stop symbol, and a variable display pattern (reach presence / absence, reach type). In addition, the effect pattern of the notice effect related to the big hit or reach is determined. The effect control unit 151F controls display of the variable display device 278F according to the determined variable display content.

  The effect control board 15F is also connected to the display 54F via the relay board 14F of the CU3F. The effect control unit 151F transmits a display control signal for variable display or the like to the variable display device 278F, and transmits a display control signal for performing display in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278F to the display 54F. Is possible. The relay board 14F and the display 54F may be provided on the P platform 2F side. In this case, the effect control board 15F on the P table 2F side is directly connected to the relay board 14F on the P table 2F side without going through the CU 3F.

  The payout control board 17F is provided on the front frame 5F. On the payout control board 17F, a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171F is mounted. The payout control unit 171F is a payout control function unit of the gaming machine. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  In addition, a firing ball detection switch 903F, an out ball detection switch 701F, a foul ball detection switch 33AF, a counting button 28F, and a radio wave sensor 173F are provided in a state of being electrically connected to the payout control board 17F. The radio wave sensor 173F is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173F is input to the payout control unit 171F via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17F. The ball raising switch (upper) 41aF detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and based on the detection, the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls.

  Therefore, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173F.

  From main control board 16F to payout control board 17F, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, manufacturer specific Jackpot information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16F of the P base 2F, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P base 2F is turned on. Information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, ordinary winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening). This is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the table 2F is powered on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P unit 2F is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16F and the payout control board 17F are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17F receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17F performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize in any of the starting winning awards. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17F that an error has occurred while the main control board 16F is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a prize ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the main control board 16F. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16F is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F to which this out ball detection signal has been input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27F), as will be described later. In the payout control board 17F to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33AF, as described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch 903F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F, to which this shot ball detection signal has been input, subtracts and updates the number of balls in game.

  The security board 325F of the CU 3F and the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F are electrically connected, and various commands are transmitted from the security board 325F to the payout control board 17F as described later. Conversely, various responses are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the security board 325F, as will be described later.

  In addition to the payout control board 17F, the front frame 5F is provided with a launch control board 31F, a launch motor 18F, and a game ball number display 29F. The game ball number indicator 29F may be directly attached to the front frame 5F, but the front frame 5F is similar to an upper plate or lower plate provided on the front side of a normal pachinko gaming machine where balls are paid out. And may be provided in such a manner that it can be rotated. The same applies to the display 54F. The payout control unit 171F of the payout control board 17F displays the number of game balls currently owned by the player on the game ball number display 29F.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17F to the firing control board 31F. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31F outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18F of the launcher. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state of being bullet-launched into the game area 27F. The firing control board 31F emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 18F when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F is input.

  The launch intensity sensor 19F detects the launch intensity T of the pachinko ball by the launch motor 18F. For example, the firing intensity sensor 19F detects, as the firing intensity T, a value obtained by converting an analog value output from a variable resistor configured to change the electrical resistance value according to the handle operation amount into a digital value. Hereinafter, as an example, it is assumed that the firing strength T varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) according to the amount of steering operation. The detection result of the launch intensity sensor 19F is output to the payout control board 17F and the CU 3F via the launch control board 31F.

  A display 54F and a relay board 14F extending from the CU 3F are provided on the front surface of the P base 2F. The display unit 54F receives display data (display control signal) from the display control unit 350F of the CU3F via the relay board 14F. Further, the display 54F receives display data (display control signal) from the effect control board 15F via the relay board 14F.

  The relay board 14F outputs a display control signal from one of the effect control board 15F and the display controller 350F to the display 54F, and the display 54F is based on the display control signal from the effect control board 15F or the display controller 350F. A switching circuit 141F for displaying an image is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the display 54F extending from the CU3F provided on the front surface of the P base 2F is configured to be controlled on the CU3F side. Instead, the display 54F is provided on the P base 2F side. The display 54F may be provided on the P base 2F side, and the display control board may be provided on the P base 2F side so that the display control can be performed on the P base 2F side. In this case, the display control board controls the display of the display 54F based on a command from the payout control unit 171F.

  The RAM clear switch 293F is a switch for erasing game table information and game information stored in the RAM of the P table 2F. After the P table enters an error state, the store clerk operates the switch to initialize It becomes possible to return to the state. The RAM clear switch 293F is operated by a store clerk after the card is discharged, for example.

<Pachinko ball circulation route>
Here, with reference to FIG. 62 and FIG. 65, the circulation path of the pachinko balls in the P platform 2F will be outlined.

  When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the firing motor 18F is driven. Thereby, one pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position is shot by the hitting hammer and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27F.

  The detection of the launch of the game ball is detected when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF changes from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on a payout control board 17F (see FIG. 65) provided with a payout control unit 171F. Based on the detection, the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls. To do.

  Out of balls that have been driven into the game area 27F, the out balls that have entered the out port 154F (see FIG. 62) flow down the out ball flow path and are detected by an out ball detection switch 701F provided in the middle of the ball. . The foul ball flows down through the foul ball return path and is detected by a foul ball detection switch 33AF provided in the middle of the foul ball.

  All winning balls that have won the winning opening and the variable winning ball device are collected on the back of the gaming machine and guided to the collection ball passing path. Similarly, out balls and foul balls are also guided to the collection ball passing path. A firing ball detection switch 903F is provided in the collection ball passage route. For this reason, all the winning balls, out balls, and foul balls are detected by the firing ball detection switch 903F. That is, the fired ball detection switch 903F is a switch that detects all of the pachinko balls that are bulleted. When the number detected by this switch is equal to the number of shots of the pachinko balls shot by the firing motor 18F, it can be determined that all of the hit pachinko balls have been collected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference between the number of detections of the shot ball detection switch 903F and the number of bullets is calculated. When this difference number is not 0, the balls that have been driven into the game area 27F have been collected. It is determined that it is not. By making this determination, it is possible to determine whether the game area 27F is rolling, or whether there is a floating ball that does not fall due to being caught between nails or the like in the game area.

<Notification processing for abnormalities occurring in card units and pachinko machines>
FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 66, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323F, security board 325F, payout control unit 171F, or main control board 16F, notification is given in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. In this case, the CU control unit 323F, the security board 325F, the payout control unit 171F, or the main control board 16F may be replaced with another illegally manufactured product, or may malfunction or break down due to noise or the like. Or offline status due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800F shown in FIG. 66 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. The key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F.

  First, when an abnormality occurs due to the security board 325F of the CU 3F, the CU control part 323F detects the abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control part 323F and the security board 325F described above. This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security board 325F, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325b when the security chip 325b of the security board 325F is manufactured. When the CU3F is loaded into the amusement hall and connected to the hall server 801F, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800F of the key management center via the hall server 801F and stored in the CU control unit 323F. The

  When the CU control unit 323F detects an abnormality of the security board 325F, the CU control unit 323F notifies the hall server 801F of the fact and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F controls the display 312F to display that an abnormality has occurred and causes the display control unit 350F to perform an abnormality notification by lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, the CU control unit 323F transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F, the security board 325F detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and notifies the payout control unit 171F of the signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that. The security board 325F notifies the payout control unit 171F as a parallel signal via the PIF circuit 326F which is a parallel interface circuit. In response, the payout control unit 171F notifies the main control board 16F that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, main control board 16F performs control for operating the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325F detects an abnormality in the payout control unit 171F, the security control unit 325F notifies the CU control unit 323F to that effect, and the CU control unit 323F notifies the hall server 801F accordingly.

  As described above, when the security board 325F detects an abnormality in the CU control unit 323F, the security board 325F notifies the payout control unit 171F via the PIF circuit 326F, while when detecting an abnormality in the payout control unit 171F. Is notified to the CU control unit 323F, and the notification destination of the occurrence of abnormality by the security board 325F is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. Moreover, the security board 325F has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout control unit 171F that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the security board 325F via the PIF circuit 326F notifies the main control board 16F accordingly. In response to the notification, the main control board 16F performs control for abnormality notification similar to that described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171F, the fact is detected by the security board 325F, the fact that the abnormality has occurred is notified to the CU control unit 323F, and the CU control unit 323F performs the above-described abnormality notification control. Notify the hall server 801F that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171F, it is detected that the main control board 16F has occurred, and upon receiving the notification, the above-described abnormality notification control is performed.

  As described above, the payout control board 17F detects and notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16F when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325F, and informs the main control board 16F of the abnormality when the abnormality occurs. Detected and notifies the security board 325F that an abnormality has occurred. As with the security board 325F described above, the payout control board 17F is also controlled for anomaly notification even when a notice is given to the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The security board 325F and the payout control board 17F are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and perform abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Although described as having no function, an abnormality notification function may be provided in the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on the CU 3F side and the P stand 2F side, and the transmission / reception mode thereof. With reference to FIG. 67, main data among various data stored on the CU (card unit) 3F side and the P unit (pachinko gaming machine) 2F side, and transmission / reception modes thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the P ball 2F side calculates the variation in the number of game balls, and stores and manages the current latest number of game balls. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU3F side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2F side. On the other hand, the number of possessed balls (the number of cards possessed), the number of accumulated balls, and the remaining card amount (remaining amount) are managed and stored on the CU3F side.

  FIG. 67 shows the RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323F on the CU3F side and the RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side. First, when the power is turned on with the P units (pachinko gaming machine) 2F and the CU (card unit) 3F being electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game hall, the payout control board on the P unit 2F side 17F has a main chip ID (main control chip ID) transmitted from the main control board 16F, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3F side, and also issues a payout chip ID (payout) stored in the payout control board 17F itself. Control chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data at the time when the communication is started after the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P stand 2F side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3F side are stored on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P stand 2F as that of the previous time is connected. The connection time data is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P unit 2F side by sending new connection time data from the CU3F side when communication between the CU3F side and the P unit 2F side is started. Time data is stored on the P platform 2F side.

  Both the CU and the P platform transmit the “sequential number” added to the message. Further, both the CU and the P platform store the “serial number” received from the other party. There are three types of “serial number”: “normal serial number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Normal sequence number” indicates the sequence number of the message. The “normal serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with the initial value “1” on the CU3F side (primary station side). However, the “normal serial number” is not counted up when retransmitting. The P station 2F side (secondary station side) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that there is no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The “additional serial number” is a serial number used when the CU 3F requests the P platform 2F to add game balls. The “counting serial number” is a serial number used when the P stand 2F requests the CU 3F to count game balls.

  Only the CU3F has a normal serial number update right. When the same normal serial number as the transmitted normal serial number is returned, the CU 3F stores the normal serial number as a backup and transmits the updated normal serial number. Only the CU3F has the addition update right of the addition serial number. When making an addition request, the CU 3F transmits an addition serial number obtained by adding 1 to the addition serial number that has been used for communication to the P unit 2F. The P base 2F returns the same addition serial number when accepting the request. When rejecting the request, the previously received addition sequence number (the addition sequence number received this time-1) is returned. Only the P platform 2F has the addition update right of the counting sequence number. When making a count request, the P platform 2F transmits a count sequence number added to the count sequence number that has been used for communication to the CU 3F. When the CU3F accepts the request, it returns the same counting sequence number. When rejecting the request, the received counting sequence number (counting sequence number-1 received this time) is returned.

  In the following, regarding “normal serial number”, a configuration in which the serial number received by the CU 3F at the time of transmission is counted up (+1) and transmitted will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and each of the P base 2F and the CU 3F or the P base 2F counts (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission, and the other receives the serial number received. May be transmitted as it is.

  The “addition serial number” and “counting serial number” are special serial numbers that are counted up in the addition request processing and the count request processing, respectively. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a configuration in which “normal serial number” is also counted up when the “additional serial number” and “counting serial number” are counted up. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to stop the “normal sequence number” from being counted up when the “additional sequence number” and the “counting sequence number” are counted up. In the following, “normal serial number” is simply referred to as “serial number”. The “additional sequence number” and “counting sequence number” are also collectively referred to as “request sequence number”.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2F side to the CU 3F side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171F (see FIG. 65) on the P table 2F side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2F side to the CU 3F side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later. However, instead of this, or in addition to the game ball counter, the number of game balls may be included in the latest game table information.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”. Here, the “prize ball” is a ball that is paid out when a ball wins a winning opening, and is a safe ball. The “fired ball” is a ball fired by the gaming machine. When there is a back ball, the number of balls obtained by subtracting the back ball is the number of fired balls. The “back ball” is a ball in which the fired ball returns without jumping onto the board surface. The “out mouth passing ball” is a ball that has passed through the out mouth 154F, and the total number of the out balls and the safe balls means the number of balls passing through the out mouth.

  For example, when a pachinko ball placed in the game area 27F wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F, the adding ball to which the gaming ball is added based on the winning information The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value (added ball number) of the added ball number counter is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. Moreover, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27F, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171F counts the number of game balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28F, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting ball number) from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the P stand 2F side, every time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3F side, the count values are stored in the previous game machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171F). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before), data of the number of added balls, the number of subtraction balls, and the number of counted balls, which are the game table information transmitted to the CU3F side immediately before, are backed up. Stored as data. When the latest gaming machine information is not transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side, this backup data includes not only the value of each counter of this time but also the value of each previous counter that has not been sent at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission. You may make it memorize | store by adding the number of game balls transmitted immediately before to this last game machine information.

  In addition, the payout control board 17F updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU3F side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3F side, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of balls, the remaining amount, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total subtraction are stored in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM. The number of balls (the total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) transmitted from the P stand 2F side, and the number of balls is updated. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2F side. Further, the number of cards held is added and updated based on the value of the counting ball counter transmitted from the P platform 2F. Thus, the CU3F can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2F one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3F has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of the game ball counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2F side. The CU3F updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU3F stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (number of subtracted balls), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801F (in this case, hall management). An error notification may be made by a computer or hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P unit 2F side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU3F side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU3F side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P unit 2F side. (CU3F side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3F side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3F side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side and stored on the P unit 2F side by the hall server 801F or hall management computer connected to the CU3F. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the CU3F has a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the remaining card amount of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 65) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU 3F (when no holding ball is present)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 65) is an input requesting the use of a holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU3F when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 65) subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area for storing the card remaining amount in response to an input requesting the use of the card remaining amount (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321F).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls that are deducted is the number of balls The number of balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side. In response to this, the P stand 2F side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  In the gaming system according to the present embodiment, on the other hand, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image that prohibits the use of the ball before counting remaining in the dish by hand and using it for the wagon service in the conventional enclosed circulation pachinko gaming machine provided with each counter.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. Has been. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. On the CU3F side, in response to this, the number of game balls is subtracted and the number of cards held is added and updated.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
Next, communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail. A message used in the communication is composed of a frame having a predetermined format. Transmission data (message) is always transmitted in units of one frame. That is, the divided transmission of the message is not performed. Moreover, when transmitting a message | telegram continuously, the space | interval of 1 millisecond or more is opened.

  One frame of transmission data includes a data length, a normal sequence number, an addition sequence number, a counting sequence number, a command, and a data portion. “Data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). “Command” is a command code of the message. The “data part” is data of a message.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU (card unit) 3F and the P units (pachinko gaming machine) 2F will be described.

  FIG. 68 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information to the P base 2F. In response to this recovery request, a response named recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this recovery response notifies the CU3F of recovery information.

  The recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F after the CU 3F completes the authentication. The recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F, and the CU 3F transmits the command first after the authentication is completed. The recovery request includes “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, and “previous final transmission count serial number”. “Serial number” is a sequence number (1 to 255). “Command” is a command code for the recovery request, and is represented by binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The “last last transmission serial number” is the serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2F at the previous connection. When “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number” is “0”, this indicates a state where there is no stored sequence number. The “previous last transmission serial number” is a serial number that stores the “sequential number” as the previous final transmission serial number (serial number) on the P unit 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received at the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. It is.

  “Previous last transmission count sequence number” is a count sequence number of a response to the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the previous connection. “Last transmission count sequence number” indicates that there is no stored sequence number when “0”. The “previous last transmission count sequence number” is a sequence number that stores the count sequence number as the previous last transmission count sequence number on the P unit 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received to the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. .

  In the recovery process (number of balls) of the P base 2F, the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F in the counting history sequence described later, and the “store code” held by the P base 2F And the coincidence determination with “SC board ID” is performed, and if they coincide, the following processing is performed. If they do not match, the count request ball count = 0 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program.

  The P stand 2F refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3F, and when the CU 3F has not performed the count process for the count request, sets the count request ball count = 0 in the subtraction register. The user program executed on the P platform 2F is notified. When the counting process has been performed by the CU 3F, the count request ball number notified to the CU 3F is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match. Further, when the “store code” notified from the security board 325F and the “store code” held in the P stand 2F do not match, the user program side is notified of the store code mismatch via the register. Note that, when the P unit 2F receives a recovery request command from the CU 3F, it notifies the user program side via the register.

  The response of the recovery response is a response to the recovery information held in the P base 2F to the CU 3F. Recovery information includes “Serial Number”, “Command”, “Last Last Sending Serial Number”, “Last Inserted Card ID”, “Previous Card Insertion Time”, “Last Last Sent Additional Serial Number”, “Unit Price”, “Game Information” It includes “presence / absence of storage”, “previous gaming machine information”, and “previous gaming information”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Previous last transmission serial number” is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no stored serial number. “Previously inserted card ID” is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and “0” indicates that there is no inserted card. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores and holds the card ID that was being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU3F.

  “Previous card insertion time” is data on the insertion time of a card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no additional serial number. The “ball unit price” is a unit price per ball (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) played on the P platform 2F. “Game information storage presence / absence” is “0x00” when game information is not stored, and “0x01” when game information is stored.

  “Previous game machine information” is game machine information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “game ball number”, “game ball information”, “count request ball number”, and “counting serial number”. “Number of game balls” is the number of game balls previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game ball information” is the game ball information notified last time. The game ball information is, for example, information such as the number of fired balls, the number of out-passed balls and the total number of prize balls notified to the CU 3F last time. The “count required ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. “Counting sequence number” is the counting sequence number notified to the CU3F last time.

  The “previous game information” is game information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “number of game information” and “game information 1” to “game information n”. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3F last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Game information 1” is the game information 1 previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game information n” is the game information n previously notified to the CU 3F. The game information n includes, for example, type information or game prize ball information that was previously notified to the CU 3F.

  The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is a serial number stored as the last final transmission addition serial number on the CU3F side and the P base 2F when the status information request is transmitted in the CU3F and when the status information request is received in the P base 2F.

  In the recovery process (game information) of the P table 2F, the “store code” and “SC substrate ID” notified from the security board 325F in the counting history sequence described later, the “store code” held in the P table 2F, and A match with “SC board ID” is determined, and if the “store code” does not match, the recovery data is not processed. If they match, the following processing is performed.

  When there is recovery data of game information, “game information storage presence / absence” is stored: set to 0x01, the previous “game ball number”, the previous “game ball information”, the previous “count request ball number”, the previous “ The recovery data held by the P table 2F is set in the “counting serial number”, the previous “number of game information”, and the previous “game information 1 to n”. When there is no recovery data of game information or when the last transmission serial number is 0, “game information storage presence / absence” is set to “0x00” without storage, the previous “game ball information”, the previous “count request ball number”, the previous “0” is set in the “counting serial number” and the previous “number of game information”. However, the number of game balls notified last time is set as the number of game balls. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match.

  When it is determined that the “store code” notified from the security board 325F does not match the store code held by the P platform 2F, the card is processed as having no card. That is, ALL “0” is set for “last inserted card ID” and “previous card insertion time”.

  The P base 2F stores the serial number at the time of the status information request response as the previous last transmission serial number. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F do not match the information held by the P units, the last transmission serial number = 0 is notified. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F match the information held in the P units, the last transmitted serial number stored is notified.

  The P base 2F stores the counting sequence number as the last last transmission counting sequence number when transmitting the status information response. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the SC 325bF do not match the information held in the P units, the last transmission count serial number is notified as 0. If the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F match the information held in the P units, the last transmitted transmission number is stored.

  In addition, when the process of the “last previous transmission serial number” notified from the P unit 2F has not been performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information. When the “last last transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using only the previous game machine information. However, the number of balls is not recovered.

  In addition, when the recovery process cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3F or the P base 2F), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P base 2F. For example, the display information of the P platform 2F can be displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278F. Alternatively, a display device that is controlled by the payout control unit 171F may be further provided on the P platform 2F, and information for manual correction may be displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The command of this recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the addition recovery information to the P unit 2F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission additional serial number”, and “number of additional balls”. Yes. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when the CU 3F determines that the additional ball recovery process needs to be performed on the P platform 2F. The CU 3F compares the “previous last transmission addition sequence number” included in the recovery response received from the P platform 2F with the “previous final transmission addition sequence number” stored in the CU 3F. It is determined that processing is not necessary, and in the case of mismatch, it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary. When it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary, a recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “last last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the time of the previous connection. This is data on the number of balls added.

  Next, the recovery process of the P platform 2F will be described in detail. In the recovery process of the P unit 2F, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “previous last transmission serial number” notified from the CU 3F based on the recovery request 2, the number of balls is referred to the game ball. This is a process of performing addition.

  The response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F on the P platform 2F, and includes “serial number”, “command”, and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is a recovery result process OK when “0x00”, and a recovery result process NG when “0x01”. In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, the process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  When the recovery process (additional number of balls) of the P unit 2F is performed, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “last previous transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F, the process OK is processed as a “recovery result” to the CU3F. And the number of balls to be added notified from the CU3F is set in the addition register and notified to the user program. When the number of added balls notified from the CU3F = 0, the number of added balls = 0 is set in the addition register, notified to the user program, and the process OK is returned to the CU3F. However, if the game table state 1 responds with the game ball addition result (Bit5 = 1) in the state information response when the CU state of the state information request to be described later is a game ball addition request (Bit = 1), a “recovery” is sent to the CU3F. Processing NG is returned as a “result”, and the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register and notified to the user program.

  When the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is the same as the “previous final transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P stand 2F, the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register, The user program is notified, and processing NG is returned as a “recovery result” to the CU 3F. If the “last last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F = 0, regardless of the number of additional balls notified from the CU3F, the number of additional balls = 0 is set in the addition register, and the user program is notified to the CU3F. The process OK is returned.

  In addition, at the timing when the recovery process is completed (for example, when the recovery completion flag is set), the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is notified to the user program via the register regardless of the recovery result. . When the recovery request 2 is not received, the “previous last transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P platform 2F is notified to the user program at the timing when the recovery process is completed.

<< 5. 5. Communication start request, Communication start response >>
A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication start request command requests the P base 2F to start communication. In response to this communication start request, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This communication start response is a response to the CU3F to start communication.

  The communication start request command notifies the P base 2F that communication has started normally. The P base 2F that has received the communication start request clears the recovery information stored so far. The communication start request command includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The CU 3F sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after the communication start request, and the P unit 2F also sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after receiving the communication start request.

  The response of the communication start response notifies the CU 3F that the communication has started normally, and the CU 3F clears the recovery information. The response of the communication start response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 7. 7. Communication end request, Communication end response >>
A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2F to end communication. In response to this communication end request, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of the communication end response is a response to the CU3F for the communication end.

  The communication end request command notifies the P unit 2F that the communication has ended normally, and includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3F that the communication has ended normally, and the CU 3F and the P stand 2F stop communication and wait for restart after the notification. The response of the communication end response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3F to the P base 2F. The CU 3F periodically checks the state of the P stand 2F using this command. Further, the status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes “serial number”, “command”, “CU state”, “additional ball number”, “additional serial number”, “counting serial number”, “ball unit price”, and “counting receipt time”. Is included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “CU state” represents the state of the CU 3F notified to the P base 2F, and indicates that the card is being inserted when Bit 0 is “1”, and the card is not inserted when “0”. That is, Bit0 represents a state in which a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3F. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing a stock card (general 0 yen 0 coin card) stocked in advance in the card stock section of the CU3F.

  When Bit 1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0”, the card unit is being closed. That is, Bit1 notifies the card unit opening state to P stand 2F according to the state of CU3F. The timing for notifying the opening of the card unit is, for example, when the opening of the card unit is completed. The timing for notifying that the card unit is closed is, for example, when the store is closed. When the same state changes from opening to closing, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F as a count information of all the game balls it holds as a count information response.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is in progress, and when “0”, the card return preparation is not in progress. The CU3F notifies the P stand 2F of “preparing for card return” for a certain period (10 seconds) by setting this bit during each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the counting button 28F is detected, the P table 2F has operated the counting button once or a plurality of times if it receives a status information request with the bit being prepared for card return turned on. Regardless of the operation duration, regardless of the operation duration time, all the stored game balls are notified to the CU 3F by the status information response as the number of balls.

  When Bit 3 is “1”, a game ball addition request is shown, and when Bit 3 is “0”, no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  When Bit 4 is “1”, completion of counting ball reception is indicated, and “0” indicates that counting ball is not received. Bit 4 notifies the P stand 2F that the receipt is completed when the counting ball is received. That is, it is used to confirm delivery of the response “count ball” of the state information response. When receiving the counting ball reception completion, the P stand 2F checks whether the counting sequence number is the same as that of the P stand 2F, and if it does not match, notifies the CU 3F without subtracting the number of game balls.

  When Bit 5 is “1”, card removal is waiting, and “0” indicates completion of card removal. Bit5 notifies the P stand 2F that the card is waiting to be removed from the CU 3F. Bit 6 to Bit 7 are not used.

  The “added ball number” is the added ball number of game balls, and the data of the added ball number is valid only when Bit 3 in the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is an addition sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number when a game ball addition request is made. The “counting sequence number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the count sequence number received when the count is requested is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting sequence number is not established, the counting is not received.

  The “ball unit price” is a unit price (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) per game ball played on the P platform 2F. The unit price notified from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F is stored in, for example, the RAM of the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F. And P stand 2F notifies ball unit price memorized by RAM to CU3F by a status information response when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when recovery information for returning from a communication disabled state is requested from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F (recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F), the P unit 2F receives a response to the response of the recovery response. Set unit price and send to CU3F. That is, the ball unit price is not output to the outside except for notifying the CU 3F at the time of recovery response. The unit price stored in the P stand 2F is set in the response of the recovery response when the recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F, and is transmitted to the CU 3F. Thereby, it is possible to accurately grasp the unit price of the game balls that have been played on the P platform 2F before the recovery, and the player can be resumed with an appropriate game value after the recovery. Further, by not outputting the ball unit price stored in the P stand 2F to the outside other than notifying the CU 3F at the time of a recovery response, security is secured so that the ball unit price is not changed illegally. Furthermore, the ball unit price stored in the P unit 2F prohibits overwriting a new unit price when the P unit 2F holds the number of game balls. In addition, even when the P stand 2F holds the number of game balls, overwriting of the ball unit price stored in the P unit 2F is permitted and converted into a ball unit price overwritten with the number of game balls held. May be configured to update.

  The “count reception time” is information for notifying the P table 2F of the time when the CU 3F received the count request from the P table 2F, and the CU state Bit 4 (game ball count reception response) is “1” ( It is valid only when it is completed. The “count reception time” information is notified to the P platform 2F, but is processed only within the CPU of the payout control unit 171F, and stored in a RAM or the like accessible from the outside without being notified to the user program. Absent. Therefore, the information of “count reception time” is deleted in the CPU of the payout control unit 171F, so that security can be ensured.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the status information response notifies the CU 3F of the information / status of the P platform 2F. The response of the state information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  The specific data of this status information response includes “sequential number”, “command”, “number of game balls”, “number of fired balls”, “number of balls passed through outro”, “total number of ball balls”, “count request ball” Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “launch strength”, “game table state”, “fraud detection information” and “game information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). “Number of game balls” calculates the number of game balls held by the CU 3F using the “total number of ball balls”, “number of fired balls”, and “count ball number” described later. Thereafter, the CU 3F checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3F matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2F.

  “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. That is, the “number of fired balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  “The number of balls that have passed through the outlet” is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 154F (when there are multiple passing balls at the time of transmission, they are added together).

  “Total number of prize balls” is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is the number of prize balls for each prize opening type such as a start opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening), and the like. Note that the “total prize ball count” (addition) does not include the “addition request ball count” transmitted from the CU 3F. Further, the CU3F adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the total prize ball number data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not add the number of game balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “count ball” (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F and added to the number of cards held. The number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is open, the operation of the counting button 28F is performed, so that the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted and set as the counting balls without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28F.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is updated (+1) and notified when a counting is requested.

“Launch strength” is information on the launch strength of a game ball.
The “gaming table state” indicates the state of the P table 2F at the time when the command for requesting the state information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P table 2F. The “gaming table state 1”, “gaming table state 2”, “ It includes information on “game table state 3” and “game table error state”.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 1” indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. Bit1 indicates whether or not the fan (player) is playing (balls are being fired), and is “0” when waiting (the fan is not firing a ball), and “1”. A game is in progress (a state in which a fan is firing a ball), but there is a game ball, and a game is being played in a state in which the launch handle (hitting ball operation handle 25F) is touched (a state in which the touch sensor is touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence / absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. That is, it shows whether or not all the floating balls in the game area 27F have been collected. However, it does not include ball stoppages due to a fire stop switch (also called a single shot switch). When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). If the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball firing, the P stand 2F times out and the game is completed.

  Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. “0” indicates game ball indefinite (state where all balls are undetermined), and “1” indicates game ball definite (state where all balls are definite). Here, for example, if the P ball 2F has not been able to confirm the whereabouts of the game ball for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball launching, it will time out and determine the game ball. Further, the P stand 2F is set in a state in which the whereabouts of the game balls are determined (game ball determination) when the power is turned on or the RAM is cleared.

  Bit 4 indicates whether or not there is a game ball count request (whether or not a count button is pressed). When “0”, there is no request, and when “1”, there is a count ball payout request at the start of counting. When the counting operation is detected, the P platform transmits this counting request ON state information response to the CU 3F and confirms whether or not the counting request has been received. When “1”, it is a count request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, which is addition OK when “0” and addition NG when “1”. In addition, when the P platform 2F makes an addition NG response, the addition sequence number is notified without being updated. Bit 6 indicates a pressed state of the firing stop switch. When “0”, the switch is released, and when “1”, the switch is pressed. Bit 7 is reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 2” represents jackpot information jackpot 1 (all jackpots), and “1” is set during all jackpots. Bit 1 represents big hit 2 of big hit information (big hit + small hit), and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (big hit of the big ball), and “1” is set during the big hit where the big ball is big. Bit 3 represents big hit 4 of big hit information (big hit of small ball), and “1” is set during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 represents a big hit 5 of the big hit information (a big hit in the outgoing ball), and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the outgoing ball. Bit5 to Bit7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 3” represents a big hit in the gaming state information + short time, and “1” is set in the big hit and short time. Bit1 represents the probability change of the game state information, and “1” is set during the probability change. Bit 2 represents the time of the game state information, and “1” is set during the time reduction. Bit 3 indicates that the game state information is changing, and “1” is set during the change. Bit4 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “gaming table error state” indicates an error code occurring in the P table 2F, and each error code is expressed using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that there is no error when Bit 0 to Bit 5 are all “0”. Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents payout control when “0” and main control when “1”. Bit 7 indicates an error output method. When it is “0”, only an alarm is issued, and when it is “1”, it indicates an alarm + output to the hall server 801F.

  The “fraud detection information” is information detected by the P stand 2F at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. , “Illegal detection information 1” to “fraud detection information 4” and “additional serial number” are included.

  The “fraud detection state 1” is fraud detection information of the main control board 16F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 1” indicates fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit1 indicates that it is the positive detection information that the magnetic sensor is not detected when “1”. Bit2 represents fraud detection information for fraud detection when “1”. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “fraud detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 2” indicates fraud detection information for opening the glass plate when “1”. Bit 1 represents fraud detection information for opening the frame body when “1”. Bit 2 represents fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 represents fraud detection information of the proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 represents fraud detection information for detecting a prize ball goto when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine. Bit 5 represents fraud detection information for complex goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 represents fraud detection information for fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 represents fraud detection information for nighttime frame opening / monitoring SW abnormality detection when “1”.

  “Injustice detection information 1” is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor got (number of winning inconsistent balls). The “fraud detection information 1” is valid when Bit 4 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “injustice detection information 2” is data indicating information of composite sensor goto detection (launch / OUT inconsistent ball number). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The “fraud detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 3” is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The “fraud detection information 3” is valid when Bit 6 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 4” is data indicating nighttime frame opening information. The “fraud detection information 4” is valid when the Bit 7 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”.

  Bit 7 of “illegal detection information 4” is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 4 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 4 occurrence when “1”. Bit 6 is information indicating whether or not the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 3 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 3 occurrence when “1”. Bit 5 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 2 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 2 occurrence when “1”. Bit 4 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 1 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 1 occurrence when “1”. Bits 0 to 3 are information indicating the number of opening of the main body frame. When the bit is “0”, there is no opening, and “1” to “15” indicate the number of opening. The number of times of opening is counted up to 15 times, and the count after 16 times is held at 15 times.

  “Addition sequence number” is a sequence number for addition, and the addition sequence number received at the time of addition request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the addition sequence number is not established, the addition NG is notified.

  The “fraud detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates fraud detection information of other store game ball detection when “1”. Bit 5 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates that when “1”, the card unit previously connected to the P stand 2F was the development CU 3DF (development CU connection). Bit 6 of “illegal detection state 3” indicates that the card unit to which the P stand 2F was connected in the past when “1” is the game board development jig 3EF (game board development jig connection). . Bit 7 of “illegal detection state 3” indicates that the gaming machine connected when “1” is the gaming machine simulator 2AF (gaming machine simulator connection). Bit1 to Bit4 are reserved. In addition, the other store game ball detection is, for example, a sensor is provided in the collection balls passing path of P units, the sensor reads identification information (such as a marking on the surface) provided on the game ball, the game ball of the own store It is determined whether it matches the identification information. In the case of a mismatch, it is assumed that the game balls of other stores are mixed in the game balls, and Bit 0 of “injustice detection state 3” is set to “1” and notified to the CU 3F.

  The “game information” is information on the P device 2F at the time when the command for requesting the state information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P device 2F. The “game information number”, “type information 1” to “type information n” , “Count information 1” to “count information n”.

  “Number of game information” is the number (n) of type information / count information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). “Type information 1” to “Type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. The type information is data type information from Bit 4 to Bit 7 and indicates the data type of the game information. When it is “0”, there is no information, when it is “1”, when it is “2”, it is a big prize opening. “3” is a winning opening, “4” is the number of symbol stops, “5” is a big hit, and “6” is a small hit. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information, which indicates the data number for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, each data number is indicated. . For example, when the data type is a big hit of “5”, the data number is “1”, the ball is large, “2” is the ball is small, “3” is the ball, “4” to “6” It is a spare time. Further, when the data type is a small hit of “6”, the data number is a small hit when “1”, and a spare when “2” to “15”.

  “Count information 1” to “Count information n” indicate game count information 1 to game count information n, respectively.

  Here, when the data type is a start opening, a large winning opening, and a small winning opening, the count information is information on the number of winning balls from Bit 4 to Bit 7, and the winning ball at the time of winning for each type information of game information. The numbers indicate the number of award balls when “1” to “15”. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are information on the number of wins, which indicates the number of wins (cumulative) for each type of game table information, and each of the numbers “1” to “15” represents data on the number of wins. In the count information, when the data type is the symbol stop count, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the symbol stop count, and when “1” to “15”, the symbol stop count Represents. In the count information, when the data type is big hit or small hit, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the number of hits, and when “1” to “15”, the number of hits is shown. It represents.

  Furthermore, the response of the state information response includes a “launch intensity signal”, a “passing area signal”, a “during fluctuation signal”, and a “handle touch signal”.

  The “fire strength signal” indicates the fire strength T that is a detection result of the fire strength sensor 19F. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing intensity T is a variable value that varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) in accordance with the amount of steering operation. In addition, when the communication interval (for example, 200 msec) between the P stand 2F and the CU3F is shorter than the interval between the pachinko balls (for example, 0.6 sec), a firing intensity signal is basically output for each ball. become. Further, the firing intensity signal may be output as a set with data indicating whether or not it has actually been fired.

  “Passing area signal” indicates the above-described passing area signal. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass area signal is one of the pass area signals A1 to A8. Each passing area signal is associated with the firing intensity T at the time when each passing area signal is detected.

  The “in-change signal” indicates that the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278F changes as the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning openings 275F, 276F, and 277F.

  The “handle touch signal” indicates that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F.

<< 11. Card insertion notification, 12. Card insertion response >>
A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card insertion notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of card insertion. In response to this card insertion notification, a response of a card insertion response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response to the card insertion response is a response to the effect that the card insertion notification has been received with respect to the CU 3F.

  The card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2F when the card is inserted, and “sequential number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC board ID” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Card ID” is identification ID information of an IC card inserted into the CU 3F, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. “Card insertion time” is the time when the IC card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309F (see FIG. 62) of the CU3F. The year information is 2 digits YY, the month information is 2 digits MM, and the day information is 2 digits. The data is DD, time information is represented by two digits hh, minute information is represented by two digits mm, and second information is represented by two digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held on the P platform 2F is the current day ball or the past ball.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3F is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. It is also used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been moved to the store. The CU3F stores a store code where the CU3F is installed. The store code is notified from the security board 325F with information added thereto. The “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying the CU3F, and is used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been replaced. The SC board ID is added to the security board 325F and notified to the P platform 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time. The “store code” and “SC board ID” are not notified to the user program side and are deleted in the payout control circuit.

  The response of the card insertion response notifies the CU 3F that the card insertion notification has been normally received, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion / return notification will be described. First, a card or general card is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F of CU3F, or a card is notified to the P stand 2F as a card insertion notification by depositing a general 0 yen 0 coin card. Information such as ID and card insertion time is notified. When there is a card insertion notification, the P table 2F backs up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. However, when a card insertion notification command is received and a status information request including information on the status of the CU 3F being inserted into the card (Bit 0 = 1 in the CU status) is received (determined that the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F) ), The P base 2F transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. When the card return button 322F of the CU 3F is pressed, a card return notification is made to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F clears information such as the backed up card ID and card insertion time. The condition for canceling the card insertion state is when the P stand 2F receives the card return notification command.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of the card return. In response to this card return notification, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to the CU3F.

  The card return notification command is for notifying the P platform 2F of the card return, and the CU 3F transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed. The card return notification includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response to the card return response is to send a response to the card return notification to the CU 3F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. “Serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. Note that the CU3F does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the currently inserted card or there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Here, the operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if the CU3F is used to insert a member card, a general card, or a deposit to a general 0 yen 0 coin card, the P stand 2F backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. When an operation of pressing the “card return” button is performed on the CU 3F at the time of the card return notification, the P stand 2F clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. In response to this communication test request, a response of a communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to the CU3F.

  The communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2F is not encrypted. The communication test request command includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data to be notified to the P base 2F and is arbitrary data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU3F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the CU3F is not encrypted. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the CU 3F, and is arbitrary data.

<< 17. Count history request, 18. Counting history response >>
A count history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This count history request command is for requesting a count history to the P base 2F. In response to this counting history request, a response to the counting history response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response to the counting history response is to notify the counting history to the CU3F.

  The count history request command requests a count history from the P base 2F, and the CU 3F transmits it to the P base 2F in the count history sequence after the authentication sequence. The count history request includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “store code”, and “SC board ID”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3F is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. The store code is notified from the security board 325F with information added thereto. The “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying the CU3F, and is used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been replaced. The SC board ID is added to the security board 325F and notified to the P platform 2F.

  A process for detecting the shipment maker code of the SC board ID will be described. The SC board ID includes an identification code and a shipping manufacturer code. The P units recognize connected units (commercial CU3F, development unit, etc.) by detecting the shipping manufacturer code included in the SC board ID.

  Specifically, a description will be given of a case where the P platform detects whether a unit to be connected is a connection device other than a commercial CU3F (specifically, a development unit or a game board development jig). When the game history when these development units and game board development jigs not used for commercial use are connected to the unit (CU3F) used for commercial use after that, the game balls given during development This causes a problem that allows a game to be played during commercial use. Therefore, in order to avoid the problem, the P stand 2F detects whether the development unit or the game board development jig is connected when connected to the unit, and stores the result in the recovery register.

  In order to detect whether the development unit or the game board development jig is connected when connected to the unit, the P base 2F, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before the count history request, and the count history request The shipping manufacturer code of the later SC board ID is compared. First, if the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “None”, the development unit or the game board development jig is detected regardless of the shipment maker code of the SC board ID after the count history request. do not do. Even if the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request matches the shipment maker code of the SC board ID after the count history request, it is not detected as a development unit or a game board development jig.

  However, when the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history and the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history match the upper byte, but the lower byte is different, it is detected as a development unit. Also, the upper byte of the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history is the code of the commercial unit, and the upper byte of the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history is the code other than the game board development jig Also detected as a development unit. If the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before requesting the counting history is the code of the commercial unit, and the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after requesting the counting history is the code of the game board development jig, the game board Detect with development jig.

  The P stand 2F stores the detection that the development unit is connected by setting Bit 4 of the recovery register to “1”, and the detection that the game board development jig is connected is the recovery register. This bit is memorized by setting Bit 5 to “1”.

  If the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “none”, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is a unit newly connected after the recovery process is performed. The shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID is overwritten. When the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the count history request is “present”, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is subjected to the recovery process if there is no game ball to be recovered. After that, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID of the newly connected unit is overwritten. However, the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is the same as the shipping manufacturer code of the SC board ID of the newly connected unit after the recovery process if there is a game ball to be recovered. Prohibit overwriting. It should be noted that the prohibition state of overwriting the shipment maker code of the SC board ID is canceled by clearing the RAM of the P unit 2F (particularly clearing the number of game balls). By prohibiting the overwriting of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID when there are game balls, the number of game balls given by the development unit is recovered as the number of game balls that can be played by the connected commercial unit thereafter. This can be prevented.

  The response of the counting history response is to notify the counting history to the CU 3F, and the P unit 2F receives the counting history request command and transmits the counting history information stored in the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. . The count history response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “count history result”, “count history 1”, and “count history 2”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Counting history result” is information indicating whether or not the counting history is stored in the P table 2F by the counting history process in the P table 2F. Here, the counting history is a history of the number of game balls paid out to the CU3F side as the number of counting request balls from the P table 2F side during the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. “Card ID”, “Counting receipt time” included when receiving a count receipt response (count response ON) from the CU3F, and the cumulative number of count balls dispensed up to the count request OFF state “cumulative count balls” It also includes information on “number”. Note that the P platform 2F holds the history of the past two times (the history of the number of game balls in the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state is one time).

  In the count history result, “0x00” indicates that there is no history, “0x01” indicates that there is a history (with information on count history 1), and “0x02” indicates that there is a history (with information on count history 2).

  “Counting history 1” is the most recent history (final counting) of the past two histories, and includes information on “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “game ball number”. Is included. “Card ID” is identification information of the card inserted into the CU 3F at the time of counting request. The “count reception time” is the time when the CU 3F receives the number of game balls requested to be counted from the P stand 2F. The “cumulative counting ball number” is the cumulative number of counting balls counted during the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls held on the P stand 2F at the end of counting.

  “Counting history 2” is an old history (counting immediately before the last counting) of the past two times, and includes “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number” and “game ball”. Contains number information. The information of “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “game ball number” is the same type of information as included in “counting history 1”, and detailed description thereof will not be repeated. .

  Next, conditions for outputting the count history data held by the P platform 2F to the CU 3F will be described. When the P store 2F matches the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the “store code” and “SC board ID” included in the count history request command received from the CU 3F in the counting history sequence, The “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” are included in the response of the counting history response and output to the CU 3F. Further, if the “store code” stored in the count history request command received from the CU 3F matches the “store code” stored in the P table 2F, even if the “SC board ID” is different, the count history response Including “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” in the response to the CU3F. This takes into account changing the combination of P stand 2F and CU 3F in the store, and if it is in the same store, it is disadvantageous even if the counting history data stored in P stand 2F is transferred to another CU 3F Is not given.

  However, if the “store code” stored in the “store code” included in the count history request command received from the CU 3F is different from the “store code” stored in the P table 2F, It is prohibited to include the “counting history result”, “counting history 1”, and “counting history 2” in the response of the response to output to the CU 3F. Even if the same CU3F is moved to another store, even if it is connected to the P stand 2F holding the same “SC board ID”, if the counting history data is taken over, it is disadvantageous to the other store. It is because there is a possibility of giving.

  Of course, the P base 2F outputs the counting history data stored in the P base 2F when not connected to the CU3F but connected to the game board development jig or the development unit, or when not connected to any unit. There is no. By restricting the output of the counting history data, the security of the game machine including the P machine 2F and the P machine 2F is enhanced.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P platform>
<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of commands and responses between the CU 3F and the P base 2F will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU3F (primary station) to the P station 2F (secondary station), and the P station 2F returns a response to the CU3F in response to the command. In other words, the business message transmission is a command / response system in which the CU 3F is the primary station and the P stand 2F is the secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command to the P stand 2F from the CU 3F to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted at intervals of 200 ms between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25F, the P platform 2F hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27F per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2F can notify the CU 3F of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P base 2F. It is also possible to match with

<< Communication line disconnection detection on CU side >>
Next, processing when communication disconnection is detected on the CU3F side will be described. When the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3F transmits the command to the P base 2F, the same command is transmitted to the P base 2F again. Further, if no response is received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P platform 2F. The same command is retransmitted up to 14 times on the P platform 2F. If a response is not received from the P platform 2F even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3F determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication cut off”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3F is disconnected from the connector of the P base 2F, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2F is cut off. The CU3F does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< Communication line disconnection detection on P side >>
Processing when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2F side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F returns a response to the CU 3F in response to the command. Thereafter, when the state in which the command from the CU 3F is not transmitted to the P stand 2F continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2F determines that the communication is cut off, stops the driving of the firing motor 18F, and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the CU3F connector and the P-base 2F connector, disconnection of the connection wiring, or the power supply disconnection of the CU3F.

  The command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2F side include recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication. Does not include test request / communication test response command and response.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 69 is a process that is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU3F is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the P base 2F stops the firing motor 18F to stop the game, and then starts communication. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 80 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the last last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2F, and requests recovery information from the P unit 2F. The P base 2F refers to the previous last transmission count serial number notified from the CU 3F and executes the count recovery process. Specifically, the P base 2F refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3F has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3F has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2F returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) to the CU 3F as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous game machine information, and the like.

  In the CU3F that has received the recovery response, if the previous last transmission addition serial number process included in the recovery information has not been executed, the CU3F additional recovery process is performed using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When performing the addition ball recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F and transmits recovery data to the P unit 2F. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P base 2F executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3F (recovery response 2). In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, a recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F, and is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU3F counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2F receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3F has retransmitted the command. The CU 3F transmits a command, and backs up the sequence number when a response with the same sequence number is notified from the P unit 2F. When transmitting a response corresponding to the received command, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the received serial number as it is. The P base 2F backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request command to the P platform 2F with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2F returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3F as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F with a serial number “2”. The P platform 2F returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3F as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2F clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  The CU 3F counts up the serial number to “4” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F. The status information request command includes information on the unit price of the balls. By transmitting the ball unit price to the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F can recognize whether the game ball is playing at 4 yen per ball or whether the game is played at 1 yen per ball. . In addition, since the status information request command is transmitted in a cycle of 200 ms as described above, it is possible to transmit information on the unit price of the ball up to three times to the P stand 2F during the cycle of 600 ms that the game ball is fired. is there. Therefore, it is possible to change the unit price for each game ball played on the P platform 2F. If the unit price can be managed for each game ball in a small number (for example, one ball unit), the player's request (for example, a desire to play a game slowly with a small amount, or the remaining number of game balls in a short time) It is possible to provide a variety of games tailored to the demand for consumption. The command of the status information request transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F described below includes the ball unit price information, but is not specified when the information of the unit price is not directly related to the content of the sequence to be described.

  In response to this, the P table 2F updates the game table information, the game information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time a response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2F returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “4”. The response of the status information response does not include information on the unit price of the ball. This prevents illegally changing the information of the ball unit price currently being played on the P stand 2F and sending it to the CU 3F and illegally managing the ball unit price of the game ball managed by the CU 3F. . Thereby, the security of the game system can be improved.

  In response to this, the CU3F updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU3F counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F sends the response of the status information response to the CU3F with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F when a card is inserted will be described. The CU 3F shown in FIG. 70 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card return ready state = OFF to the P unit 2F before card insertion. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n and game prohibition to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, in the CU3F, when a card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed. Note that information (card ID or the like) recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer may be stored in the CU3F.

  The CU3F is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the midst of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the game hall, or inquiring the hall server 801F, for example, holding balls, storage balls, and the remaining amount of the card. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312F and displaying on the display 54F on the P platform 2F side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3F does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312F, the status information request including the serial number = n + 1 and the card return ready state = OFF. Is sent to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU 3F. The display 54F on the P platform 2F side is controlled by the display control unit 350F of the CU 3F to display that the card is being inquired.

  After that, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3F stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and the serial number = n + 2, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the store code. And a card insertion notification command including the SC board ID is transmitted to the P base 2F. The store code and the SC board ID are information added to the command when the card insertion notification command passes through the security board 325F. In response to this, the P unit 2F backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM of the payout control unit 171F, and a response to the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3F. Also in CU3F, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of CU control unit 323F.

  In response to this, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 3 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F, thereby notifying the P unit 2F that the card is being inserted. . The P unit 2F receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3F. To notify.

  While the card is being inserted, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F. The P unit 2F responds with a status information response including a serial number = n + 4 and a game permission. Is returned to CU3F.

  Further, a case where a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F during card insertion will be described. First, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + x, a card ID, a card insertion time, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P unit 2F. When a card insertion notification command is transmitted during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID and card insertion time of the card being inserted, and are stored in the P base 2F. There is a high possibility that fraud that intentionally changes the current card ID or the card insertion time has been performed.

  Therefore, the P table 2F does not back up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F. Whether or not the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F can be easily determined based on the card return preparation state = ON information included in the state information request command.

  Next, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + x to the CU 3F without performing backup of the received card ID, card insertion time, and the like. Note that the CU3F does not store the card ID, the card insertion time, and the like transmitted by the card insertion notification command in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, the card ID is intentionally transmitted to the P base 2F during the card insertion, and the illegal action such as falsification of the card ID stored in the P base 2F can be prevented, and security is improved. Can do.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an insertion process executed by the CU 3F when a card is inserted into the CU 3F. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 71, each step of SF1 to SF7 is executed by CU3F. SF8-SF10 and SF12-SF15 are executed by the P stand 2F. More specifically, the deletion process of SF8 to SF10, SF12, SF13, and SF15 is executed by the effect control board 15F provided on the P stand 2F, and the transmission process of SF14 and SF15 is provided by the effect control unit 151F. The produced effect control board 15F transmits to the payout control unit 171F, and the payout control unit 171F transmits to the CU3F.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as SF) 1, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not the game is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not an interrupt operation has been performed and a game interruption sequence has been executed. If it is suspended, it is determined by SF2 whether or not the C-ID and type of the inserted card matches the C-ID and type of the interrupted card. The inserted card is ejected and a transition is made to standby. In FIG. 71, the “type” is not shown.

  On the other hand, if the C-ID and type of the inserted card and the C-ID and type of the interrupted card match, the interrupted player returns to the gaming machine and starts the game. Therefore, the control proceeds to SF4, the suspended state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game by SF6 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by SF1 that it is not interrupted, it is determined at SF3a whether or not a card is already inserted. Whether or not the card is being inserted is determined based on whether or not the card reader provided in the card insertion / discharge port 309F accepts the card. If it is determined by the SF 3a that the card is not being inserted, the C-ID and type of the inserted card are stored and transmitted to the P base 2F by the SF 3. In the P stand 2F, the C-ID and type are received and stored in the received C-ID, type and backup area (for example, a backup data storage unit provided on the effect control board 15F shown in FIG. 65). The C-ID and type are compared (SF8). Then, it is determined by SF9 whether or not the comparison results match, and if they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing is completed. .

  If it is determined by the SF 3a that the card is being inserted, in order to prevent the C-ID and type different from the C-ID and type of the card being inserted from being overwritten and stored in the CU 3F or P stand 2F, the SF 3 Skip processing in.

  In this way, the player identification information storage means (current player game history data storage section) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination means (SF8, SF9) for performing the same determination processing are used. Display control means (the effect control board 15F provided with the effect control unit 151F), it is not necessary to provide the same determination processing function on the communication means side (the payout control unit 171F side). A common communication means can be used between the gaming machine having the means and the gaming machine not having the display control means, and it is possible to mass-produce small quantities of the communication means.

  In addition, you may perform the process of SF15 and SF7 as a control content of a modification. The game history data, C-ID, and type stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU3F and then deleted by SF15. The CU3F receives it and transmits the received data to the hall server (upper server) 801. The hall server 801F backs up the received game history data, C-ID, and type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by SF9 that they match, the process proceeds to SF12, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is stored in the current area (for example, the backup data storage unit provided on the effect control board 15F shown in FIG. 65). The game history data is newly updated from the game history data.

  Note that the processing of SF10, SF13, and SF14 may be performed as the control content of the modification. If YES in SF9, the control proceeds to SF10, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data, the game history data, the C-ID, and the type in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted by SF13. Further, after SF12, SF14 sends a notification that the players are the same to the CU. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of SF10, SF13, SF14 and the processes of SF15, SF7.

  The conditions for overwriting (updating) the card ID and insertion time will be described in more detail. As described above, the card ID and the insertion time are prohibited from being updated during card insertion. As a prohibiting condition, the relationship between the card insertion notification command and the CU status included in the status information request command will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 72 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the relationship between a card insertion notification command, a CU state included in a state information request command, and a card insertion state.

  First, FIG. 72A shows an example in which the CU state included in the status information request command is in the card insertion state (Bit0 = “1”) before the card unit 2F receives the card insertion notification command. ing. The state (1) shown in FIG. 72 (a) is a card insertion wait state, and the P unit 2F has not received the card insertion notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. Is when the card is not being inserted (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Next, a state (2) shown in FIG. 72A is a card insertion preparation state, and the card insertion notification command is not received by the P base 2F, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the CU state to be inserted is card insertion (Bit0 = "1"). Also in this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time. The state (3) shown in FIG. 72 (a) is a card insertion state. When the P unit 2F receives the card insertion notification command, the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is the card. This is the case during insertion (Bit 0 = “1”). In this case, the P base 2F is prohibited from overwriting the card ID and the insertion time because the CU 3F is inserting the card.

  Next, the state (4) shown in FIG. 72A is a card return preparation state, and the card return notification command is not received by the P stand 2F, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the CU state to be displayed is not card insertion (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, overwriting of the card ID and the insertion time is prohibited in the P base 2F on the assumption that the CU 3F has not yet returned the card and the card is being inserted. The state (5) shown in FIG. 72 (a) is a card return state, and the card unit 2F receives the card return notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is the card insertion. This is the case (Bit 0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  FIG. 72B shows an example in which the CU state included in the status information request command becomes the card insertion status (Bit0 = “1”) after the P unit 2F receives the card insertion notification command. State (1) ′ shown in FIG. 72 (b) is a card insertion waiting state, and the card insertion notification command has not been received by the P base 2F, and the CU included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the card is not being inserted (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Next, the state (2) ′ shown in FIG. 72 (b) is a card insertion preparation state, and the P table 2F has received a card insertion notification command, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F. This is a case where the CU state is not card insertion (Bit0 = "0"). Also in this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time. The state (3) ′ shown in FIG. 72 (b) is a card insertion state, and the CU state included in the command of the state information request transmitted from the CU 3F when the P unit 2F receives the card insertion notification command. This is the case when the card is being inserted (Bit0 = "1"). In this case, the P base 2F is prohibited from overwriting the card ID and the insertion time because the CU 3F is inserting the card.

  Next, the state (4) ′ shown in FIG. 72 (b) is a card return preparation state, and the P table 2F has not received the card return notification command, but the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F This is a case where the included CU state is not card insertion (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, overwriting of the card ID and insertion time is prohibited for the P base 2F on the assumption that the card is being inserted because the CU 3F has not yet returned the card. The state (5) ′ shown in FIG. 72 (b) is a card return state, and the card unit 2F receives the card return notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is the card. This is a case where no insertion is in progress (Bit0 = "0"). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P base 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  In this way, by limiting the conditions for overwriting (updating) the card ID and insertion time, the card ID or the like is intentionally transmitted to the P base 2F, and the card ID stored in the P base 2F is falsified. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as doing and improve security.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 73, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3F lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321F is pressed, the CU 3F confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, the CU3F is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, the display unit 54F displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the remaining amount and are being added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3F makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3F counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Since the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the serial number = n + 1, the number of addition balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 5, the number of additional balls = 175, and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding the balls and replaying them will be described. In FIG. 74, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  After that, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3F determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the holding balls or the storage balls is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the operation of pressing the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3F notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of additional balls = 125 to the P stand 2F after confirming the consumption from a holding ball or a storage ball. Specifically, the CU 3F displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P platform 2F. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Then, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU 3F. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 2, an additional ball number = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 75 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, all the bits in the card return ready state transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F are OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  In FIG. 75, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  For the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3F, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P stand 2F. In response to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3F, the same counting sequence number m is returned from the P stand 2F. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28F. In FIG. 75, immediately after the operation of pressing the count button 28F once, a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, card return ready state = OFF, count serial number = m, and count response = OFF is sent from the CU3F. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F.

  When the operation of the count button 28F is detected, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323F transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350F. In response to the instruction, the display control unit 350F controls the display 54F on the P platform 2F side. As a result, the display 54F displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof decreases, while the number of holding balls increases.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 2, a count serial number m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P platform 2F finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 800 to 700. At this stage, although the count request state of the P base 2F is OFF, since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2F transmits a second count request to the CU 3F. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3F. However, even at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the ball | bowl equivalent to the number of count balls requested | required, and updates the display of a ball | bowl to 200. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2F that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to the CU 3F. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  CU3F which received this status information response determines with completion of counting. Although not shown, the CU 3F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return preparation state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2F.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< game ball counting (automatic counting) >>
When the store is closed, if a card is not inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2F, the store clerk goes around the P stand 2F where the game ball remains and inserts a store card into one stand and performs a counting operation. It was necessary to collect the remaining game balls, and the work at the time of closing the store was complicated. In addition, if the game machine and the card unit are configured so that physical game balls are paid out as in the past, the work at the time of closing the store can be performed simply by collecting the remaining game balls and resetting the card unit. Can be done. However, in the configuration in which the P stand 2F and the CU 3F communicate with each other by performing mutual authentication as in the present embodiment to manage the game balls (game points), the remaining game balls are collected by simply resetting the card unit. It is not possible to do the work at the time of closing. Then, with reference to FIG. 76, the automatic counting process of game balls at the time of closing will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process that is automatically performed when the game hall is closed. First, CU3F is in a state where there is no stock card with card holding ball = 0 balls. On the other hand, the P stand 2F recognizes that a game ball = 50 balls and no card is inserted in the CU 3F. Then, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card insertion state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  When closing is set in the game hall where the CU 3F and the P stand 2F are installed, if it is determined that no card is inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2F, processing described below is performed. The fact that no card is inserted can be determined from the information of the card insertion state = OFF included in the command for requesting the state information, and the fact that a game ball remains in the P stand 2F indicates that the state information response It can be determined from the information of the number of game balls included in the response = 50.

  The CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + 1, a card ID = 0, and a card insertion time = 0 to the P unit 2F. That is, the P card 2F is notified that the card with card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, has been inserted into the card reader of the CU3F at the card insertion time = 0. As described above, since the virtual card is inserted into the CU 3F, it becomes unnecessary for the store clerk to go around the P table 2F where the game balls remain and insert the store card into one unit. In response to this, the P base 2F recognizes that the card has been inserted into the CU 3F, and executes the following processing. In response to this, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 1 to the CU 3F.

  Next, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F that the CU opening state is OFF. Specifically, a status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU opening status = OFF, card return preparation status = ON, counting sequence number = m, and counting response = OFF is transmitted to P unit 2F.

  The store closing setting in the amusement hall is, for example, that the CU control unit 323F distributes a closing command to the CU3F from the hall management computer or the hall server 801F installed in the amusement hall, for example. It is done by judging the end of business in Japan. Specifically, when a staff member closes the hall management computer or hall server 801F, a closing command for closing the shop is distributed to each CU 3F. Alternatively, the closing time may be set and stored in the hall management computer or hall server 801F, and the closing command may be automatically distributed to each CU 3F at the closing time. As another method, a sales end signal may be transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation of a business end by a store clerk, and the CU control unit 323F may determine the end of business at the game hall. As yet another method, each CU3F is provided with a clock function, and when it is a closing time (for example, 10 o'clock), a time (for example, 10:20) after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) of the closing time has elapsed. When timed by the function, control may be performed so that each CU 3F transmits a status information request including the CU opening status = OFF to the P stand 2F.

  In response to this, in the P stand 2F, the serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls at the current time = 50, the count serial number of m + 1 updated by adding “1” to the received count serial number m, the count ball number = 50 and the count request = ON A status information response including is transmitted to the CU3F. That is, since the P stand 2F requests the CU 3F to count the remaining game balls, the P ball 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 50, the count acceptance request, and the counting sequence number count up, and the last transmission count of the previous time. Back up the serial number update and counting ball request status ON information.

  CU3F which received it adds the number of count balls = 50 sent from P stand 2F to the number of balls. Note that the number of counting balls = 50 added to the number of holding balls is not fixed, and the CU 3F backs up the information of the last last transmission counting number update while keeping the current number of holding balls = 0. And CU3F returns to P stand 2F in order to notify receipt of a counting ball. Specifically, a status information request including a serial number = n + 3, a CU opening state = OFF, a card return preparation state = ON, a counting serial number = m + 1, and a counting response = ON is transmitted to the P unit 2F. The counting balls received from the P stand 2F are stored in the storage means (for example, RAM) of the CU 3F as the number of balls held by the card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, and the card insertion time = 0.

  In the P stand 2F that has received it, the number of counting balls is subtracted from the number of gaming balls (number of gaming balls = 50−number of counting balls = 50), and the number of gaming balls = 0 is displayed. Then, the P stand 2F subtracts the number of counting balls from the number of gaming balls, and there is no remaining gaming balls (number of gaming balls = 0) and notifies the state that the counting request is unnecessary (counting request state OFF). = N + 3, Number of game balls = 0, Count sequence number = m + 1, Count ball number = 0 and Count request = OFF Sends a status information response to CU3F.

  When all the remaining game balls are counted, a process of returning the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) inserted in the CU3F is performed. Specifically, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification including a serial number = n + 4 to the P unit 2F in order to notify the P unit 2F that the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) has been returned. Upon receiving this, the P platform recognizes that the virtual card inserted into the CU3F has been returned, and transmits a response to the card return response including the serial number = n + 4, the card ID = 0, and the card insertion time = 0 to the CU3F.

  Next, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F that the CU state is the card insertion state = OFF. Specifically, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = n + 5 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P base 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 0, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting ball number = 0 to the CU 3F.

  In this way, in the counting process at the time of closing in the game hall, the counting process is automatically performed without the store clerk inserting the card and pressing the counting button 28F, and the remaining game balls All the numbers can be collectively counted as the number of balls in the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) and stored in the storage means of the CU3F. Note that the CU3F may transmit the number of possessed balls obtained by counting the number of remaining game balls to the hall server 801F together with the identification information of the P stand 2F or CU3F. In the hall server 801F, the number of possessed balls sent from the CU 3F is stored for each date, P stand 2F or CU 3F, so that the retained balls can be returned to the player at a later date. In addition, the CU 3F may transmit the card ID inserted immediately before closing the store to the hall server 801F in association with the counted number of remaining balls (remaining game balls). The remaining game balls are likely to be game balls of the player with the card ID that was inserted immediately before closing the store, so it is possible to reduce the work of identifying the owner of the counted number of balls. Returning the number of held balls to the player can be performed more easily.

  In the above-described embodiment, the store closing process when the card is not inserted and the game ball remains in the P stand 2F has been described. However, the store closing process when the card is inserted is described later as “game ball counting ( The same process as the process of “card return” ”(see FIG. 78) is executed. However, regarding the counting process of the remaining game balls, the store clerk may perform the counting process by depressing the counting button 28F, or may automatically perform the counting process by the closing setting. In any case, when a card is inserted, the card is returned by the closing process and is in a waiting state for removal, so the store clerk needs to collect the card.

<< Counting history processing >>
Next, processing of count history data stored in the P platform 2F will be described. FIG. 77 is a sequence diagram for explaining the processing of the counting history data stored in the P platform 2F. In FIG. 77, the initial number of game balls is 600 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n (not shown), a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In the P platform 2F, the player operates the counting button 28F from the response of the status information response transmitted before receiving the status information request command until the response to the status information request command is transmitted. The counting process is started.

  Then, in the P stand 2F, the response of the status information response including the serial number = n (not shown), the number of game balls = 600, the counting serial number = m + 1, the counting ball number = 100 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU 3F. Here, in the P platform 2F, the counting request is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, so the counting history processing is started. Specifically, the P stand 2F uses the history of the number of game balls paid out to the CU 3F side as the count request ball number from the P stand 2F side between the count request ON state and the count request OFF state as a count history for one time. Remember. That is, when there are a plurality of count requests, the history from the count request ON state to the count request OFF state is stored as the first count request as the first count request. Thereafter, as the second count request, the history from the count request ON state to the count request OFF state is stored as the second count history. Although depending on the period during which the count button 28F is pressed, a response to a status information response including a plurality of count request ON states is received between the count request ON state and the count request OFF state. It is returned to CU3F. The count history to be stored includes the “card ID” at the time of the count request, the “count reception time” included in the status information response of the count response ON state from the CU3F, and the number of balls that have been paid out until the count request is OFF. The information includes the cumulative number “cumulative counting ball number” and “game ball number” at the end of counting.

  Next, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1 (not shown), a count serial number = m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P-unit 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed. . At this stage, the number of balls counted = 100 is provisionally confirmed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P stand 2F subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counted balls = 100, and the number of game balls is collated, and if it is 500 balls, the temporarily fixed 100 balls are confirmed. . Then, the display on the game ball number display 29F is updated from 600 to 500. Further, when the player continues to operate the counting button 28F, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1 (not shown), the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number = m + 2, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request. A response of a status information response including = ON is returned to the CU3F. Next, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 (not shown), a count serial number = m + 2 and a count response = ON to the P unit 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed. . At this stage, the number of balls counted = 100 is provisionally confirmed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P stand 2F subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and the number of game balls is collated, and if it is 400 balls, the temporarily fixed 100 balls are fixed. . Then, the display on the game ball number display 29F is updated from 600 to 500. After that, when the operation of the counting button 28F by the player is finished, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 2 (not shown), the number of game balls = 400, the counting serial number = m + 3, the number of counting balls = 100 and the counting request. = Response of status information response including OFF is returned to CU3F. When the P stand 2F is changed to the counting request OFF state, the counting history stores 100 balls + 100 balls = 200 balls as the counting history 1 as the “cumulative counting ball number”. Further, the P stand 2F stores the number of game balls when changed to the count request OFF state in the counting history 1 as the “number of game balls” at the end of counting. Further, the P base 2F stores the “count reception time” included in the state information response of the count response ON state from the CU 3F in the count history 1. When a new history is stored in the counting history 1, if the counting history 1 already exists, the counting history 1 is stored as the counting history 2 and then the new history is stored in the counting history 1. . In addition, since the history for the past two times is stored in the P platform 2F, it is stored as the counting history 1 and the counting history 2, but even if the history for the past one time or the history for the past three times or more is stored. Good.

  As described above, it is possible to recover the number of game balls counted by storing the counting history, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the recovery processing by storing a plurality of past pieces.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 78 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 78, the number of cards possessed by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is 0, and the initial number of gaming balls is 800. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game table, the player presses the “card return” button. However, when the player presses the “return card” button, the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls, and the CU 3F determines that the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is not zero. Further, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU3F sets the card return ready state = ON, and the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to P unit 2F. Note that the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3F displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54F or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28F to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2F determines that the counting operation for pressing the counting button 28F is a counting operation with the card return ready state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU3F of a counting acceptance number of 800 balls, and a counting acceptance number request for 800 gaming balls, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1, a gaming ball number = 800, a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a count request message, the P unit 2F counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the counted number of 800 balls to the number of held balls, and subtracts the counted number of 800 balls from the gaming ball number of 800 balls to 0 balls. Further, the CU3F backs up the updated data of the last transmission count sequence number last time. Then, in order to notify the receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3F sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU store opening state = ON, card return ready state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F subtracts the counting ball number 800 from the gaming ball number 800 and displays the gaming ball number 0 on the display 54F or the like. Further, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F that the number of game balls is 0 and counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to the CU3F. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  The CU3F counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28F and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322F, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of a card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17F, and the card insertion time to the CU 3F. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3F, the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17F are cleared.

  In response to this, the CU 3F performs a match determination between the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P stand 2F, and if it matches, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801F or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3F stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F and returns the card to the player. In addition, when the player starts the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in the CU3F Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU3F transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801F, and the hall server 801F associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3F can be removed from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309F (card removal possible state). The CU 3F is attached with a sensor capable of determining whether or not the card can be removed in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F, and when the signal of the sensor is in the ON state, the card is determined to be ready for card removal. If it is in the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal is complete.

  When the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of information indicating that the card return ready state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Therefore, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4, the CU opening state = ON, the card return ready state = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Send. In response to this, the P stand 2F displays “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278F to the player in order to prevent forgetting to remove the card. Further, in order to notify the card removal, the P base 2F may turn on the LED or output a voice message “Please remove the card” with the speaker 270F. Further, the P stand 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 4, a game ball number = 0, a count serial number = m + 1, a count ball number = 0, and a count response = OFF to the CU 3F.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is in the ON state, the CU 3F transmits a command for requesting the state information including “waiting for card removal = ON” to the P base 2F. However, when the player removes the card from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is turned off, so the CU3F is waiting for the serial number = n + 5 and card removal = OFF A command for requesting the status information including is transmitted to the P base 2F.

  In response to this, the P base 2F stops displaying “please remove the card” displayed on the variable display device 278F, and terminates the card removal notification. The notification of card removal is continued until a status information request command including ON card waiting = ON is received until a status information request command including OFF card waiting = OFF is received. Further, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3F.

  Note that the game ball counting process sequence when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 78 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can also be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<< Abnormal Sequence 1 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information request is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power interruption and a communication line disconnection and the status information request command from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P base 2F is turned OFF and then turned ON again), and the status information request has not arrived (a command has not reached the P base 2F from the CU 3F) ) Shows a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 79, before the power interruption occurs during the game, CU 3F transmits a status information request including serial number = n to P unit 2F. In response to this, in order to notify the game machine information CU3F, the P machine 2F transmits a status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU3F. . The P table 2F updates the previous last transmission serial number as the previous game table information to “n”.

  CU3F receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the previous last transmission serial number to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the P stand 2F during the game, when a status information request including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F is in a power cut off state. Status information request cannot be received. After that, since the status information response from the P stand 2F is not transmitted, the CU 3F performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. From the time when the P table 2F transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3F until the power is cut off, the game is continued in the P table 2F and the game table information is changed, the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6. Number of balls to be subtracted = 36, which is the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P base 2F is restored, and the P base 2F starts to operate. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 80 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission serial number = n to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In the P machine 2F that has received it, the P machine 2F first receives the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request and the last last data that is backed up inside the P machine 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). It is determined whether or not the transmission sequence number = n matches. If they match, it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F before the communication disconnection has reached the CU 3F. In this case, the status information response is included in the status information response. The game information is updated on the CU3F side based on the game information to be played. Therefore, in this case, the P stand 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1, ball unit price) to the CU 3F as no game information storage (specifically, no previous game stand information). If the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request does not match the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F), the communication is interrupted. Since it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU3F before the CU3F has not reached the CU3F, in such a case, the game information is stored (specifically, the previous game table information A recovery response (sequence number = 1, ball unit price) including game information is returned to the CU3F. The P stand 2F transmits the response of the recovery response including the unit price when transmitting the response to the CU 3F, and transmits the unit price of the game ball played before the recovery process to the CU 3F. As a result, the game can be played after the recovery process at the unit price of the game balls played before the recovery process. The ball unit price information is also included in the response of the recovery response transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F, which will be described later, but is not specified in particular when the ball unit price information is not directly related to the contents of the sequence to be described.

  In FIG. 79, the CU3F does not store the game information included in the recovery response, and therefore does not perform the addition recovery process. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since no game information is stored, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Upon receiving this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (the number of game balls as the latest game table information = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. CU3F receives a status information response including unreported gaming machine information, updates the last transmission number last time, and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Counting history sequence >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a process of reading the count history stored in the P base 2F to the CU 3F will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example of a process of reading the count history stored in the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. First, the CU 3F transmits a count history request command including a serial number = n, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P platform 2F. The P stand 2F compares the store code transmitted from the CU 3F with the card insertion notification command and stored with the store code transmitted from the CU 3F with the count history request command. When the store code matches with the comparison result, the P table 2F sets the stored count history 1 and count history 2 data to the response of the count history response so that it can be transmitted to the CU 3F. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the counting history response including the serial number = n, the counting history 1 and the counting history 2 to the CU 3F.

  On the other hand, if the store code does not match as a result of the comparison, the P platform 2F sets data as no counting history in the response of the counting history response transmitted to the CU3F. Although not shown, the P base 2F returns a response of a counting history response including a serial number = n and no counting history to the CU 3F.

  Thus, the counting history sequence can recover the number of game balls counted by transmitting the counting history stored in the P platform 2F to the CU 3F, and can further recover a plurality of past (counting history 1 and counting history). By transmitting 2) to CU3F, the accuracy of the recovery process can be improved. Note that the plurality of count histories transmitted to the CU3F is not limited to two times, and may be three or more count histories.

<< Abnormal sequence 2 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information response has not reached yet due to the power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and the response of the status information response has not yet reached from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit. In particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P stand 2F is turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not arrived (the command has not reached the CU 3F from the P stand 2F) ) Shows a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 81, after a power failure occurs during a game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2F to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3F is not transmitted, the P stand 2F performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued on the P stand 2F, and the game stand information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of addition balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game stand information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, in the CU3F, since the power is cut off, the inserted card is forcibly ejected and returned to the player. At that time, the number of balls currently held is stored in the card and discharged. If the number of possessed balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU or the like, the hall server 801F that regularly receives the number of retained balls from the CU 3F (for example, every 5 seconds) and stores it in a backup manner. The loss may be compensated for by the player based on the stored data (the number of balls). Thereafter, the power failure of the CU3F is restored and the CU3F is turned on and starts operating. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 80 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission serial number = n−1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, in the P unit 2F, the previous last transmission sequence number of the received recovery request = n−1, and the last final transmission sequence number backed up in the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) = n. Are compared. As a result, since they do not match, it is determined that the state information response transmitted last before the occurrence of the power interruption has not reached the CU 3F. Therefore, the P stand 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including the game information storage presence (specifically, the previous game stand information exists) to the CU 3F, assuming that the game information has not been notified to the CU 3F. To do. That is, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, which are the previous game table information, are included in the recovery response and transmitted to the CU 3F.

  The CU 3F executes a recovery process based on the game information included in the recovery response. However, since the game ball addition request is not transmitted immediately before the communication line disconnection is detected, the addition recovery process is unnecessary. For this reason, after receiving the recovery response, the communication start request is transmitted without transmitting the recovery request 2. The CU 3F executes the first check process before transmitting this communication start request. In the first check process, whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P table 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value by the CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response Is checked. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3F transmits a communication start request including a serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. In response to this, in the P stand 2F, unreported game stand information (game balls = 450, added balls = 6, subtracted balls) included in the status information response that did not reach the CU 3F before the power failure occurred. = 36) is notified to the CU 3F by a status information response, and the last transmission serial number is updated last time to back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. CU3F receives a status information response including unreported gaming machine information, updates the last transmission number last time, and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the card ID of the reinserted card is properly read by the card information reading process, whether the read card ID matches the card ID included in the recovery response or not Is determined by the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F, and the insertion time of the card inserted at the start of the game before the power interruption occurs is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and the stored card insertion time and recovery are stored. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F may determine whether or not the card insertion times included in the response match and match. In this case, it is determined that both match, and if there is no addition recovery, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  In this embodiment, a card ID and a card insertion time are used as player specifying information that can specify a player when determining the identity of the player. This card ID includes not only the card ID of the member card that identifies the individual player of the member but also the card ID of the visitor card used by the player who visited the store as a visitor. In the case of this visitor card, it is used for an unspecified player and does not specify a specific player individual. That is, in the case of this card ID, whether the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line disconnection and the player who intends to play the game after the power interruption is restored are the same player. It can be specified whether or not, but it cannot be specified to which specific individual the player is. Therefore, the above “player identification information” is not limited to identifying a specific individual player, and the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line interruption and the game after the power interruption recovery is performed. It is a broad concept that includes information that can be used to determine the identity of the player who is trying to correct.

<< Abnormal sequence 3 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, another recovery process of the number of game balls when the status information response is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and the response of the status information response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, there is a power outage / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of CU3F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not arrived (a command has not arrived from P stand 2F to CU3F) The sequence diagram for demonstrating the counting process in case the communication partners after a mismatch do not correspond is shown. This power OFF / ON can also be turned OFF / ON, for example, by failure of the CU3F, or by manually turning the power OFF / ON, or by removing / inserting the CU3F from the card unit holder.

  Referring to FIG. 82, after a power failure occurs during a game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2F to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3F is not transmitted, the P stand 2F performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued on the P stand 2F, and the game stand information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of addition balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game stand information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, in the CU3F, since the power is cut off, the inserted card is forcibly ejected and returned to the player. Thereafter, the power failure of the CU3F is restored and the power is turned on, and the CU3F is replaced and a new CU3F starts operation.

  In addition, when CU3F which was operating before CU exchange has memorized the number of balls, the number of balls may be stored in another card (for example, a card inside the CU) and discharged. At that time, if the number of balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU, etc., the number of balls is received regularly from the CU3F (for example, every 5 seconds) and stored in a backup. The player may be compensated for the loss based on the data stored in the server 801F (the number of balls).

  When the exchanged CU3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU3F. Is done. The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 80 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. However, since CU3F has been exchanged, it does not have the last transmission serial number of the previous time. In response to this, in the P base 2F, the previous last transmission serial number = 0 transmitted from the exchanged CU 3F and the last final transmission serial number backed up in the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) = n Are compared. As a result, since the two do not match, the game information stored in the P base 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F in order to perform the recovery process. Specifically, the P-base 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including game information storage presence to the CU 3F as having game information to perform recovery processing for the exchanged CU 3F. The recovery information notified to the CU3F by this recovery response includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n, the card ID of the inserted card, the card insertion time, the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m as the previous game table information, and the previous game table information. It is included. The previous game table information includes the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3F transmits a communication start request including a serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. Note that the CU3F performs recovery processing (game balls = 480, added balls total = + 3, subtracted balls total = + 23) using the previous game table information received from the P table 2F, and sets the previous last transmission serial number. Update and back up the data, card ID, and card insertion time. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. Upon receiving a status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3F waits for insertion of a card that was being inserted last time or waits for a store clerk remote control operation (game ball count). When a card is inserted in this state, the CU 3F reads the ID of the inserted card with a card reader / writer. Then, it is determined whether or not the read card ID matches the recovery card ID stored based on the recovery response (the card ID of the previously inserted card). If it is determined that they match, the store clerk waits for a remote control operation to resume the game. If there is a remote control operation, a card insertion notification command including the store code and SC board ID is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. The P unit 2F backs up the store code and SC board ID data received at the time of the previous card insertion before communication interruption to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F, and the backed up data and the CU3F are transmitted. The store code and the SC board ID are compared to determine whether or not they match. If they match, the game can be resumed. Note that the card insertion notification command including the store code and the SC board ID may be transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F without waiting for the remote control operation. If they do not match, error processing such as invalidating the number of game balls in the P platform 2F is performed, for example. Alternatively, an error notification may be made instead of or in addition to this. Further, it may be controlled to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player. When the card that was being inserted last time is not inserted, the state of waiting for the clerk remote control operation (game ball counting) is continued.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal sequence 4 >>
Next, the recovery process for the number of balls to be added when the addition request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break, and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the addition request has not yet reached (the command for addition request from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F has not reached) due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 83, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the status information request command, the P stand 2F is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3F.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F starts operation. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 80 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request to the P platform 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. Here, the last last transmission addition serial number = m is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. The CU3F has a larger value (newer) than the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the backup CU3F compared to the final transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of the P unit 2F (mismatch) Then, it is determined that the previous status information request command has not been reached, and the addition recovery process is performed.

  As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2F.

  The P base 2F performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. At this timing, an addition process that has not been realized due to power-off is realized, and the number of game balls matches on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. Further, the P platform 2F returns a recovery response 2 to the CU 3F indicating that the addition processing is OK (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). The CU3F receiving it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P table 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3F. In addition, the CU 3F transmits a status information request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 5 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of added balls when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the addition response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition response has not yet reached due to power-off or communication line disconnection (the response of the addition response from the P platform 2F to the CU3F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 84, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3F, and the operation of CU3F stops. However, the P stand 2F cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3F is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3F. In order for the P platform 2F to detect the disconnection of the communication line, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3F for one second or longer is required.

  Therefore, in the P stand 2F, without knowing that the operation of the CU 3F is stopped, a command for requesting the status information of the CU 3F is received, the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number. Response of the status information response including = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. However, the response of the status information response returned to the CU3F is not reached to the CU3F because the operation of the CU3F is stopped. The P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3F, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the updated data and the number of game balls = 175.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 80 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time in the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F matches the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F, the CU3F performs the addition recovery. Clear the addition request state without requesting processing. In addition, the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P unit 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The CU3F has a matching card ID and card insertion time, and depends on whether or not the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F matches the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F. In addition, an addition recovery process determination as to whether or not to perform an addition recovery process is performed. In the addition recovery process determination, when the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F matches the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F. Therefore, it is determined that the addition recovery process is not performed, and it is determined that the addition recovery process is performed otherwise.

  When the CU 3F basically determines that the addition recovery process is not performed in the addition recovery process determination, the CU 3F does not transmit the command of the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. However, although the CU 3F determines that the addition recovery process is not performed in the addition recovery process determination, if the recovery request 2 command is erroneously transmitted to the P unit 2F, the recovery process is performed. There is an inconvenience of being changed to a different number of game balls.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the CU 3F transmits the recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F after the determination of the addition recovery process determination, the P unit 2F includes the previous last transmission addition serial number included in the recovery request 2 command. Then, it is determined whether or not the previous last transmission addition serial number stored in the P base 2F matches, and it is determined again whether or not the addition recovery processing is performed.

  Specifically, the CU 3F transmits the command of the recovery request 2 including the serial number = 2, the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1, and the number of additional balls = 125 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F adds the previous final transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 included in the command of the recovery request 2 of the CU3F and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the P unit 2F. It is determined that the recovery process is not performed, and the information of the process NG is notified to the CU3F. Therefore, the P platform 2F transmits a recovery response 2 including a serial number = 2 and a processing result = processing NG to the CU 3F.

  Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal Sequence 6 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the addition response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition response has not yet reached due to power-off or communication line disconnection (the response of the addition response from the P platform 2F to the CU3F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 85, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3F, and the operation of CU3F stops. However, the P stand 2F cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3F is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3F. In order for the P platform 2F to detect the disconnection of the communication line, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3F for one second or longer is required.

  Therefore, the P base 2F receives the CU3F status information request command and processes the addition request without knowing that the operation of the CU3F is stopped. However, for some reason (for example, the number of game balls has reached the upper limit), a situation in which game balls cannot be added occurs. In this case, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50, the game ball addition result = NG and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. However, the response of the status information response returned to the CU3F is not reached to the CU3F because the operation of the CU3F is stopped. In addition, since the game ball addition abnormality has occurred in the P stand 2F, the addition ball from the CU 3F cannot be processed, and the previous last transmission addition serial number = m is not updated.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. In addition, in P stand 2F, it is in the state of game ball addition abnormality. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 80 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time in the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of the P unit 2F does not match the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F, the CU3F performs addition recovery. Request processing. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits the recovery request 2 including the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 and the number of added balls = 125 to the P unit 2F.

  In response to this, the P stand 2F notifies the recovery response 2 that the game ball addition is not processed (game ball addition NG) due to the game ball addition abnormality. The recovery response 2 includes recovery result = processing NG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response 2 including the recovery result = processing NG, the CU 3F clears the game ball addition request state and turns it off, and performs a third check described later. Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  Further, since the CU3F is in the OFF state after the game ball addition request state is cleared, state information including the game ball addition request = OFF and the addition serial number = m + 1 without notifying the P stand 2F again of the addition request. The request is transmitted to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the current number of game balls = 50 without adding if the number of balls to be added = 125 of the recovery request 2 cannot be added to the number of game balls = 50 due to an abnormal addition state. To do. Specifically, the P stand 2F transmits a state information response including the number of game balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. The addition serial number remains “m” without being updated to “m + 1” transmitted in the status information request because the game ball addition result is NG. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3F performs a process of canceling the determined consumption of the stored balls based on the information of the current number of game balls = 50 included in the state information response transmitted from the P stand 2F.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 7 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition request has not been reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the addition request has not yet reached due to power interruption or communication line disconnection (addition request command from CU3F to P stand 2F has not arrived) and the communication counterpart after the restoration is inconsistent The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 86, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, the CU 3F confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the status information request command, the P stand 2F is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3F.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F is replaced and the new P base 2F starts operating. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 80 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request to the P platform 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. Note that the CU 3F performs addition recovery even when the P stand 2F is replaced. In response to this, the P base 2F returns the recovery information backed up inside the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command. However, since the P base 2F is newly exchanged, the previous last transmission addition serial number is not backed up, and the initial value “0” is transmitted to the CU 3F.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3F determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. When the last transmission addition sequence number = 0 of the recovery data of the P unit 2F does not match the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3F being backed up, the CU3F has not received a previous status information request command. It is determined that it has been reached, and addition recovery processing is performed. As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2F.

  The P base 2F performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. Further, the P platform 2F returns a recovery response 2 to the CU 3F indicating that the addition processing is OK (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). The CU3F receiving it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the game table information transmitted from the P table 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3F. In addition, the CU 3F transmits a status information request to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 8 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls when the count response is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the count response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection (the counting response command from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 87, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU 3F. The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the number of balls to the number of balls and sets the number of balls to 100, updates the last transmission count sequence number last time, and backs up the updated data. However, after receiving the status information request command, the P platform 2F stops operating due to power failure. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive a status information request command including a serial number = n + 1, a count serial number = m + 1, and a count response = ON from the CU 3F. That is, in the P base 2F, the count response from the CU 3F has not reached yet.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F starts operation. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 80 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission count serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, in the P base 2F, the last transmission count sequence number of the received recovery request = m + 1, and the last final transmission count sequence number backed up in the P base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) = m + 1. Therefore, it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU3F before the communication disconnection has reached the CU3F. In this case, the P stand 2F executes a process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P stand 2F is updated from the number of game balls = 500 to the number of game balls = 400 at this time. The P platform 2F returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since the CU 3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 400) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3 and number of game balls = 400. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal system 9 >>
Next, a recovery process for the number of balls when the count request is not reached due to power interruption / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power interruption and a communication line disconnection and a count request command from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting request is not reached (the counting request command from the P platform 2F to the CU3F has not reached) due to power-off or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 88, the initial number of balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU 3F. The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  However, before the CU3F receives the status information response command, the power is cut off and the operation stops. In other words, the CU 3F has not yet reached the counting request from the P platform 2F. Thereafter, since the status information request from the CU 3F is not transmitted, the P stand 2F performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. When the CU 3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P unit 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 80 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission counting serial number = m to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, in the P unit 2F, the last transmission count sequence number of the received recovery request = m, and the last final transmission count sequence number backed up in the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) = m + 1. Since they do not match (mismatch), it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU3F before the communication disconnection has not reached the CU3F. In this case, the P stand 2F does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P stand 2F cancels the count request transmitted immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption, and maintains the number of game balls = 500 at this time. The P platform 2F returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since the CU 3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Receiving it, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal Sequence 10 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of counting balls when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication line break and the response of the count response from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not yet reached. In particular, the sequence for explaining the counting process when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption or the communication line disconnection (the counting response command from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F has not reached) and the communication counterparts after the recovery match The figure is shown.

  In FIG. 89, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, the counting serial number m + 1, and the counting request = ON to the CU3F. . The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the last transmission counting sequence number last time, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU3F executes a process of adding the counted number of balls to the number of possessed balls, but some abnormality occurs and the addition process cannot be performed. For this reason, a command for requesting status information including a count sequence number = m and a count response = OFF (because of an abnormal count state) is transmitted from the CU 3F. However, after receiving the status information request command, the P platform 2F has stopped operating due to power failure. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3F. That is, in the P base 2F, the count response from the CU 3F has not reached yet.

  Since the CU 3F cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because the P base 2F is stopped, the CU 3F retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU3F detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2F, and the P base 2F starts operation. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 80 is started. When a counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F, the counting history data stored in the P unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F. . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission counting serial number = m to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, in the P base 2F, the last transmission count sequence number of the received recovery request = m (not updated as “m” due to counting abnormality) and the inside of the P base 2F (specifically payout control) Since the last transmission count serial number backed up by the circuit board 17F) does not coincide with m + 1 (mismatch), the status information response last transmitted from the P unit 2F to the CU3F before the communication interruption reaches the CU3F. It can be judged that it is not. In this case, the P stand 2F does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, turns off the count request state, and decreases the last transmission count sequence number by 1 (−1). At this time, the P stand 2F cancels the count request before the occurrence of the power interruption and maintains the number of game balls = 500. The P platform 2F returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3F based on the received recovery request command.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since the CU 3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. The CU 3F processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2F, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Receiving it, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Addition request error >>
Next, processing for abnormal addition request will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of processing when the game ball addition result is abnormal at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. In particular, there is shown a sequence diagram for explaining the processing when the addition result of game balls at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout is abnormal.

  In FIG. 90, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the possession payout button. Therefore, the CU3F confirms the consumption of the holding balls / storing balls, and sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. Then, the information (addition number of balls = 125 balls) of converting the possession balls / storage balls into game balls is notified. At that time, the CU 3F backs up the data of the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of add balls) = 175, the updated last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in the process of adding game balls on the P platform 2F. Therefore, upon receiving the CU3F status information request command, the P stand 2F sets the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. The P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the game ball addition result = NG and the last transmission addition serial number information.

  The CU3F that received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG receives the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. Resend to the base 2F. The CU3F retransmits the status information request command, but the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 1 to n + 2, and the additional serial number remains m + 1 and the status information request command is retransmitted.

  However, the P stand 2F remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command of the CU 3F, the P stand 2F receives a serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG and an addition serial number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to the CU3F.

  Further, the CU3F that has received the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG again receives the status information request including the serial number = n + 3, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The command is retransmitted for the second time to P platform 2F. Note that the CU3F retransmits the status information request command, but the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 2 to n + 3, and the status information request command is retransmitted while the addition sequence number remains m + 1.

  The P stand 2F still remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F receives the serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG and the addition serial number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to the CU3F.

  CU3F is a process of adding a game ball in the P stand 2F when receiving a response of a response of a state information response including a game ball addition result = NG even if the state information request command is retransmitted twice. As a result, it becomes a state of waiting for addition abnormality recovery.

  After the addition abnormality is restored in the P unit 2F, the CU 3F retransmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + X, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. . In P 2F, since the addition abnormality has been recovered, the addition processing to the game balls is performed and the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the addition of game balls) +125 (the number of additional balls) = 175. The last transmission addition serial number is updated and the data is backed up.

  After the addition process to the game balls is performed, the P stand 2F transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + X, the number of game balls = 175, the addition serial number = m + 1, and the game ball addition result = OK to the CU 3F. In response to this, the CU 3F turns off the addition request state.

<Operation related to addition serial number>
FIG. 91 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P stand 2F and the CU 3F regarding the addition serial number. When a game ball addition request is not generated, a message including a normal serial number and an additional serial number as shown in (1) to (4) of FIG. 91 is transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and an additional serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The P table 2F that has received the electronic message (1) returns the electronic message (2) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received electronic message as shown in (2).

  The CU 3F that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, addition sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. The P table 2F that has received the message (3) returns the message (4) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received message.

  In this way, every time a message is received from the P platform 2F, the CU 3F updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2F does not update the normal serial number. Further, unless an addition request is generated, the addition sequence number is not updated.

  Next, when an addition request (due to a ball lending operation or a withdrawal operation for a storage ball) occurs, a request message of (5) in which one addition serial number is updated is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F (normal serial number n + 2). , Addition serial number m + 1). This request message includes data in which the addition request bit is turned ON. At this stage, the CU 3F has already confirmed the processing for the addition request (card balance withdrawal or savings withdrawal).

  The P base 2F receives the request message (5) and recognizes the addition request based on the fact that one addition serial number has been updated from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current addition request. This determination is performed, for example, by the payout control unit 171F of the P stand 2F. The payout control unit 171F determines whether or not processing for adding game balls is possible on the P stand 2F side. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached a predetermined upper limit value.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (6) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (6) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (5). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (6). The normal serial number is n + 2 included in the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message.

  The CU3F includes an area for backup storage of the added serial number included in the immediately previous transmission message, and an area for backup storage of the normal sequence number included in the reception message. These areas are provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the message (6) compares the addition sequence number stored in the backup with the addition sequence number included in the message (6). As a result, if the stored addition sequence number is the same as the addition sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, when the transmitted addition serial number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  FIG. 91 (5) 'shows a case where the request message has not reached the P table 2F due to noise or other factors. In this case, since the P base 2F waits for a telegram arrival from the CU 3F, no telegram is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The CU 3F waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the request message (5) ', and retransmits the same request message (5) "because there is no response from the P-unit 2F.

<Operation related to counting serial number>
FIG. 92 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2F and the CU 3F relating to the counting sequence number. When no counting request is generated, a message including a normal serial number and a counting serial number as shown in (1) to (3) of FIG. 92 is transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and a counting serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The P table 2F that has received the electronic message (1) returns the electronic message (2) including the same normal serial number n and counting serial number m as the received electronic message, as shown in (2).

  The CU 3F that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, count sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. In this way, every time a message is received from the P platform 2F, the CU 3F updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2F does not update the normal serial number. Further, the counting sequence number is not updated unless a counting request is generated.

  Next, when a counting request (detection of counting operation) occurs, the request message of (4) in which one counting sequence number is updated is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F (normal sequence number n + 1, count sequence number m + 1). ). This request message includes data in which the count request bit is turned ON. Note that the P platform 2F does not execute the counting process at this stage.

  The P table 2F receives the request message (4) and recognizes the counting request based on the fact that the counting sequence number has been updated by one from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current counting request. This determination is performed, for example, by the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F determines whether or not a counting process (addition process for holding balls) is possible. The case where the counting process is not possible is, for example, a case where the process using a holding ball (such as a wagon service) is in progress.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (5) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (5) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (4). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (4). The normal serial number is updated from the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message, and is n + 2.

  The P base 2F has an area for backup storage of the counting sequence number and the normal sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. Such an area is provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the payout control unit 171F of the P stand 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F that has received the message (5) compares and determines the count sequence number stored in the backup and the count sequence number included in the message (5). As a result, if the stored counting sequence number is the same as the counting sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, if the transmitted counting sequence number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (4) 'in FIG. 92 shows a case where the request message does not reach the P table 2F due to noise or other factors. In this case, the CU 3F waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the message (3), and retransmits the same message (3) because there is no response from the P platform 2F. The P base 2F that has received the retransmitted message (3) has the normal sequence number included in the message n + 1, and the normal sequence number is transmitted even though the request message (4) ′ has been transmitted first. Therefore, it is determined that the request message (4) ′ has not arrived. Then, the P platform 2F retransmits the same request message (4) ″ as (4) ′.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request sequence number (additional sequence number, counting sequence number) different from the normal sequence number is included in the message and transmitted. These request serial numbers are added and updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and otherwise, the addition and update are not performed even if a message is transmitted / received.

  In contrast, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is transmitted from the CU 3F regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is updated by both the CU 3F and the P unit 2F). You may act.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party can be determined using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but is the received message an acknowledgment message indicating request acceptance? It cannot be specified whether the message is a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, a request message with an updated request sequence number is transmitted using a request sequence number such as an addition sequence number or a counting sequence number as in this embodiment, and the request sequence number included in the request message as a response to this request message If a message containing the same request serial number is received, depending on the value of the serial number, not only whether the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party, but whether the message returned from the other party is an acceptance message. Can be specified. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. It is possible to identify whether the message is a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

  In this embodiment, the update value for the request sequence number when a request is generated is +1. However, this is an example, and other update values such as +2, +3, -1, and -2 are adopted. May be.

<First to third check processing>
Next, the first check process, the second check process, and the third check process executed by the CU control unit 323F will be described based on FIGS. 93 (a), 93 (b), and 94. FIG.

  First, the first check process will be described with reference to FIG. In step SF (hereinafter simply referred to as SF) 300, it is determined whether or not game table information is stored. This is to determine whether or not the game table information is included in the recovery response transmitted from the P table 2F. In the case of FIGS. 81 and 82, the game table information (specifically, Since the previous game table information) is included, the SF 300 makes a determination of YES. If it is determined that the game table information is not included, the first check process ends.

  If it is determined that game table information is stored, control proceeds to SF 301, and the number of additional balls included in the received game table information (specifically, previous game table information) is a predetermined threshold value. A determination is made whether N1 or greater. This threshold value N1 is the maximum number of game balls to be added during a period (200 ms) between the status information request and the status information response between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F (for example, the maximum addition ball at the time of big hit) The number is set to a value (for example, 125) slightly larger than (number = 120). Therefore, in the normal case, the received number of added balls should be smaller than the threshold value N1. However, when the number of additional balls is larger than the threshold value N1, game table information including the number of additional balls and the number of game balls that have been illegally increased due to fraud etc. being performed on the P unit 2F while offline is a recovery response. May be transmitted to the CU3F. In that case, the control proceeds to SF 304 and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, and control is performed to transmit an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred to the hall server 801F. (In this case, error notification by the hall server 801F may be performed). In addition, instead of or in addition to the hall server 801F, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to SF305, and the CU control unit 323F enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323F stops control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The controller 323F is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 69).

  Even if an abnormality is determined as a result of the check processing of SF301 and SF303, the information stored on the CU3F side is that the cause is that the CU3F or the P stand 2F is replaced with a new one after communication disconnection, and then the communication is restored. And the information transmitted from the P platform 2F during the recovery process may be completely different. Even though it is not such a fraudulent act, it may be determined that there is an abnormality, and for this reason, it is possible to cancel the reset waiting state by operating the remote control by the game hall staff, and intervene by human judgment by the game hall staff. So that they can respond normally.

  On the other hand, if NO is determined by SF301, the control proceeds to SF302, and the number of added balls received from the P units is added to the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323F and the number of subtracted balls is set. An operation for subtracting and calculating R1 as the calculation result is performed. That is, when it is determined that the number of added balls included in the game table information received from the P table 2F is appropriate, the latest number of game balls R1 is calculated using the added number of balls and the number of subtracted balls. It is calculated. Next, in SF303, the calculated R1-absolute value of the received game balls, that is, the difference between R1 and the received game balls is calculated, and whether or not the difference is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N2. Judgment is made. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility of fraudulent behavior as described above, and control proceeds to SF304 and thereafter as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F.

  Next, the second check process will be described with reference to FIG. The number of balls to be added in the game table information (specifically, the current game table information) included in the status information response from the P table 2F returned in response to the status information request immediately after the communication start response is determined in advance. The SF 310 determines whether or not the threshold value N3 is greater than or equal to the threshold value N3. The number of added balls received is the time from when the P unit last transmits a status information response to the CU3F until the P unit loses power or until the P unit detects a communication line disconnection and the game stops. The number of added balls that fluctuated in (5) is such that the amount of change in the number of added balls within a relatively short limited period of time is not so large, but within a certain upper limit. Therefore, a value (for example, 125) slightly larger than the upper limit (for example, 120) is determined as the threshold value N3. When the received number of added balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3, the control proceeds to SF314, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312F, and an error occurs in the hall server 801F. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801F may be performed). In addition, instead of or in addition to the hall server 801F, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to SF315, and the CU control unit 323F enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323F stops control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The controller 323F is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if NO is determined by SF310, the control proceeds to SF311 and the received number of added balls is added to the number of game balls stored in CU control unit 323F and the received number of subtracted balls is subtracted. Thus, an operation for calculating R2 is performed. Note that the “number of game balls stored” here is the number of game balls received from the P stand 2F when NO is determined in SF303, as described above. Then, SF 312 determines whether or not the difference between R2 and the number of game balls received from P stand 2F is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N4. Originally, R2 and the received number of game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N4. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N4, there is a risk of fraudulent behavior as described above, and control proceeds to SF314 and subsequent steps as described above.

  If NO is determined in SF 312, the control proceeds to SF 313, and the CU control unit 323 F stores the number of game balls received from the P stand 2 F as the initial number of game balls, and then performs the second check process. Control ends.

  After the processing of SF 313 is performed, normal status information requests and status information responses are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F uses the SF 313 to set initial values. Using the number of game balls stored as the number of game balls as an initial value, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and transmitted from the P unit 2F based on the current number of game balls It is determined whether or not the difference from the number of game balls coming exceeds a predetermined number of error balls (for example, 5). If it exceeds, an abnormality is determined, and the above-described SF 304, SF 305, SF 314, SF 315 The same control is performed.

  Next, control of the third check process will be described based on FIG. The CU control unit 323F executes the third check process immediately after receiving the recovery response 2 from the P platform 2F (see FIGS. 83, 85, and 86).

  As described above, the recovery request 2 and the recovery response 2 are the game balls in which the P unit 2F complies with the game ball addition request even though the CU 3F outputs a request for adding the number of game balls to the P unit 2F. This is for performing recovery of the number of game balls when the addition process is not performed. Then, the recovery result 2 is sent from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F to notify the processing result as to whether or not the addition recovery processing has been normally performed. The CU control unit 323F uses the SF 320 to determine whether the recovery result is processing NG. If processing NG, that is, addition recovery is not performed normally, control proceeds to SF324, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, and an error has occurred in the hall server 801F. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to that effect (in this case, error notification may be performed by the hall server 801F). In addition, instead of or in addition to the hall server 801F, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control proceeds to SF325, and the CU control unit 323F enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323F stops control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The controller 323F is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the recovery result is processing OK, the control proceeds to SF321, and the CU control unit 323F performs a process of adding the number of added balls transmitted to the P unit 2F to the number of game balls currently stored. . This is because the addition recovery for the number of added balls in the game ball addition request output by the CU3F has been normally performed in the P unit 2F, and the added number of balls is added to the number of game balls and the current normal game ball This is a process for calculating the number.

  Next, the control advances to SF322, and an operation of calculating R3 by adding the added ball number transmitted from the P unit 2F to the added game ball number and subtracting the subtracted ball number is performed. The number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are game table information (specifically, previous game table information) transmitted from the P unit 2F as a recovery response, and the previous game table information is included in the recovery response. When there is no ball, the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are both zero, and as a result, the number of game balls after addition = R3 is calculated.

  Next, SF 323 determines whether or not the difference between the calculated R3 and the number of game balls received by CU3F is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value N2. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility of fraudulent behavior as described above, and the control proceeds to SF324 and subsequent steps as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the CU control unit 323F.

  As described above, the previous gaming machine information is transmitted as gaming machine information first from the P machine 2F to the CU 3F, and then the gaming machine information is transmitted this time, so that both gaming machine information can be distinguished on the CU 3F side. Since it is transmitted, the CU control unit 323F can determine the suitability of each of the game machine information. As a result, for example, the number of game balls in the previous game table information sent from the P table 2F should not be significantly different from the number of game balls stored at the present time by the CU control unit 323F. The game ball number data in the current game table data sent thereafter, for example, should not be very different from the game ball number data in the previous game table information received by the CU3F. If there is a large gap in the difference between these data, it can be determined that the game ball number data is illegally inflated.

  If the total data obtained by adding the previous game machine data and the current game data is collectively transmitted from the P machine 2F to the CU 3F, compared to the case where the previous game machine data and the current game machine data are individually determined. Therefore, it is only possible to roughly discriminate, and accordingly it is difficult to discriminate fraud. In order to prevent such inconvenience, the game table data is transmitted in two stages so that the CU control unit 323F can distinguish between the two types of data, making it possible to perform detailed abnormality determination for each game table data. It is easy to distinguish.

  In the first check process to the third check process described above, after determining whether or not the number of balls to be added is appropriate, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of balls to be added when it is appropriate. The number of game balls is compared with the number of game balls transmitted from the P unit 2F to determine whether or not the number of game balls transmitted is appropriate, but it is simply transmitted from the P unit 2F. The number of game balls may be compared with the number of game balls stored in the CU3F, and the suitability may be determined.

  Further, the CU 3F stores the final number of game balls stored before the recovery process (hereinafter referred to as “CU game ball number”) and the number of game balls in the previous game table information received from the P unit 2F (hereinafter referred to as “P The number of game balls in the latest game table received from the P table 2F (hereinafter referred to as the “P game latest game ball number”) is compared and determined by the three parties. You may make it perform determination. As a specific example of comparison between the three players, the number of CU gaming balls and the number of previous P balls are compared and determined. If correct, the previous number of P balls and the number of latest P balls are compared and determined. To do. Alternatively, the number of CU game balls and the number of previous P game balls are compared and determined, and if they are correct, the number of CU game balls and the latest number of P game balls are compared and determined. Furthermore, the P number of the previous game balls and the P number of the latest game balls are compared and determined first, and if they are correct, the CU game ball number and the P number of previous game balls are compared and determined. The latest number of game balls is compared and determined.

  The first check process to the third check process are preferably executed when the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is not exchanged (replaced). When exchange (replacement) is performed at the time of communication disconnection, the number of game balls on the CU side and the P stand side is generally greatly different in the recovery process. This is because an error is determined as a result of the check process to the third check process. Therefore, when the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is exchanged after the communication is cut off, the first check process to the third check process may be controlled not to be performed in the recovery process when the communication is restored. Specifically, when the difference between the last last transmission sequence number transmitted from the P unit 2F as a recovery response and the last latest transmission sequence number stored in the CU control unit 323F is 2 or more, the CU 3F or the P unit 2F The CU control unit 323F determines that it has been replaced, and controls so that the CU control unit 323F does not perform the first check process to the third check process.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is exchanged, control may be performed so that the previous game stand data and the current play stand data are not checked at the CU 3F side at the time of recovery. In this way, it is possible to prevent annoyance in which a check abnormality determination due to replacement of the CU 3F or the P base 2F occurs.

<Operation related to request serial number>
Next, the serial number update method described in the communication sequence shown in FIGS. 67 to 92 is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this method. For example, a serial number updating method as described below may be applied to the communication sequences shown in FIGS.

<< Update both serial number and requested serial number >>
FIG. 95 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2F and the CU 3F related to the request sequence numbers. One of the A device and the B device shown in FIG. 95 is the P stand 2F, and the other is the CU3F. A device that generates a request to the other party is an A device, and a device that receives a request from the A device is a B device.

  When A device is CU3F and B device is P stand 2F, the request sequence number is an addition sequence number, and the request is a game ball addition request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  When the A device is the P stand 2F and the B device is the CU3F, the request sequence number is a count sequence number, and the request is a game ball count request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  Here, both cases will be conceptualized and described. While there is no request for the B device, the A device transmits a message in which the request serial number m is not updated as shown in (1). However, the normal serial number n is updated every time a message is transmitted. The device B receives this and returns a message as shown in (2). In this message, the normal serial number is updated to n + 1. However, the request sequence number is not updated as m.

  While the request is not generated in the device A, as shown in (1) and (2), both of them transmit a message while updating the normal serial number. During this time, it is determined whether or not the message transmitted immediately before has reached the partner by looking at the normal serial number included in the message received from the partner.

  When a request is generated in the A device, the A device updates the request sequence number to m + 1, and transmits a request message including the updated request sequence number m + 1 to the B device as shown in (3). At this time, the normal serial number is also updated to n + 2. The request message includes data in which the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) is turned ON.

  The B device that has received the request message including the request sequence number m + 1 determines whether or not to accept the request. For example, if it is a counting request, it is determined whether or not the process of adding balls is possible on the CU3F side. Or if it is an addition request | requirement, it will be determined whether the process which adds a game ball in the P stand 2F side is possible. The case where the addition processing of the holding balls is not possible is, for example, the case where the processing using the holding balls (such as a wagon service) is in progress. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached the predetermined upper limit value.

  When accepting the request, as described above in (4), an acknowledgment message with the request serial number updated to m + 2 is transmitted to the A device. On the other hand, when rejecting the request, as described below in (4), a rejection message (also referred to as a rejection message; the same applies hereinafter) that has not been updated with the request sequence number being m + 1 is sent to the A device. Send. The normal serial number is updated to n + 3 in any case.

  The A device includes storage means for storing the request sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. The device A that has received the message (4) compares and determines the request sequence number stored in the storage means and the request sequence number included in the message (4). As a result, if the stored request sequence number is the same as the request sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected. On the other hand, if the value obtained by adding a predetermined number (1 in this example) to the stored request sequence number and the request sequence number included in the transmitted message are the same (m + 2 in this example) (in other words, If the request sequence number that has been transmitted is advanced by one), it is determined that the request has been accepted. If it is determined that the request has been accepted, the request sequence number is further updated by one, and a message including a specific request value (the number of counting balls or the number of additional balls) is transmitted to the B device. On the other hand, when it is determined that the request has been rejected, a message including the received request sequence number is transmitted to the B device.

  FIG. 95 (3) ′ shows a case where the request message (3) does not reach the device B due to noise or other factors. In this case, the device B determines that there is no response when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 200 ms) has elapsed since the transmission of the message (2), and retransmits the message (2). As a result, the message (2) arrives at the A device that transmitted (3) '. Then, although the device A has transmitted the request message of the request sequence number m + 1, the request sequence number of the reply message to this does not correspond to either request acceptance or request rejection (from the request sequence number included in the request message). Since the request serial number is delayed), it is determined that the request message has not arrived. Such a determination can also be made using a normal serial number. That is, the normal sequence number included in the request sequence number is n + 3, whereas the normal sequence number included in the reply message is n + 2, and it can be determined that the request message has not been reached based on such a situation.

  When it is determined that the request message has not arrived, the device A retransmits the request message (3).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request serial number is included in a message and transmitted separately from a normal serial number. The request sequence number is updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and the update is stopped when the request operation ends or when the request is rejected. In other periods, the message is not updated even if a message is transmitted / received.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is exchanged regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is updated only on one of the A device and the B device, The other may perform the operation of returning the serial number received from the other party as it is.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, it is possible to determine whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but the received message is an acceptance message indicating request acceptance. Or a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, when the request sequence number is used as in this embodiment, not only whether the requested request message has arrived at the other party, but also the message returned from the other party is accepted by the request sequence number. It is possible to specify whether it is a message or a rejection message. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. Or a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

<< Update only one of serial number and requested serial number >>
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the operations of the P base 2F and the CU 3F regarding the normal serial number and the requested serial number. This modification differs from the example shown in FIG. 95 in that the normal sequence number is not updated when the requested sequence number is updated.

  That is, in this modified example, when a request is not generated between the normal serial number and the request serial number, only the normal serial number is updated and the message is exchanged. However, when a request occurs, the normal sequence number update is stopped and only the requested sequence number is updated. Thereafter, when a series of processing for the request ends or when a rejection message for the request is transmitted, the update of the request sequence number is stopped, and the update of the normal sequence number is started instead.

  For this reason, in the exchange of messages before the occurrence of the request shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 96, the normal sequence number is updated to n and n + 1, while the request sequence number m is not updated. However, in the request message (3) transmitted when a request is generated, the normal sequence number remains n + 1 and is not updated, while the request sequence number is updated to m + 1. Similarly, neither the acceptance message nor the rejection message (4) for the request message is updated with the normal serial number kept at n + 1.

  Even in this case, the device A that has received the message (4) can determine whether the message is an acceptance message or a rejection message by determining the request sequence number included in the message.

  In addition, as shown in (3) ′, even when the request message does not reach the B device and the message (2) is retransmitted from the B device, the A device receives the request message based on the request sequence number. You can determine that you did not.

  As in this modification, even if the update of the normal sequence number is stopped from when the request occurs until the processing for the request is completed, there is no problem because the request sequence number takes over the function of the normal sequence number during that time. Does not occur. In addition, there is also an effect that processing for updating the normal serial number or collating the normal serial number is unnecessary during that time.

<When recovery information is registered (updated) and deleted (cleared)>
In the abnormal system sequence shown in FIGS. 79 to 89, the sequence for executing the recovery process using the recovery information stored in the P stand 2F or the CU 3F and restoring the system has been described. The recovery information used in this recovery process includes, for example, “last last transmission sequence number”, “previous last transmission addition sequence number”, “previous last transmission count sequence number”, “count required number of balls”, “card ID”, “card insertion” There are “time”, “store code”, “SC board ID”, “game ball information”, “game information”, “game ball number”, “ball unit price”, and the like.

  The timing (trigger) at which these recovery information is newly registered or updated and stored in the P stand 2F or CU 3F differs depending on the information. FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the trigger for recovery information registration (update) and deletion (clear). With reference to FIG. 97, the timing (trigger) of registration or update of each recovery information will be described. The “previous last transmission serial number” is newly registered or updated when the P platform 2F transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3F (when the status information response is transmitted). “Previous last transmission addition serial number” is CU state Bit3 = “1” (at the time of game ball addition request) included in the state information request command transmitted from CU3F, and P unit 2F sends a response of the state information response to CU3F. Is newly registered or updated when it is transmitted (when the status information response is transmitted).

  “Previous Last Transmission Count Sequence Number” and “Count Requested Number of Balls” are those corresponding to Bit 4 = “1” (when counting is requested) of the gaming machine state 1 included in the response of the state information response transmitted by the P machine 2F to the CU 3F. It is newly registered or updated when the response of the status information response is transmitted to the CU 3F (when the status information response is transmitted). The “card ID” and “card insertion time” are newly registered or updated when the P base 2F transmits a card insertion response response to the CU 3F (at the time of card insertion response transmission).

  "Store code" and "SC board ID" are when the P base 2F transmits a card insertion response response to the CU 3F (when the card insertion response is transmitted) or when the P base 2F receives a counting history request command from the CU 3F. Newly registered or updated (when counting history is requested). The “game ball information”, “game information”, “game ball number” and “ball unit price” are newly registered or registered when the P stand 2F transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3F (when the status information response is transmitted). Updated.

  Next, the timing (trigger) of erasing (clearing) each recovery information will be described with reference to FIG. “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number”, “Previous Last Transmission Count Sequence Number”, and “Count Request Number of Balls” are the values when the P base 2F transmits a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F (when the communication start response is transmitted) or Information is erased when an instruction to clear the provided RAM is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction). The “last previous transmission addition serial number” is erased when an instruction to clear the RAM provided on the P base 2F is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction).

  "Card ID" and "Card insertion time" are when the P base 2F transmits a card return response response to the CU 3F (when the card return response is transmitted) or when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2F is made Information is deleted at the time of RAM clear instruction. The “card ID” and “card insertion time” are when the P stand 2F detects a store code mismatch and transmits a communication start response response to the CU 3F (when a communication start response is transmitted when a store mismatch is detected). The information is deleted.

  The “store code” and “SC board ID” are erased when an instruction to clear the RAM provided on the P base 2F is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction). The “game ball information” and “game information” are used when the P base 2F transmits a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F (when the communication start response is transmitted) or when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2F is given. Information is deleted at the time of RAM clear instruction. The “game ball number” and “ball unit price” are deleted when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P stand 2F is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction).

<Encryption key used for communication between key management server and communication control IC>
Next, an encryption key used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining an encryption key used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325aF. First, encryption keys used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325aF mainly include a board shipment key, a board initial key, a board authentication key, a main authentication key, a temporary authentication key, and an effective key (commercial). , Communication key 1 (session key) and communication key 2 (session key). The board shipment key is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, and is used only for encryption of a communication test message before shipment. The board initial key is used for communication of the CU control unit-SC, and is received by the CU control unit 323F at the first communication with the hall server, and is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. Authentication communication (substrate initial key mode) using the substrate initial key is permitted (timed operation) only for a limited period. Here, in the board initial key mode, as described above, it is necessary to communicate normally with the hall server at least once to acquire the board initial key, and thus security is ensured.

  Here, the “limited period” is a limited period of two days, for example. In this way, by enabling timed operation, even if the key cannot be exchanged with the key management server immediately after the system is installed in the hall, the hall will start operating immediately after the system is installed. It becomes possible. In addition, as a limited period, you may set the period defined in one day, for example to every morning from 9:00 to 17:00.

  The above-described board initial key mode has a restriction that enables authentication communication using the board initial key for a limited period of time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of money that can be used ( Card balance or cash) may be limited. Alternatively, when the number of symbol variations in the variable display device reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. Alternatively, when the cumulative number of jackpots reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. In addition, it may be possible to allow only a game by inserting cash and prevent a game using the remaining card amount, or to limit the game to a game using a holding ball.

  The board authentication key is an encryption key that is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC and is received as part of the board security information from the key management server. By performing authentication communication using the board authentication key, the communication mode (board authentication key mode) is switched from the timed operation using the board initial key to the permanent operation (normal operation). This board authentication key is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit and the RAM of the SC.

  For both the timed operation using the board initial key and the permanent operation using the board authentication key, the CU control unit 323F receives the valid key stored in the hall server, and the SC 325bF receives the valid key as the communication control IC 325aF. This is realized by enabling communication between the P platform and the CU.

  This authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, is generated by the SC 325bF from the update information received from the key management server, and is stored in the RAM of the SC 325bF. The communication control IC 325aF is also similar to the SC 325bF. Are generated from the update information and stored in the RAM of the communication control IC 325aF. Note that this authentication key may be acquired from a key management server or the like. Further, the CU control unit 323F and the communication control IC 325aF may generate themselves without receiving update information from a key management server or the like. In addition, the CU control unit 323F and the communication control IC 325aF themselves generate predetermined second data by acquiring predetermined first data from a key management server or the like, and the authentication key is obtained from the first data and the second data. You may make it produce | generate.

  The temporary authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and until the authentication key is generated (or until the set allowable time (for example, two days) elapses), the SC 325bF Used for encryption communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The encrypted communication using the temporary authentication key (temporary authentication key mode) is allowed (timed operation) only for a limited period (for example, 2 days). The SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF store temporary authentication keys in their respective ROMs from the manufacturing stage. The valid key (commercial) is a key that is received by the SC 325bF via the CU control unit 323F and transmitted (set) to the communication control IC 325aF during the initial communication with the hall server. Communication with P devices becomes possible by setting the effective key. The valid key is data for activating the communication control IC 325aF. In other words, the valid key is permission information for permitting communication between the CU and the P platform.

  The communication key 1 (session key) is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, is used for business message communication for anti-game machines, and is created every business day by the SC 325bF using some variable. For example, a counter value (random number) or date / time information may be used as the variable. The communication key 2 (session key) is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and is used for business message communication for gaming machines.

  Note that even if the key described above has a configuration in which the key data is embedded in each part as it is, the information for generating the key data is stored in each part. The key data may be generated by using the key.

  Next, a method for acquiring an encryption key and a method for performing encrypted communication using the acquired encryption key will be described. First, the SC 325bF obtains an effective key via the CU control unit 323F at the first communication with the hall server. The SC 325bF transmits (sets) the acquired effective key to the communication control IC 325aF, thereby enabling communication with the P units. The CU control unit 323F receives the board initial key at the first communication with the hall server, and is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. The SC 325bF performs cryptographic authentication with the CU control unit 323F using the acquired board initial key, and performs cryptographic communication with the CU control unit 323F in a timely manner using the board initial key. Further, the hall server that has received the connection request sent from the CU control unit 323F when the power is turned on returns a unified store code for identifying the game arcade where the hall server is installed to the CU control unit 323F. Specifically, the unified store code is transmitted from the input / output interface of the hall server to the CU control unit 323F according to the control of the CPU of the hall server.

  On the other hand, authentication is performed between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using the board manufacturer code stored as the initial information in both. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325F. A board connection request and a board connection response are exchanged on condition that the authentication using the board manufacturer code is successful (see FIG. 104). The unified store code is included in the board connection request transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF, and the SC 325bF acquires the unified store code by receiving the board connection request.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F requests the board security information from the key management server and receives the board security information transmitted from the key management server via the hall server, so that the board security information is included in the board security information. Get the board authentication key. The CU control unit performs cryptographic authentication with the SC using the acquired board authentication key, and performs cryptographic communication with the SC using the board authentication key. Note that the CU control unit 323F does not change the key from the board initial key to the board authentication key immediately after obtaining the board authentication key, but on the condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state as described later. Change the key.

  The board authentication key may be generated by the CU control unit 323F itself instead of being acquired from the key management server or the like, and the CU control unit 323F acquires the first predetermined data from the key management server or the like. Predetermined second data may be generated, and a board authentication key may be generated from the first data and the second data.

  Next, the SC 325bF performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF using the stored temporary authentication key. Then, the SC decrypts the update information acquired from the key management server by performing cryptographic communication with the CU control unit using the board authentication key, and inquires about the board inquiry number. If the inquiry board inquiry numbers match, the SC generates a main authentication key from the update information, and performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF using the generated main authentication key. The authentication key is not stored in the communication control IC 325aF from the time of shipment, and is generated from the update information as in the SC325bF.

  Next, the SC notifies the CU control unit of the communication key 1 and performs communication with the CU control unit using the communication key 1 so that business message communication with the gaming machine is possible. It becomes. In addition, the SC sets an effective key for the communication control IC, thereby receiving a notification of the communication key 2 from the communication control IC and performing communication with the communication control IC thereafter using the communication key 2. As a result, business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU control unit and the SC>
Next, communication within the CU3F shown in FIG. 65 will be described. In particular, communication between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b of the security board 325F will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b will be described.

  99 and 100 show the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named board connection request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board connection request command requests the SC 325bF to connect to a gaming machine (P unit 2F). A response named “substrate connection response” is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response to the board connection response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of a response to the board connection request.

  A board shipment key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board shipping key request command is for requesting the board shipping key from the SC 325bF. A board shipment key response response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipment key response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipment key.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325F, and is stored in the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. The command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 is for requesting the board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325bF. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board maker code authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board maker code authentication information.

  The board serial ID authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 is a request for the board serial ID authentication to the SC 325bF. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  The board serial ID authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 requests the board 325bF to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board initial key. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the board initial key authentication result.

  A command of the board initial key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The board initial key authentication request 2 command requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board initial key. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the board initial key authentication result.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board authentication key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board authentication key. A response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  The board shipment key authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 1 is for requesting the board 325bF to authenticate the board shipping key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipping key authentication result.

  The board shipment key authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 2 is for requesting the board 325bF to authenticate the board shipping key. A response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipping key authentication result.

  A version information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This version information notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the version of the board authentication key. A version information response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the version information response notifies the CU control unit 323F that the version information has been received.

  A board authentication result notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. A response of the board authentication result response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication result response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  A security board inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This security board inquiry instruction notification command requests security board inquiry information from the SC 325bF. A response of the security board inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323F of the security board inquiry information.

  A security board information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This security board information notification command notifies the security board information to the SC 325bF. A response of the security board information result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board information result notifies the CU control unit 323F that the security board information has been received.

  A counter information request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This counter information request command requests counter information from the SC 325bF. A response of the counter information response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the counter information response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the counter information.

  A communication key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This communication key request command requests the SC325bF for a communication key. A response of the communication key response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the communication key response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the communication key.

  A gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command requests gaming machine chip inquiry information from the SC 325bF. A response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323F of gaming machine chip inquiry information.

A gaming machine chip information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This gaming machine chip information notification command notifies the game result of gaming machine chip information to SC325bF. A response of the gaming machine chip information result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response to the gaming machine chip information result notifies the CU control unit 323F that the gaming machine chip verification result has been received. The notification result included in the response of the gaming machine chip information result is the gaming machine chip information notification result together with the matching result of the main control chip and the matching result of the payout control chip. Therefore, if the gaming machine chip information notification result is “0x00”, the verification result of the main control chip is OK and the checkout result of the payout control chip is also OK, and if it is “0x01”, the verification result of the main control chip is “OK” indicates that the check result of the payout control chip is not acquired, and “0x02” indicates that the check result of the main control chip is not acquired and the check result of the payout control chip is OK, and “0x03” In this case, the verification result of the main control chip is not acquired, and the payout control chip is not acquired. In addition, when the gaming machine chip information notification result is “0x04”, the verification result of the main control chip is OK and the verification result of the payout control chip is NG, and when “0x05”, the verification result of the main control chip is NG indicates that the check result of the payout control chip is OK. When “0x07”, the check result of the main control chip is NG, and the check result of the payout control chip has not been acquired. When “0x08” This indicates that the collation result of the main control chip is not acquired and the collation result of the payout control chip is NG. In this way, the gaming machine chip information notification result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as information that individually represents the verification results of the main control chip and the payout control chip. In this way, since the respective verification results of the main control chip and the payout control chip acquired from the key management server 800F are output as information individually representing, it is easy to determine which control means has not been verified. Can do.

  A substrate state request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board status request command requests the board status to the SC 325bF. A response of the substrate state response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the substrate state response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the substrate state.

<Main sequence in communication between CU control unit and SC>
Next, processing executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323F and processing executed by the security chip (SC) 325b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 101, a process for starting up the CU control unit 323F when the power is turned on and the hall is installed will be described. FIG. 101 shows a sequence when the power supply is first turned on after the CU3F is installed in the amusement hall. In particular, a startup sequence at the time of hall installation using the board initial key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. When the power is first turned on when the CU 3F is installed in the amusement hall, the CU control unit 323F receives the board initial key A and the board initial key A message authentication code (specifically, from the hall server) (from the hall server). For example, a valid key (for commercial / P shipment) such as a MAC key is also acquired. Here, the board initial key A is an encryption key that is downloaded from the hall server and stored in the CU control unit 323F when first communicating with the host device after being delivered to the amusement hall, and is installed in the key management center. This is an encryption key used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF until the board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) stored in the key management server is acquired. The board initial key A is decrypted using the board manufacturer code, while the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board manufacturer code. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method in accordance with an encryption method such as DES (Data Encryption Standard), AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), or IDEA (International Data Encryption Algorithm).

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board initial key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU controllers 323F and SC325bF use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform the board initial key authentication sequence, and authenticate when the board initial key authentication is completed. It becomes. Detailed processing of the board initial key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a security substrate information inquiry sequence, and acquire OK when the security substrate information can be acquired. The security board information is acquired from the key management server of the key management center, and includes a board serial ID, a board authentication key, and the like. Details of the security board information inquiry sequence will be described later. The board authentication key is an encryption key that is downloaded from a key management server installed in the key management center and used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. The key management server stores the board authentication key in association with the board serial number or the like.

  When the security board information can be acquired by the security board information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and exchange communication keys for business message communication.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. In the communication key exchange sequence, the substrate authentication key is used as the encryption key when the substrate information can be acquired in the substrate information acquisition sequence. However, when the substrate information cannot be acquired, the substrate initial key is used as the encryption key for a limited time. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board information request command to the SC 325bF to request the state of the security board and the gaming machine from the SC 325bF. The SC 325bF returns a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation possible to the CU control unit 323F. When the security board cannot be operated, the CU control unit 323F performs processing corresponding to each board state. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the communication key exchange sequence when receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable). That is, when the SC 325bF determines that the communication key has not been generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323F. .

  The CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence when receiving a response of the board state response including the board state = P chip inquiry request (unusable). That is, if the SC 325bF determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number cannot be normally acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state = P chip inquiry request (not operable) is included. The response of the substrate state response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  The CU control unit 323F repeatedly transmits a substrate state request to the SC 325bF when receiving a response of a substrate state response including a substrate state = impossible operation. In other words, when the SC 325bF determines that it is not normal other than the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = inoperable to the CU control unit 323F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. The business message communication with the gaming machine is operated using a communication key (session key). The communication at this time is time-limited communication as described above, and is allowed only for a certain period (for example, 2 days). The communication mode performed through the above processing is the restricted communication mode (substrate initial key mode (substrate initial key operation)). If a certain period of time (for example, 2 days) is exceeded in this timed operation, the temporary operation is stopped and the overage is notified from the SC 325bF to the key management server via the CU control unit 323F and the hall server. The

  Thereafter, the CU 3F makes a recovery request to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F sends a recovery response response (recovery response) including the previous last transmission serial number, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time to the CU 3F. Send back.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the power-on / normal startup processing of the CU control unit 323F will be described. FIG. 102 shows a sequence when the power is normally turned on after the CU3F is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a startup sequence using a board authentication key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. When the power is first turned on when the CU3F is first installed in the amusement hall, the CU control unit 323F receives a board serial ID key, a board from the host device (specifically, from the key management server via the hall server). The MAC key of the authentication key version, the board authentication key A, and the board authentication key A is acquired. The board serial ID key is decrypted using the board initial key, the board initial key A is decrypted using the board serial ID, and the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board serial ID. Is done. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method according to an encryption method such as DES, AES, IDEA or the like.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board authentication key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Detailed processing of the board authentication key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform a security board information inquiry sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key only when the key is updated.

  The SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF when the board authentication key can be authenticated by the board authentication key authentication sequence and there is no key update, or when there is a key update and authentication can be performed by the security board information inquiry sequence. .

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board authentication key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF further acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board information request command to the SC 325bF to request the state of the security board and the gaming machine from the SC 325bF. The SC 325bF returns a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation possible to the CU control unit 323F. When the security board cannot be operated, the CU control unit 323F performs processing corresponding to each board state. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the communication key exchange sequence when receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable). That is, when the SC 325bF determines that the communication key has not been generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323F. .

  The CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence when receiving a response of the board state response including the board state = P chip inquiry request (unusable). That is, if the SC 325bF determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number cannot be normally acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state = P chip inquiry request (not operable) is included. The response of the substrate state response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  The CU control unit 323F repeatedly transmits a substrate state request to the SC 325bF when receiving a response of a substrate state response including a substrate state = impossible operation. In other words, when the SC 325bF determines that it is not normal other than the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = inoperable to the CU control unit 323F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. Communication at this time is a normal communication mode (board authentication key mode (board authentication key operation)) without restriction as in the restricted communication mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, processing for turning on the power of the CU control unit 323F and starting up at the time of factory shipment will be described. FIG. 103 shows a sequence at the time of factory shipment before the CU3F is shipped to the amusement hall, and in particular, a factory shipment start-up sequence using a board shipment key will be described. This sequence is processing in the CU control units 323F and SC325bF that are not connected to the host device at the time of factory shipment.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. The CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board initial key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the substrate manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key as the encryption key and perform the substrate initial key authentication sequence. However, since the CU3F is not yet installed in the amusement hall at the factory shipping stage, the CU control unit 323F cannot obtain the board initial key from the hall server of the amusement hall. The result is NG.

  Thereafter, since the board initial key authentication sequence is authentication NG, the CU controller 323F sends a board shipping key request command to the SC 325bF to request the board shipping key used for the security board 325F test. Send to. After receiving the board shipment key request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF transmits a board shipment key response response including the board shipment key to the CU control unit 323F.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform a substrate shipping key authentication sequence using the substrate shipping key acquired from the SC325bF as an encryption key. Detailed processing of the board shipping key authentication sequence will be described later.

  When the board shipping key can be authenticated by the board shipping key authentication sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board shipment key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F makes a communication test request to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F transmits a communication test response to the CU 3F.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board information request command to the SC 325bF to request the state of the security board and the gaming machine from the SC 325bF. The SC 325bF returns a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation possible to the CU control unit 323F. When the security board cannot be operated, the CU control unit 323F performs processing corresponding to each board state. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the communication key exchange sequence when receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable). That is, when the SC 325bF determines that the communication key has not been generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323F. .

  The CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence when receiving a response of the board state response including the board state = P chip inquiry request (unusable). That is, if the SC 325bF determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number cannot be normally acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state = P chip inquiry request (not operable) is included. The response of the substrate state response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  The CU control unit 323F repeatedly transmits a substrate state request to the SC 325bF when receiving a response of a substrate state response including a substrate state = impossible operation. In other words, when the SC 325bF determines that it is not normal other than the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = inoperable to the CU control unit 323F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF can communicate with the gaming machine only by the communication test message. By performing communication of this communication test message, a communication test at the time of factory shipment is performed. The sequence at the time of the first power-on when the CU3F that has passed the communication test at the time of factory shipment is delivered to the amusement hall is the hall installation start-up sequence described with reference to FIG. The sequence is the normal startup sequence described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, processing of the board manufacturer code authentication sequence will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command for requesting board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325bF. Since the board manufacturer code authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests a challenge code from the SC 325bF.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 generates a challenge code based on the board manufacturer code, and notifies the CU control unit 323F of the generated challenge code as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1.

  Upon receiving the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 command, the CU control unit 323F generates a response code based on the challenge code, and notifies the generated response code to the SC 325bF using the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command. Specifically, the response code is generated by encrypting the challenge code received using the board manufacturer code as a key.

  The SC 325bF that received the command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, if the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board manufacturer code as a key), the challenge code matches. Assume that the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board manufacturer code authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  On the other hand, if the challenge codes do not match, the check result is NG (inappropriate). In that case, the authentication is repeated n times, and SC325bF becomes a no-response state (HALT) in the case of NG continuously n times, and the board authentication key and the main authentication key are cleared. After entering the no-response state (HALT), the SC 325bF does not authenticate with the communication control IC 325aF, and repairs are performed at the factory.

  The CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the CU control unit specific information (unified store code, unit number, current time), and transmits a board connection request command for requesting connection with the gaming machine.

  After receiving the board connection request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF holds the information on the unified store code, the bedtime, and the current time. When the previous unified store code matches, the CU control unit 323F A response of the board connection response notifying that the connection request has been accepted (OK) is returned.

  On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the previous unified store code, a response of the substrate connection response notifying that the connection request is not accepted (NG) is returned to the CU control unit 323F, and the substrate stored in the RAM In addition to clearing the authentication key, a transition is made to a substrate initial key mode (see FIG. 101), which is a mode for proceeding with the substrate initial key as an encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board connection request result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, processing of an authentication sequence for a substrate initial key or a substrate shipping key will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 105, in the state of the substrate initial key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with processing using the substrate initial key as an encryption key, authentication using the substrate initial key is performed in FIG. In the state of the substrate shipping key mode, which is a mode in which processing is advanced using the key as an encryption key, authentication using the substrate shipping key is performed in FIG. Therefore, “/” in FIG. 105 is a symbol representing either one. The CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key for the SC 325bF, calculates an algorithm (for example, an H-MAC algorithm using a hash function) with the MAC key, A board initial key / board shipment key authentication request 1 command requesting authentication information is transmitted. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board initial key / board shipping key as the encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 command decrypts the random number of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key and transmits the H-MAC with the MAC key to the CU control unit 323F. It calculates and returns with the response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the board initial key / board shipping key authentication response 1 command decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and requests the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request to the SC 325bF. Send with command 2. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board initial key or the board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key to the CU control unit 323F. To do. Then, the SC 325bF returns the authentication result as a response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board initial key authentication result and a board shipping key authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, processing of the authentication sequence of the board serial ID and the board authentication key will be described.

  First, the communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF is in the state of the board authentication key mode in which the process proceeds with the board authentication key as an encryption key. The CU control unit 323F authenticates the board serial ID to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting is sent. Since the board serial ID authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests a challenge code from the SC 325bF.

  Upon receiving the board serial ID authentication request 1 command, the SC 325bF generates a challenge code based on the board serial ID, and notifies the CU control unit 323F of the generated challenge code as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication response 1 generates a response code based on the challenge code (specifically, generates a response code by encrypting the challenge code using the board serial ID as a key) The generated response code is notified to SC325bF by the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board serial ID as a key), and the challenge code matches. If the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 2. When the check result is NG, the SC 325bF includes the check result in the authentication result in the board authentication result notification and the board authentication result response to the CU control unit 323F, and notifies the NG. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board serial ID authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a version information notification command to the SC 325bF in order to notify the version information of the board authentication key. Note that the version information notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the version information notification command returns a response of the version information response to notify the CU control unit 323F that the version information of the board authentication key has been received. Note that the response of the version information response is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using a board authentication key as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and issues a command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 for requesting the authentication information to the SC 325bF. Send. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is encrypted with the board authentication key, but may be encrypted using the board initial key or the board shipping key as the encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 decrypts the random number of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and performs the board authentication key authentication with respect to the CU control unit 323F. Reply with response 1 response.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication response 1 decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and transmits it to the SC 325bF with the command of the board authentication key authentication request 2. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the board authentication key authentication request 2 command, the SC 325bF decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC to verify the board authentication key to the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF returns the authentication result as a response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323F.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board authentication result notification command to the SC 325bF in order to notify the board authentication result. The board authentication result notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. The board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result.

  The SC 325bF that has received the board authentication result notification command transmits a board authentication result response command to the CU control unit 323F in order to notify the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result. The board authentication result response command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining a process in the case of inquiring about security board information. With reference to FIG. 107, first, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information for inquiring of the host apparatus. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the board serial number as the encryption key, and the key that cannot be decrypted by the CU control unit 323F and the hall server (hereinafter referred to as the key). The query information is encrypted with a “secret key”. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the security board information, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication process, gaming machine chip information authentication process, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.), and necessary processing is performed when security board information is received.

  Thereafter, when receiving the inquiry result of the security board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the security board information to the SC 325bF. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board information notification command including the board serial ID and the board authentication key, which is the inquiry result, to the SC 325bF. Note that the security board information notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the security board information notification command, the SC 325bF confirms the inquiry number and sends a response of the security board information result to notify the CU control unit 323F that the security board information notification command has been normally received. Send back. The key update information is used at the next reset. The response of the security board information result to be returned does not need to be encrypted. However, in the case of encryption, a board initial key or a board authentication key is used as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, when the reception result is OK, the CU control unit 323F stores the board serial ID key and the board authentication key A and uses them as authentication key information at the next reset. Further, the CU control unit 323F acquires the authentication log information of the board information inquiry and board information notification.

Next, the processing of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described with reference to FIG.
First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command for inquiring gaming machine chip information to the SC 325bF. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted does not have to be encrypted, but when encrypted, a communication key is used as the encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC. After that, the SC 325bF that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command has completed the acquisition of the gaming machine chip information, so the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result including the information of gaming machine chip inquiry result = OK is CU controlled. Reply to part 323F. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip ID, a payout control chip ID, and the like. Note that the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result is that the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted with the secret key, and other information is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After that, when receiving the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result, the CU control unit 323F includes the main control chip number and the payout control chip number in the host device (key management server or hall server: see FIG. 98). Queries gaming machine chip information and waits for a response from the host device. During the gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF execute the processing of the next step (business message processing with the gaming machine) without receiving a response from the host device. Since it takes time (for example, about 2 hours) to inquire about gaming machine chip information, the operation of the gaming machine cannot be stopped during that time, so the next step processing is not performed without a response from the host device. (Business message processing with game machine) is executed. It should be noted that during the gaming machine chip information inquiry, even if a reset operation (for example, operation of a reset button (not shown) or power-on, etc.) is performed, the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification request is not issued again.

  After that, when receiving the matching result of the gaming machine chip information from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the matching result. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip information notification command including a matching result to the SC 325bF. Note that the gaming machine chip verification result notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the gaming machine chip information notification command, the SC 325bF returns a gaming machine chip information result response to notify the CU control unit 323F of the gaming machine manufacturer code and model code when the collation result is OK. Note that the response of the gaming machine chip information result to be returned is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  At the same time, the CU control unit 323F acquires an authentication log such as a gaming machine chip information inquiry and a gaming machine chip information matching result included in the gaming machine chip information result from the SC 325bF.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the processing of the sequence of board authentication key authentication abnormality will be described.
First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board authentication key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Here, when the board authentication key authentication becomes authentication NG, the SC 325bF clears the board authentication key information as an authentication abnormality.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a substrate initial key authentication sequence. At this time, the communication of the board initial key authentication sequence is encrypted using the board initial key as the encryption key.

  When the authentication of this board initial key authentication sequence is authentication OK, the security board information inquiry sequence, communication key exchange sequence, gaming machine chip information inquiry is performed in the same manner as the hall installation start-up sequence shown in FIG. Processing such as a sequence is performed, and business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible. The subsequent communication is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  Note that the SC 325bF notifies the key management server 800F of a “board authentication key update error” alarm indicating that the authentication of the board authentication key sequence is authentication NG.

  Next, FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining processing of a communication line disconnection (PIF) sequence. The communication line disconnection described in FIG. 110 is a case where the communication line between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F via the PIF circuit 326F (see FIG. 66) is disconnected.

  First, the P base 2F and the CU 3F are communicating via the PIF circuit 326F. At this time, the P platform 2F and the CU 3F encrypt information to be communicated using a communication key. Thereafter, communication line disconnection between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F occurs. The CU control unit 323F transmits a status information request command to the SC 325bF. However, since the communication line between the P unit 2F and the CU 3F has been disconnected, a response of the status information response to the status information request is returned from the SC 325bF. Never happen. When communication in which the response of the status information response to the status information request is not returned is continued n times, the CU control unit 323F sends a board status request command requesting the status of the security board 325F and the P board 2F to the SC 325bF. Send. The board status request command to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the board status request command transmits a board status response response including the status information of the security board 325F and the P platform 2F to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the substrate state response to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key. Information included in the response of the board state response includes a board state, an error state, a fraud detection state, installation change information, fraud detection information, and the like. For example, when a communication line disconnection occurs in communication via the PIF circuit 326F, Bit0 = "1" (PIF line disconnection) in the error state included in the response of the board state response. When the store where the CU3F is installed is different, Bit2 = “1” (installation combination change detection) in the fraud detection state included in the response of the board state response. In addition, when connected to the P board 2F connected to the game board development jig or the development unit before connection, Bit3 = "1" (illegal gaming machine) of the fraud detection state included in the response of the board state response. Connection detection).

  As long as the communication line disconnection continues in the communication via the PIF circuit 326F, the transmission of the board status request command and the error status Bit0 = "1" (PIF line disconnection) for the board status request command. ) Is repeated between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  When the communication line between the P stand 2F and the CU 3F via the PIF circuit 326F is restored, the SC 325bF detects the restoration of the communication line, and in response to the transmitted board state request command, Bit 0 = " A response of the substrate state response including information of 0 ”(no PIF line disconnection) is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F connected from the communication control IC 325aF. Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. The detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence is as described above.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board information request command to the SC 325bF to request the state of the security board and the gaming machine from the SC 325bF. The SC 325bF returns a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operation possible to the CU control unit 323F. When the security board cannot be operated, the CU control unit 323F performs processing corresponding to each board state. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the communication key exchange sequence when receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable). That is, when the SC 325bF determines that the communication key has not been generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323F. .

  The CU control unit 323F returns the processing to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence when receiving a response of the board state response including the board state = P chip inquiry request (unusable). That is, if the SC 325bF determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number cannot be normally acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state = P chip inquiry request (not operable) is included. The response of the substrate state response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  The CU control unit 323F repeatedly transmits a substrate state request to the SC 325bF when receiving a response of a substrate state response including a substrate state = impossible operation. In other words, when the SC 325bF determines that it is not normal other than the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = inoperable to the CU control unit 323F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. Communication at this time is a normal communication mode (board authentication key mode (board authentication key operation)) without restriction as in the restricted communication mode.

  Next, FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining processing of an inquiry timeout sequence for security board information.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information for inquiring of the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key and the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the security board information, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication process, gaming machine chip information authentication process, gaming machine Business message processing etc.).

  After that, the CU control unit 323F, when receiving the security board information inquiry result (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, times out the waiting time for the security board information inquiry, A status information request command for requesting information regarding the status of 2F is transmitted. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the state information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325bF returns a status information response response to the CU 3F. At this time, the SC 325bF returns a status information response including “board inquiry present” indicating that the security board information is requested to the key management center.

  In response to the above-mentioned security board inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board status request command to the SC 325bF in order to request information to make an inquiry to the host device. The board status request command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the board status request command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). The response of the response is returned again to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the substrate status response to be returned is encrypted by using the substrate serial number as the encryption key and the substrate initial key or the substrate authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the board status response sends information (the board serial number and the inquiry) of the security board 325F to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Information) and wait for a response from the host device.

  Next, FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining processing of a game machine chip information inquiry (collation) timeout sequence.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information (specifically, gaming machine chip information) for inquiring of the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC, and then the SC 325bF that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command inquires of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to notify the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information), a response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result (authentication OK) is returned to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result transmits the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the gaming machine chip information, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and perform the next step processing (for example, communication control IC authentication processing, security board information authentication processing, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.) and the processing necessary when the gaming machine chip information is received.

  However, after that, the CU control unit 323F determines that the waiting time for the gaming machine chip information inquiry has timed out before receiving the gaming machine chip information inquiry results (main control chip information and payout control chip information) from the host device. The CU 3F transmits a status information request command for requesting information on the status of the P platform 2F. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the status information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325bF returns a status information response response to the CU 3F. At this time, the SC 325bF returns a status information response including “chip information inquiry present” indicating that an inquiry to the key management center for gaming machine chip information is requested.

  In response to the above-mentioned gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to request the SC 325bF to make an inquiry to the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  Upon receiving the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command, the SC 325bF notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to do this, the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323F again. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result transmits the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and continue to wait for a response from the host device.

  Characteristic parts of the sequence between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF described based on FIGS. 101 to 112 will be described below.

  There is a “board initial key authentication sequence” (see FIG. 101) as a sequence executed after the CU3F is received and installed in the amusement hall. This "Board Initial Key Authentication Sequence" is obtained by downloading the board initial key from the host device (hall server) and authenticating using the board initial key when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall. Sequence. On the condition that the authentication result of this board initial key authentication sequence is OK, the “security board information inquiry sequence” is executed using this board initial key (see FIG. 101). The board authentication key is downloaded and stored from the host device (key management server) by this security board information inquiry sequence, and thereafter, various authentication sequences, communication key exchange sequences, etc. are executed using this board authentication key, and the communication key is obtained. Using this, business message communication with the gaming machine is executed (see FIG. 102).

  On the other hand, as a result of executing the security board information inquiry sequence (see FIG. 101) using the board initial key, the board authentication key may not be acquired. This board authentication key is sent to the key management server by the CU manufacturer when the CU manufacturer ships the CU3F to the game hall, and stored in the key management server. The board authentication key stored in advance in the key management server is downloaded and stored, but the transmission of the board authentication key from the CU manufacturer to the key management server may be delayed for some reason. In addition, when the CU3F installed in the amusement hall attempts to download the board authentication key by executing the security board information inquiry sequence, an unexpected situation occurs between the key management server and the CU3F and communication is impossible. May be offline. In such a case, the board authentication key cannot be downloaded.

  If the board authentication key cannot be downloaded and the actual operation such as business message communication with the gaming machine after that cannot be performed at all, operational problems such as a decrease in the operating rate at the amusement hall occur. Therefore, when such an unforeseen situation occurs, control is performed so that the temporary operation of the actual operation can be performed using the board initial key which is a temporary authentication key. Specifically, the communication key exchange sequence is executed using the board initial key acquired from the host device (specifically, the hall server), and the communication key (session key) is generated using the random number and the time data. Then, the communication key (session key) is shared between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF, and the business message communication is performed using the communication key (session key) to perform the actual operation control. The actual operation control using the communication key exchanged using the board initial key is allowed only for a certain period because the board initial key is a temporary key and the board authentication key cannot be obtained. Temporary operation is controlled. Specifically, actual operation control using this board initial key is allowed for only two days, and when the board authentication key cannot be obtained even at the time of power-up on the third day, the subsequent control is stopped, Control is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred and to notify the hall server or hall management computer that an abnormality has occurred. Note that the temporary operation time limit control that is allowed for a certain period (for example, two days) with the board initial key is that the board initial key is stored in the hall server, so that at least the CU control unit 323F is in the hall server. It is allowed in a state where it is guaranteed that it is connected to

  Further, the above-mentioned “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” is executed at the time of factory shipment shown in FIG. When the board initial key authentication sequence is executed at this stage, since the board initial key has not yet been acquired, the result of execution of this board initial key authentication sequence using the board initial key is derived as the NG authentication result. The Then, each sequence after the board shipment key request and the board shipment key response shown in FIG. 105 is executed, and communication between the gaming machine and the communication test message is executed. In other words, it is determined by the “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” whether the substrate initial key has been acquired or not at the time of factory shipment. The sequence is also effectively used to determine whether the initial stage key has been acquired or whether the initial stage key has not been acquired.

<Communication between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F in the P stand 2F will be described in more detail. 65, the communication between the main control board 16F provided on the game board 26F and the payout control board 17F provided on the front frame 5F is the main control provided on the main control board 16F. This is performed between the portion 161F and the payout control portion 171F provided on the front frame 5F. FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram for explaining communication performed between main control unit 161F, payout control unit 171F, and communication control IC.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F illustrated in FIG. 113 will be described below as being configured with one chip, but a similar function may be configured with a plurality of chips. The main control unit 161F includes a main control circuit 161aF, a communication control circuit 161bF, and a main control storage unit 161cF. The main control circuit 161aF performs various processes in the main control unit 161F (for example, a process of counting winning balls based on a signal from the winning sensor 162F or detecting fraud based on a signal from the radio wave sensor 163F). Is a circuit for executing a control program for The communication control circuit 161bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The main control storage unit 161cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, and data to be executed by the main control unit 161F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) of a nonvolatile memory. . Note that since the main control storage unit 161cF includes FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 171F includes a payout control circuit 171aF, a communication control circuit 171bF, and a payout control storage unit 171cF. The payout control circuit 171aF includes a CPU that is an arithmetic processing function. The payout control unit 171F controls various processes (controls the firing motor 18F via the fire control board 31F, and controls the CU3F based on a signal from the counting button 28F. A circuit for executing a control program for requesting conversion from a game ball to a possession ball or the like and a user program stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF. The communication control circuit 171bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and cryptographic communication between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. The payout control storage unit 171cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, data, and the like to be executed by the payout control unit 171F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM that is a nonvolatile memory. Since the payout control storage unit 171cF includes the FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  The payout control unit 171F transmits / receives data to / from the communication control IC 325aF of the CU 3F via the communication control circuit 171bF. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F receives various commands as shown in FIG. 68 from the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F. The payout control unit 171F stores data included in various commands. These data are basically stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF configured by a RAM or the like. However, some of these data are preferably not stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF in which the user program or the like is stored from the viewpoint of security.

  Accordingly, the payout control unit 171F (the payout control circuit 171aF) pays out the data received by the communication control circuit 171bF without storing predetermined data related to security (security related information) in the payout control storage unit 171cF. The data is stored in a predetermined storage area in the control circuit 171aF. That is, the payout control circuit 171aF stores the security related information received by the communication control circuit 171bF in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF without notifying the user program. This user program is not a program predetermined by specifications such as a control program for controlling the basic operation of the CU3F, but a program that can be added at the development stage of the gaming machine. Therefore, security can be improved by not sending predetermined data to a user program that is relatively easy to access from the outside. Further, by not storing predetermined data in the payout control storage unit 171cF accessible from the outside, access to the predetermined data is prohibited and security is improved.

  For example, the security related information includes “count reception time” included in the status information request command, “store code” and “SC board ID” included in the card insertion notification command, and the like. The security-related information is not limited to this, and includes arbitrary predetermined data that is preferably not stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF from the viewpoint of security.

  Then, the payout control circuit 171aF updates or deletes the security related information stored in its own register when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the payout control circuit 171aF indicates that the “counting reception time” stored in the register is Bit4 = “1” in the gaming machine state 1 included in the response of the state information response transmitted from the P machine 2F to the CU3F. The count information is updated when the response of the status information response is transmitted to the CU3F (when the status information response is transmitted). The payout control circuit 171aF indicates the “count reception time” when the P base 2F transmits a communication start response response to the CU 3F (at the time of communication start response transmission) or a RAM (for example, a main control storage unit) provided in the P base 2F 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF, etc.) are erased when an instruction is given (when a RAM clear instruction is issued).

  Also, the payout control circuit 171aF displays the “store code” and “SC board ID” stored in the register when the P base 2F transmits a card insertion response response to the CU 3F (when the card insertion response is transmitted) or the P base When the 2F receives a counting history request command from the CU 3F (when counting history is requested), it is newly registered or updated. The payout control circuit 171aF deletes the “store code” and the “SC board ID” when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P table 2F is given (at the time of RAM clear instruction).

  As described above, the information of “count reception time”, “store code” and “SC board ID” is deleted or updated in the payout control circuit 171aF when the above conditions are satisfied, so that security can be ensured. it can.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 80, the “store code” is used in the counting history sequence when returning from the communication disabled state. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 80, the payout control circuit 171aF sends a count history request command including a serial number = n, a store code and an SC board ID to the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F via the communication control circuit 171bF. Receive from. In the payout control circuit 171aF, a “store code” transmitted from the CU3F by a card insertion notification command and stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF, and a “store code” transmitted from the CU3F by a count history request command. ". As a result of comparing these, the payout control circuit 171aF sets the stored count history 1 and count history 2 data in the response of the count history response so that it can be transmitted to the CU 3F. Then, the communication control circuit 171bF returns a response of the count history response including the serial number = n, the count history 1 and the count history 2 to the CU 3F (communication control IC 325aF). In this way, the communication control circuit 171bF can improve the accuracy of the recovery process by transmitting the past two count histories (count history 1 and count history 2) to the CU 3F (communication control IC 325aF). Note that the plurality of count histories transmitted from the communication control circuit 171bF to the CU 3F are not limited to the past two times, and may be count histories for the past three times or more.

  On the other hand, the payout control circuit 171aF sets the data as “no counting history” in the response of the counting history response transmitted to the CU3F when the “store code” does not match as a result of the comparison. Then, the communication control circuit 171bF returns a response to the counting history response including the serial number = n and no counting history to the CU3F. Here, when the response of the counting history response including the serial number = n and no counting history is returned from the P unit 2F to the CU 3F (when the above-mentioned “store code” does not match), the payout control circuit 171aF Is prohibited.

  That is, when the “store code” stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF matches the “store code” transmitted from the CU 3F with the count history request command, communication is disabled. Although it is possible to return to the previous gaming state using the count history, if they do not match, the communication state is not restored to the previous gaming state.

  In the above description, the case where the payout control circuit 171aF compares the “store code” has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the communication control circuit 171bF refers to the register of the payout control circuit 171aF. The “store code” stored in the register in 171aF may be compared with the “store code” transmitted from the CU 3F using a count history request command. In this case, the communication control circuit 171bF notifies the payout control circuit 171aF of the determination result. In the case of the determination result that the “store code” matches, the payout control circuit 171aF sets the stored data of the count history 1 and the count history 2 in the response of the count history response, and the “store code” matches. In the case of a determination result indicating that no counting is performed, data is set as no counting history in the response of the counting history response. Then, the communication control circuit 171bF returns a response to the counting history response including the set data to the CU3F.

  Further, the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF will be described in detail. FIG. 114 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 161bF for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. First, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171F in the front frame 5F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. Further, the encryption communication function can periodically pass information of the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F and receive information of the payout control unit 171F by setting a communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the payout control unit 171F in the encryption communication control unit 600F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 161bF can set a timeout time for communication response and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the main control circuit 161aF, and encryption communication for performing encryption communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 600F is provided.

  Examples of the registers included in the communication control circuit 161bF include an authentication status register 611F, an authentication interrupt setting register 612F, a transmission data buffer 613F, a transmission data number register 614F, an information transmission clear register 615F, a main control game information register 616F, and a payout control game. An information register 617F, a recovery communication completion register 618F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 611F indicates whether the chip ID of the main control unit 161F has been authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 612F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 613F is a buffer for writing game information to be transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the game information is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Written. Also, by configuring the transmission data buffer 613F with a non-volatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and is written in the buffer that has not been transmitted due to communication failure. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the transmission data buffer 613F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is eliminated. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the transmission data buffer 613F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 613F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 614F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted to the main control unit 161F payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 613F. The information transmission clear register 615F is a register for writing a request to clear data in the transmission data buffer 613F.

  The main control game information register 616F is a register into which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 616F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F and transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control game information register 617F is a register in which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 617F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F.

  The recovery communication completion register 618F is a register in which information indicating whether recovery communication is completed between the main control unit and the payout control unit is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 619F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 600F communicating with the payout control unit 171F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171bF is divided into a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F and a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The communication control circuit 171bF performs communication control on a portion of the configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. A configuration part for performing cryptographic communication with the circuit 171b1F and the communication control IC 325aF will be described below as a communication control circuit 171b2F.

  First, FIG. 115 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b1F for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. First, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the main control unit 161F of the game board 26F and mutual authentication with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. In addition, the encryption communication function can periodically pass the information of the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F and receive the information of the main control unit 161F by setting the communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the main control unit 161F and the communication control IC 325aF in the encryption communication control unit 700F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 171b1F can set a communication response time-out time and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF, and encryption communication for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 700F is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 171b1F include, for example, an authentication status register 711F, an authentication interrupt setting register 712F, a data reception register 713F, a reception data number register 714F, an information reception clear register 715F, a payout control game information register 716F, and a main control game. An information register 717F, a recovery request / completion register 718F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 711F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 712F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The data reception register 713F is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which the game information transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and the buffer is a FIFO (First In, First Out) game. Information is written. In addition, by configuring the data reception register 713F with a nonvolatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the data reception register 713F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is reduced. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the data reception register 713F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the data reception register 713F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The reception data number register 714F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 713F. The information reception clear register 715F is a register in which a request for clearing data in the data reception register 713F is written.

  The payout control game information register 716F is a register into which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 716F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F and transmitted to the main control unit 161F. The main control game information register 717F is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 717F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  The recovery request / completion register 718F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the main control unit and the payout control unit and information indicating whether or not the recovery communication is completed is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 719F is information requesting to clear data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the main control unit 161F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  In addition, the communication control circuit 171b1F includes a communication timeout time setting register 719aF, a communication interval time setting register 719bF, and a main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF.

  After the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F expires, the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF transfers the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F to the data reception register 713F. This register sets the valid time that can be written. By setting the register, writing to the data reception register 713F can be performed even after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired (for example, from 5 seconds to 15 seconds). About seconds). As a result, for example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between the nails of the game area 27F) when authentication is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the floating ball has won a prize. It is possible to securely store and protect the information. Even in the case of a gaming machine having a stage with a long ball residence time, it is assumed that the effective period can be set long so that the information that the floating ball has won can be reliably stored.

  Originally, information cannot be written in the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F from the viewpoint of security after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. However, in the data reception register 713F, for example, it is necessary to write information indicating that the floating ball has won after authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. Therefore, the communication control circuit 171b1F sets an effective time in the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF, and this setting is performed in the encryption communication control unit 700F, whereby the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Information can be written to the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F as long as it is within the valid period even after the authentication between and is terminated. It should be noted that the set value of the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF can be read after this setting is made by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  FIG. 116 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b2F for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. As shown in FIG. 116, the communication control circuit 171b2F performs, for example, an authentication status register 721F, an authentication interrupt setting register 722F, a transmission data buffer 723aF, a data reception register 723bF, and a transmission data number register 724F in order to perform cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. , Received data number register 725F, recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F, recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F, recovery request / completion register 728F, encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729F, communication timeout timer-prescaler setting register 729aF, and communication It has a timeout time setting register 729bF and the like.

  The authentication status register 721F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 722F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 723aF is a buffer for writing a business message to be transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the business message is written to the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is included. The data reception register 723bF is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which a business message transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and a business message is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is written.

  By configuring the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF with non-volatile memory, communication disconnection occurs between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF, and the buffer and register that have not been transmitted due to communication failure are stored in the buffer and register The written business message is retained even after returning. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of a user program to generate a business message written in the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF becomes unnecessary, and the payout control unit It is possible to reduce the processing load of 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Note that since the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are configured by a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 724F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 723aF. The reception data number register 725F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 723bF.

  The recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F is a register in which the number of addition spheres is written when an addition sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power-off recovery. The recovery communication addition ball request register 726F is updated only when the recovery communication is completed. The recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is a register in which the number of subtraction spheres is written when a subtraction sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after the power-off recovery. Note that the recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is also updated only when the recovery communication is completed.

  The recovery request / completion register 728F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the communication control IC and the payout control unit and whether or not the recovery communication is completed are written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 729F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the communication control IC 325aF, and that the data has been deleted ( This is a register in which information indicating "clear completion" is written.

  The payout control unit 171F notifies the user program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF of security-related information among the data received by the data reception register 723bF of the communication control circuit 171b2F in the encryption communication with the communication control IC 325aF. And stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF. That is, since the user program executed in the payout control circuit 171aF is restricted so that the security related information received in the data reception register 723bF cannot be directly accessed, the security related information is stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF. I can't export. The communication control circuit 171b2F has been described with respect to the case where security-related information is received by the data reception register 723bF. However, a separate security-related information reception register that cannot be directly accessed by the user program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF is provided. May be.

  Further, the security-related information received by the data reception register 723bF is stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF, but the configuration of the payout control unit 171F cannot be directly accessed by the user program executed in the payout control circuit 171aF. explained. However, the payout control unit 171F is not limited to this, and does not store the security-related information received by the data reception register 723bF in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF, but only holds it in the data reception register 723bF. A configuration in which a user program executed in the payout control circuit 171aF cannot be directly accessed may be adopted.

<Recovery completion confirmation process>
Next, in the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the main control storage unit 161cF and the payout control memory when returning from a communication disabled state such as a power failure. The recovery process which transmits the predetermined information memorize | stored in the part 171cF is performed. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F perform a recovery completion confirmation process for resuming the generation of predetermined information by executing the user program on the condition that the recovery process ends. Specifically, the recovery completion confirmation process will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 117 is a flowchart for explaining the recovery completion confirmation process.

  First, when the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are turned on in order to recover from an incommunicable state such as a power interruption, the main control circuit 161aF and the payout control circuit 171aF start processing of an authentication sequence. When the authentication is completed, the authentication results are written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, respectively. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F confirm whether or not the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291). When the authentication completion is not written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF291.

  When the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: YES), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F recover in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F. It is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating completion is written (step SF292). If the flag indicating the completion of recovery is not written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF292.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F start the processing of the user program when the recovery completion flag is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: YES). (Step SF293). As means for starting the processing of the user program, for example, a means for transmitting a signal for starting the processing of the user program to start the processing of the user program and a stopping means for stopping the processing of the user program are provided. There are means for starting the processing of the user program by releasing the means.

  As described above, since the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F do not start the processing of the user program until the recovery processing is completed, new information by the processing of the user program before the information to be restored by the recovery processing is determined. Is prevented from being written, the processing of the user program can be resumed appropriately.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the main control unit and the payout control unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described.

  FIG. 118 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named power-on notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This power-on notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F that power is turned on and communication is started. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “power-on reception” to the main control unit 161F. This power-on reception response is a response that the main control unit 161F receives a power-on notification and starts communication.

  Next, a command having a game state notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This gaming state notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F of the gaming state. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “game state response” to the main control unit 161F. This gaming state response is a response that a gaming state notification has been received with respect to the main control unit 161F.

<Main sequence processed between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, a main sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F by processing executed by the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120.

<< Communication sequence >>
First, with reference to FIG. 119, a sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F when the power is turned on will be described. The sequence shown in FIG. 119 is a process executed when communication is resumed after communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is normally completed.

  The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is performed by a polling method using the main control unit 161F as a primary station, and the polling interval is 200 ms. Note that communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is excluded. The payout control unit 171F sets “communication line disconnection” and stops the game when the request command from the main control unit 161F cannot be received even after 1 second has elapsed since the response was transmitted.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit 171F transmits a response command to the main control unit 161F only when normal data is received. If the main control unit 161F does not receive a response command within the polling interval time, it retransmits the command up to three times including the first time. The serial numbers used for transmission and reception are stored in the storage unit for both the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and are used for command normality check, power-off recovery, and communication line disconnection recovery.

  Specifically, the communication sequence will be described. First, when power is turned on, communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is performed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and an authentication new sequence is started. . As described above, the authentication sequence is written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F that the chip IDs of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are authenticated and the communication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is authenticated. . Furthermore, the process which produces | generates the encryption key and decryption key which are used for the encryption communication of the main control part 161F and the payout control part 171F by the said authentication sequence is performed. The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F after the process is performed using the generated encryption key and decryption key.

  Next, after the authentication sequence is completed, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with a serial number “n”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n” without counting up the serial number. Furthermore, the main control unit 161F transmits a game state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with the serial number “n + 1”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n + 1” without counting up the serial number.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 161F counts up the serial number to “n + 2” and transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F. Then, the payout control unit 171F sets “n + 2” without counting up the serial number, and returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F.

  In the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the interval from the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n” to the command transmission of the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1”, the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1” The interval from the command transmission to the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n + 2” is 200 ms each.

<< Sequence after power off >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, a process when the status information request is unreached due to a power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. In FIG. 120, in particular, there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the payout control unit 171F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the gaming state notification is not reached (from the main control unit 161F). FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing when a post-recovery communication partner matches with a payout control unit 171F).

  Referring to FIG. 120, before the power failure occurs during the game, main controller 161F transmits a gaming state notification including serial number = n to payout controller 171F. In response to this, the payout control unit 171F transmits a game state reception including the serial number = n to the main control unit 161F.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the payout control unit 171F during the game, when a game state notification including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F, the payout control unit 171F The game state notification cannot be received because of the state. Thereafter, since the gaming state reception from the payout control unit 171F is not transmitted, the main control unit 161F performs control to stop communication assuming that the power supply is cut off after one second.

  Thereafter, when an authentication sequence is started between the power-on and main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F includes a power source including serial number = 1 and main control serial number (previous last transmission serial number) = n + 1. The insertion notification is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Since the game state reception serial number transmitted to the main control unit 161F before the power interruption occurred is “n”, the payout control unit 171F has a payout control serial number backed up by the payout control unit 171F = n. Therefore, the payout control sequence number = n backed up by the payout control unit 171F does not match the main control sequence number = n + 1 backed up by the main control unit 161F. When the serial numbers do not match, the payout control unit 171F performs recovery processing on the information of the payout control unit 171F based on the recovery game information included in the power-on notification transmitted from the main control unit 161F. Thereafter, the payout control unit 171F transmits power-on reception including the serial number = 1 to the main control unit 161F.

  The main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F performs processing with the contents after the recovery process, and transmits a game state reception including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. Thereafter, similarly, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F transmits the game state reception including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F.

  The above-described recovery process is performed because the serial numbers do not match, but information (for example, the number of game information, prize ball information, etc.) included in the recovery game information is the main control unit 161F and payout control. The recovery processing may be performed even if there is a mismatch with the unit 171F.

<Unauthorized gaming machine connection detection>
Next, a mechanism for detecting unauthorized gaming machines detected by the CU3F will be described. The card unit that can be connected to the P unit 2F is not limited to a card unit that is used for commercial purposes (corresponding to the CU3F described above, hereinafter also simply referred to as CU3F or commercial CU). It may be a game board development jig for developing a board, a development card unit (development CU) used for the development of the P stand 2F, or the like.

  However, it is conceivable to illegally play a game on the P unit 2F by using a card unit that can be connected to the P unit 2F other than the commercial CU. For example, a large number of game balls are lent out to a P board 2F connected to a game board development jig or development CU other than a commercial CU and separated from the game board development jig or development CU, and then the P board 2F. It is conceivable to play a game illegally by connecting a commercial CU.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operation of the commercial CU is detected by detecting whether the P stand 2F connected to the commercial CU has been connected to a game board development jig or development CU other than the commercial CU in the past. Stop. Specifically, a mechanism for detecting whether or not a game board development jig other than a commercial CU or a development CU has been connected in the past will be described with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining a detection mechanism when the P stand 2F connected to the game board development jig is connected to a commercial CU by unit replacement. First, the game board development jig 3EF shown in FIG. 121 includes a CU control unit 323F and a communication control IC 325aF that are the same as a commercial CU, except that it has an SC 325EbF for developing P units. In addition, an identification ID indicating that it is a game board development jig is embedded in SC325EbF for P-unit development. Specifically, the identification ID is an identification code included in the SC board ID, and is stored in the SC325EbF as a part of the SC board ID.

  When the P board 2F is connected to the game board development jig 3EF as shown in FIG. 121, when the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the game board development jig 3EF to the P board 2F as a gaming machine message notification, The identification ID is transmitted from the development SC325EbF to the P platform 2F. The identification ID transmitted to the P platform 2F is stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF. The SC board ID of SC325EbF is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF together with the identification ID. Note that only the identification ID may be backed up in another storage device of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  The SC board ID is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF as described above, but is not notified to the user program 171pF executed by the payout control circuit 171aF. Therefore, the P base 2F cannot read the SC board ID from the payout control circuit 171aF, and the SC board ID cannot be illegally copied, so that the security is high. The SC board ID (including the identification ID) stored in the register of the payout control circuit 171aF can be erased by clearing the RAM of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  Next, processing when the unit is replaced from the game board development jig 3EF to the CU3F will be described. When the P stand 2F connected to the game board development jig 3EF is connected to the CU 3F by unit replacement, a gaming machine message notification is transmitted from the CU 3F in the processing of the authentication sequence after the power is turned on. With this gaming machine message notification, the SC board ID including the identification ID (identification information indicating that it is a commercial CU) is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the P stand 2F. Note that the timing for transmitting the SC board ID to the P stand 2F is not limited to the processing of the authentication sequence. For example, after the unit is replaced with the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is turned on, the player inserts the card. The timing at which the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F as a gaming machine telegram notification may be used. In other words, any timing may be used as long as it can prevent the player from illegally using the number of game balls given by the game board development jig 3EF. In FIG. 121, in order to distinguish the identification ID from the SC 325EbF for developing the P unit and the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF, the identification ID from the SC 325EbF for developing the P unit is illustrated. The identification ID is not shown.

  Upon receiving the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF, the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. It is determined whether or not. Whether or not the P platform 2F is a connecting device other than the commercial CU3F without determining whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. You may just judge. If the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF, the card unit connected in the past without notifying the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF. Is notified only that the game board development jig 3EF, and Bit 6 (connection of game board development jig) in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response is set to “1”.

  Based on the information of Bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response transmitted as a gaming machine message response from the connected P stand 2F, the CU 3F is connected to the game board development jig 3EF. Is detected. Specifically, the SC 325bF reads information on Bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3, and if the information is “1”, it detects that the card unit connected in the past was the game board development jig 3EF. When the SC 325bF detects that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, CU3F can prevent performing an illegal game, without taking in information in game board development jig 3EF connected in the past into CU control part 323F. Further, when the CU 3F detects that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF, the CU 3F may notify by sound or light, or may notify the detection result to the upper server.

  In FIG. 121, the identification ID is written in the user program 171pF in order to express that the information of Bit 6 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 has been written in the user program 171pF. However, as described above, the stored identification ID itself is not notified. In addition, the identification ID is changed from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F in order to easily express the state information response including the information of Bit 6 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. However, the stored identification ID itself is not notified.

  Of course, as described above, when the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF, the flag (in the fraud detection state 3) Instead of writing to the user program 171 pF as Bit 6 (game board development jig connection) = “1”), the information of the identification ID itself of the game board development jig 3EF is written to the user program 171 pF as shown in FIG. It may be complicated. Further, it may be determined whether or not the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF is based on the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF. Also, the information transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F is not a flag (bit 6 (game board development jig connection) = “1” in the fraud detection state 3), but a game board development jig as shown in FIG. Information on the 3EF identification ID itself may be transmitted.

  Further, the P platform 2F stores the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) without determining whether or not it is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. The identification ID may be transmitted to the SC 325bF via the user program 171pF. That is, it may be determined whether the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF or not by the P325 2F instead of the SC board 325bF and detecting the game board development jig connection.

  Also, when replacing the unit from the game board development jig 3EF to another game board development jig 3EF, the information of Bit 6 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 is sent from the connected P table 2F as described in FIG. The response of the status information response including it is transmitted. However, another game board development jig 3EF whose unit has been replaced has the shipped manufacturer code of the game machine development manufacturer code set in SC325EbF for P unit development, so that Bit6 = "6" It may be configured not to detect that the card unit connected in the past was the game board development jig 3EF while ignoring the information of 1 ″. In other words, if the card unit determines that the unit has been changed from the game board development jig 3EF to another game board development jig 3EF based on the shipping manufacturer code set in the SC, it detects an error in connection with the game board development jig. do not do. As a result, in the development process in which the connection between the game board development jig 3EF and the P stand 2F is repeated, processing for detecting an error in connection with the game board development jig is not performed, so that development and maintenance work is facilitated.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining a detection mechanism when the P stand 2F connected to the development CU is connected to the commercial CU by unit replacement. First, the development CU3DF shown in FIG. 122 includes the same CU control unit 323F and communication control IC 325aF as the commercial CU, except that the development CU3DF has a development SC325DbF. In addition, an identification ID indicating that it is a development CU is embedded in the development SC325DbF. Specifically, the identification ID is an identification code included in the SC board ID, and is stored in the SC325DbF as a part of the SC board ID.

  If the P unit 2F is connected to the development CU3DF as shown in FIG. 122, when the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the development CU3DF to the P unit 2F as a gaming machine message notification, the identification ID is received from the development SC325DbF. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F. The identification ID transmitted to the P platform 2F is stored in a register in the payout control circuit 171aF. The SC board ID of SC325DbF is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF together with the identification ID. Note that only the identification ID may be backed up in another storage device of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  Next, processing when the unit is replaced from the development CU3DF to the CU3F will be described. When the P platform 2F connected to the development CU3DF is connected to the CU3F by unit replacement, a gaming machine message notification is transmitted from the CU3F in the processing of the authentication sequence after the power is turned on. With this gaming machine message notification, the SC board ID including the identification ID (identification information indicating that it is a commercial CU) is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the P stand 2F. Note that the timing for transmitting the SC board ID to the P stand 2F is not limited to the processing of the authentication sequence. For example, after the unit is replaced with the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is turned on, the player inserts the card. The timing at which the card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F as a gaming machine telegram notification may be used. In other words, any timing may be used as long as it can prevent the player from illegally using the number of game balls given by the development CU3DF. In FIG. 122, in order to distinguish the identification ID from the development SC 325 DbF from the identification ID from the commercial SC 325 bF, the identification ID from the development SC 325 DbF is illustrated, and the identification ID from the commercial SC 325 bF is illustrated. Not shown.

  Upon receiving the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF, the P base 2F determines whether or not the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the development CU3DF. . The P platform 2F determines whether or not the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF is a connection device other than the commercial CU3F without determining whether the identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF. Just be fine. When the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF, the card unit connected in the past without notifying the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF is for development. Only the fact that it is a CU3DF is notified, and Bit 5 (development CU connection) of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response is set to “1”.

  In CU3F, based on the information of Bit5 of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response transmitted as a gaming machine message response from the connected P stand 2F, the card unit connected in the past was the development CU3DF Detect that. Specifically, the SC 325bF reads the information of Bit5 in the fraud detection state 3, and if the information is “1”, it detects that the card unit connected in the past was the development CU3DF. When the SC 325bF detects that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3DF, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. As a result, the CU3F can prevent an unauthorized game from being performed without taking the information in the development CU3DF connected in the past into the CU control unit 323F. Further, when the CU 3F detects that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3DF, the CU 3F may notify by sound or light, or may notify the detection result to the upper server.

  In FIG. 122, the identification ID is written in the user program 171pF in order to express in an easy-to-understand manner that the information of Bit5 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 has been written in the user program 171pF. However, as described above, the stored identification ID itself is not notified. In addition, the identification ID is changed from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F in order to express in an easy-to-understand manner the state information response response including the information of Bit 5 = "1" in the fraud detection state 3 from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. However, the stored identification ID itself is not notified.

  Of course, as described above, when the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF, the flag included in the response to the status information response (Bit5 (development of fraud detection state 3) Instead of writing in the user program 171 pF as “CU connection for use CU” = “1”), the information of the identification ID of the development CU3DF itself may be written in the user program 171 pF as shown in FIG. Further, based on the identification ID stored in the user program 171pF, it may be determined whether or not it is the development CU3DF identification ID. Also, the information transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU3F is not a flag (bit 5 in the fraud detection state 3 (development CU connection) = “1”), but the identification ID itself of the development CU3DF as shown in FIG. May be transmitted.

  Furthermore, the P stand 2F does not determine whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the development CU3DF or not. A configuration in which the ID is simply transmitted to the SC 325bF via the user program 171pF may be employed. In other words, it may be determined whether the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3DF or not by the P unit 2F, not by the SC 325bF, and detecting the development CU connection.

  Also, when a unit is exchanged from one development CU3DF to another development CU3DF, a response of a status information response including information of Bit 5 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 from the connected P 2F as described in FIG. Will be sent. However, in another development CU3DF whose unit has been replaced, since the shipping manufacturer code of the game device development manufacturer code is set in the development SC325DbF, the transmitted information of Bit5 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 transmitted. May be configured not to detect that the card unit connected in the past was the development CU3DF. In other words, if the card unit determines that the unit has been replaced from the development CU3DF to another development CU3DF based on the shipping manufacturer code set in the SC, the card unit does not detect the development CU connection error. As a result, in the development process in which the connection between the development CU 3DF and the P stand 2F is repeated, a process for detecting an error in the development CU connection is not performed, so that the development and maintenance work is facilitated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is detected whether or not the P stand 2F connected to the CU3F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or development CU3DF other than the CU3F in the past, and the CU control unit Since the communication with the H.323F is stopped and the operation of the CU3F is stopped, it is possible to prevent an illegal game by connecting to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU3DF other than the CU3F in the past. For example, before connecting the P stand 2F to the commercial CU3F, connect it to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU3DF and lend a large number of game balls, and use the game balls lent after connecting to the commercial CU3F. And fraud in playing games can be prevented.

  Next, a case where a gaming machine simulator other than the P stand 2F is connected to a commercial CU3F will be described. FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining a detection mechanism when a gaming machine simulator is connected to a commercial CU3F. Here, the gaming machine simulator is a device for connecting, for example, to inspect whether the commercial CU3F operates normally, and can virtually output signals and information necessary for the inspection to the commercial CU3F. it can. Therefore, in order to prevent unauthorized gaming information from being transmitted by intentionally connecting a gaming machine simulator, a commercial CU3F determines whether it is connected to a gaming machine simulator or connected to the P stand 2F. It is necessary to detect.

  First, the gaming machine simulator 2AF shown in FIG. 123 has a payout control unit 171AF in the same manner as the P stand 2F. The payout control unit 171AF includes a payout control circuit 171AaF and a user program 171ApF executed by the payout control circuit 171AaF. In the user program 171 ApF, an identification ID indicating that it is a gaming machine simulator 2AF is embedded.

  As shown in FIG. 123, when the gaming machine simulator 2AF is connected to a commercial CU3F, the gaming machine message notification command and the gaming machine message response response are communicated between the CU3F and the gaming machine simulator 2AF. For example, the CU3F transmits a state information request command for notifying the gaming machine simulator 2AF of the state of the CU3F. When the gaming machine simulator 2AF receives a status information request command from the CU 3F, the gaming machine simulator 2AF transmits a response of a status information response to notify the CU 3F of game information, a gaming machine state, and the like.

  Information for notifying the CU 3F that it is connected to the gaming machine simulator 2AF is included in the response of the status information response transmitted to the CU 3F. Specifically, the gaming machine simulator 2AF sets Bit 7 (gaming machine simulator connection) of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response = “1” based on the identification ID embedded in the user program 171ApF.

  In CU3F, the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator based on the information of Bit7 in the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response transmitted as a gaming machine message response from the connected gaming machine simulator 2AF. Detect that. Specifically, the SC 325bF reads Bit7 information in the fraud detection state 3, and if the information is “1”, it detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator. When the SC 325bF detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. Thereby, CU3F can prevent performing an illegal game, without taking in the information of connected gaming machine simulator 2AF into CU control part 323F. Further, when the CU3F detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator, the CU3F may notify the user by sound or light, or notify the host server of the detection result.

  Note that the identification ID is given from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to express the state information response including the information of Bit 7 = “1” in the fraud detection state 3 from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU 3F in an easily understandable manner. It is shown as transmitted to CU3F.

  Of course, the information transmitted from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU 3F is not a flag (bit 7 in the fraud detection state 3 (game machine simulator connection) = “1”), but the identification of the gaming machine simulator 2AF as shown in FIG. Information on the ID itself may be transmitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is detected whether the gaming machine connected to the CU3F is the commercial P stand 2F or the gaming machine simulator 2AF, and the communication with the CU control unit 323F is stopped and the CU3F Since the operation is stopped, it is possible to prevent illegal gaming by intentionally connecting the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU 3F. For example, the gaming machine simulator 2AF can count a large number of game balls with respect to the CU 3F, and the waiting ball counted after connecting to the P stand 2F can be rented as a game ball to prevent fraud. .

<Notification processing of operation / non-operation information from pachinko machine>
FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a process of notifying operation / non-operation information from a pachinko machine. P base 2F shown in FIG. 124 is connected to CU 3F, hall server 801F, key management server 800F, and history management center 800AF. Here, the key management server 800F is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (hereinafter also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. The key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F. The machine history management center 800AF associates the information of the front frame 5F with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F, and the semiconductor provided on the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. It includes a history management system that stores information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the chip and manages the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. The security board 325F is connected in parallel to the payout control unit 171F via the PIF circuit 326F which is a parallel interface circuit.

  When the manufacturer (game machine manufacturer) ships the front frame 5F and the game board 26F and installs them in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, as shown in FIG. 124, the game machine installation information (operation information) is obtained from the P stand 2F. ) Is notified to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF includes, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F, and the security of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F. The chip ID and the security chip ID of the opponent when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are combined are included. Note that the security chip ID cannot be changed or deleted after registration in the history management center 800AF.

  On the other hand, shipment information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F shipped by the manufacturer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the shipping information is input to the machine history management center 800AF from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line or the like. The machine history management center 800AF stores the input shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided therein, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is compared with the installed gaming machine information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. As an error notification, for example, an error notification is performed by an error notification lamp or a display 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, Error notification may be performed by the hall management computer or the hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed. The information stored in association with the front chip 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID cannot be changed after the shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. Further, it is desirable that the shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is registered in the machine history management center 800AF one day before installation in the hall.

  Similarly, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed in the hall is removed and stored in the warehouse, the P stand 2F becomes inactive. As shown in FIG. 124, the non-operating information is notified from the P base 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is information that the front chip 5F of the P platform 2F and the security chip ID of the game board 26F that have been installed are not transmitted.

  On the other hand, the history information management center 800AF receives the removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F removed by the hall or warehouse company. Then, the history management center 800AF stores the input information on the removal of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided to each of them, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is checked against the inactive information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

  In addition, when the second-hand dealer resells the game board 26F to another hall and installs it in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, as shown in FIG. 124, the game machine installation information (operation information) is obtained from the P stand 2F. The history management center 800AF is notified. Specifically, in the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F, the security chip ID of the combined front frame 5F, etc. It is included.

  On the other hand, movement information (resale information) of the game board 26F resold by the secondhand dealer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF stores the input movement information of the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in the game board 26F, and is notified from the stored information and the P base 2F. Check against game machine installation information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

  Furthermore, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed by the disposal contractor are discarded, the P stand 2F is in a non-operating state. Thus, the non-operating information is notified from the P base 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is the security chip of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) of the installed P stand 2F. This is information due to the fact that the ID is not transmitted.

  On the other hand, removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) discarded by the discarder is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Then, the history management center 800AF stores the input information on the removal of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided to each of them, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is checked against the inactive information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

<Management of gaming machines>
Next, a system for managing the history of gaming machines from shipment to disposal will be described. FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the flow of history information (machine history information) from shipment to disposal of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the target of the gaming machine that manages the history is not limited to the above-described enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P 2F), and includes a conventional CR gaming machine. Of course, the target gaming machine includes not only pachinko gaming machines but also S machines (slot machines) 2SF corresponding to P machines 2F described later, conventional pachislot machines, and the like.

  Referring to FIG. 125, when a gaming machine is shipped from a gaming machine manufacturer to Hall A, the gaming machine manufacturer's server (not shown) sends shipping information about the shipped gaming machine to a communication line. The information is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the input shipping information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing details of a flow until shipping information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 126, when ordering a gaming machine from a gaming machine maker, Hall A sends a sales contract to the gaming machine maker. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives the sales contract sent from Hall A, it confirms the order of the gaming machine according to the sales contract. When the gaming machine manufacturer confirms the order, it sends a copy of the warranty card and the certification notice to Hall A and starts production of the gaming machine. The gaming machine manufacturer ships the produced gaming machine to Hall A from the gaming machine manufacturer (delivered to Hall A). In addition, after a gaming machine to be shipped to Hall A is delivered to a carrier, the gaming machine manufacturer's server inputs shipping information regarding the gaming machine to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line. When the history management center 800AF receives the input of the shipping information, it registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of the shipping information. Specifically, FIG. 127A is a diagram showing items registered as shipping information. FIG. 127B is a diagram showing registration classifications included in the registration type.

  Referring to FIG. 127 (a), the shipping information includes registration type, game board production number, main board management number, main control chip ID number (main chip ID), main control product code, and gaming machine. It includes a frame manufacturing number, a payout board management number, a payout control chip ID number (payout chip ID), a payout control product code, a shipping date, a company code, a hall code, and a cancellation flag.

  The registration type indicates whether the gaming machine to be shipped is a conventional CR gaming machine, an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P stand 2F), a gaming board with a replaced part, or a gaming machine frame. This is information to specify. Specifically, in FIG. 127 (b), when the registration type number is “11” to “14”, the gaming machine to be shipped is a CR gaming machine, and when “21” to “25”. Indicates that the gaming machine to be shipped is P 2F. Furthermore, the registration type numbers “11” to “14” indicate that the game board, the gaming machine frame, the gaming board + the gaming machine frame, and the gaming board (parts replacement) are replaced. Also, the registration type numbers “21” to “25” indicate that they are replaced gaming boards, gaming machine frames, gaming boards + gaming machine frames, gaming board parts, gaming machine frame parts, respectively. When replacing the board of the game board or the board of the gaming machine frame, the board management number after replacement is set and registered when the base is replaced. In addition, replacement of parts in which the production numbers of the game board and the gaming machine frame are changed is registered as a new shipment. Note that the name of the gaming machine manufacturer and the model name of the gaming machine are specified by the registration type.

The game board production number and main board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code.
The main control chip ID number is information read by an ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P unit 2F (setting is not necessary in the conventional CR gaming machine). The main control product code is the product code of the main control chip (setting is not necessary in the conventional CR gaming machine).

  The gaming machine frame manufacturing number and the payout board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code. Note that the payout board management number does not need to be set in a conventional CR gaming machine.

  The payout control chip ID number is information read by an ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P unit 2F (setting is not necessary in the CR gaming machine). The payout control product code is a product code written in the payout control chip (setting is not necessary in the CR gaming machine).

  The shipment date is the date when the gaming machine is shipped, and is the date when shipment is confirmed. The business operator code is information for specifying the name of the carrier. The hole code is information for identifying the hall name of the delivery destination. The cancellation flag is set to “0” when shipping information is registered, and “1” when canceling registered shipping information. When the gaming machine manufacturer has registered incorrect shipping information in the machine history management center 800AF, the gaming machine manufacturer sets a cancellation flag for the incorrect shipping information to “1” and registers it again in the machine history management center 800AF.

  When the history management center 800AF receives the shipping information with the cancellation flag set to “1”, the history management center 800AF cancels the registration of the shipping information with the same content as the received shipping information and the cancellation flag set to “0”. That is, the shipping information having the same content as the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” is deleted from the storage area of the history management center 800AF. Therefore, the history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (ON state).

  Further, the machine history management center 800AF can accept the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” until a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the shipping information having the same contents as the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” cannot be registered in the history management center 800AF.

  Here, examples of the predetermined condition include time and period. Therefore, the machine history management center 800AF can be set to accept the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” until 8:00 pm on the day when the shipping information to be canceled is registered. Therefore, the history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (ON state), and after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, after 8:00 pm on the registration date) ) Can be prevented from tampering with shipping information.

  If the gaming machine is an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P 2F), the main control chip ID number or the payout control chip ID number serves as identification information for identifying the individual gaming machine, and the gaming machine has a conventional CR In the case of a gaming machine, at least one number of a gaming board manufacturing number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame manufacturing number, and a payout board management number is identification information for identifying an individual gaming machine.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), the shipping information is made the same format regardless of whether the gaming machine is an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P 2F) or a conventional CR gaming machine. In the management center 800AF, the history of the enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F) and the conventional CR gaming machine can be managed in a unified manner.

  Referring to FIG. 125 again, when a gaming machine is delivered to hall A from a gaming machine manufacturer and the gaming machine is installed in hall A, a server (not shown) in hall A is connected via a communication line. Installation information regarding the installed gaming machine is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF associates the input installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping and registers them in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing details of the flow until installation information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 128 (a) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer (not shown) installed in the hall A and the history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. . In FIG. 128 (a), the conventional CR gaming machine is mainly used, and the conventional CR gaming machine is installed in Hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line. The case is assumed.

  FIG. 128 (b) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 128 (b), this is mainly the case of the enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F), and the P stand 2F is installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line. Is assumed.

  Referring to FIG. 128 (a), when a gaming machine is delivered from hall A to hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery form is sent from hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a copy of the gaming machine delivery form, the gaming machine installation information is input from the gaming machine manufacturer to the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line, and the input installation information is stored in the storage area of the server. be registered. When installation information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF, the registration result is output via a communication line or as a document. In Hall A, when a jurisdiction implementation inspection is conducted and a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined location in Hall A.

  Referring to FIG. 128 (b), when a gaming machine is delivered from hall A to hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery form is sent from hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. Thereafter, in Hall A, a jurisdiction implementation inspection is performed, and when a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined location in Hall A. Since the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be connectable via a communication line, when the gaming machine installed in the hall A is turned on, the history is automatically transferred from the hall computer. Installation information is transmitted to the management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF associates the received installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping and registers them in the storage area.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the installation information input to the history management center 800AF in FIG. 128 (a). Referring to FIG. 129, the installation information includes a registration type, a game board production number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame production number, an installation date, a hall code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame production number, hole code, and cancellation flag are the same as those described in FIG. 127, detailed description thereof will not be repeated. .

  As described above, in the case of FIG. 128 (a), it is assumed that a conventional CR gaming machine is mainly installed in Hall A, so the registration type numbers are “11” to “14”. Become. The installation date is, for example, the planned opening date of the warranty card.

  From the above, in the case of FIG. 128 (a), the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, model name, gaming board production number, main board management number, as installation information input from the gaming machine manufacturer. A game frame serial number, installation date, and installation hall name are registered.

  In the case of FIG. 128 (b), the machine history management center 800AF has, as installation information automatically transmitted from the hall computer, a gaming machine manufacturer name, model name, installation date, installation destination hall name, The main control chip ID and the payout control ID are registered. The history management center 800AF may receive the above-mentioned part of information as installation information, and register information that is common with the shipping information with reference to the shipping information.

  Referring to FIG. 125 again, when the gaming machine installed in hall A is removed, the removal information from hall A is written in a document or the like, and the document is sent to history management center 800AF. Based on the removal information sent to the machine history management center 800AF, the removal information is registered in the storage area of the server by inputting necessary information from the input means (terminal not shown) of the machine history management center 800AF. If the document is not sent to the machine history management center 800AF, it is determined that the gaming machine has been removed from the hall A when second-hand movement information or disposal information described later is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. The removal information may be registered.

  FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a flow until removal information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 130A is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer installed in the hall A and the history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. In FIG. 130 (a), it is assumed that a conventional CR gaming machine is mainly installed in Hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line.

  FIG. 130B is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 130 (b), it is assumed that the P unit 2F is mainly installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line.

  Referring to FIG. 130 (a), when the gaming machine installed in Hall A is removed, the gaming machine is removed based on the issued change approval application. When the gaming machine is removed, a document including removal information is sent from the hall A to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the removal information in the storage area based on the sent document.

  Referring to FIG. 130B, since the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be able to communicate with each other, the history management center 800AF is based on the installation information registered in the storage area. If a certain period of time (for example, one month) has passed and no communication with the gaming machine that should have been installed in Hall A, it is determined that the gaming machine has not been operated and has been removed. Then, the removal information is registered in the storage area. Similarly to FIG. 130A, the history management center 800AF may register the removal information in the storage area based on the document sent from the hall A.

  When a conventional CR gaming machine is to be removed, the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, a game board production number, a main board management number, a game frame production number, a removal date, and removal as removal information. The hall name is registered. In addition, when the P stand 2F is removed, in the machine history management center 800AF, a removal control board management number is further registered as removal information in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine. Is done.

  Referring to FIG. 125 again, when the gaming machine removed from Hall A is received in the seller's warehouse and the received gaming machine is delivered to another Hall B, the seller will enter the application documents. The used movement information is entered and sent to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF registers second-hand movement information in the server from the input means of the machine history management center 800AF based on the sent application documents. When the history management center 800AF and the management computer owned by the dealer are configured to be communicable, the management computer inputs the used movement information to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. Also good.

  When the gaming machine delivered from the dealer is delivered to another hall B and the gaming machine is installed in another hall B, the installation is performed in the other hall B as shown in FIG. Information is registered in the server of the machine history management center 800AF. Also, when the gaming machine installed in Hall B is removed, the removal information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF in the flow described with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the gaming machine removed from Hall A is collected by the processing company and the collected gaming machine is discarded, the disposal information is entered in the application document from the processing company, and the document is recorded. It is sent to the management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the discard information in the storage area by inputting necessary information from the input means in the own device. When the history management center 800AF and the management computer of the processing company are configured to be communicable, the management computer can input the discard information to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. Good.

  Further, when the gaming machine traded in from the hall A by the gaming machine maker is discarded, the hall computer inputs the discard information regarding the gaming machine to be discarded via the communication line to the history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the input discard information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a flow until discard information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 131, when a gaming machine manufacturer notifies hall A of acceptance of trade-in of a gaming machine, the gaming machine is delivered from hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. When a gaming machine maker collects and stores the gaming machine and then discards it, it requests the disposal company (disposal company) to dispose of it. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a notification from the processing company that the disposal of the gaming machine has been completed (processing details, etc.), the gaming machine manufacturer's server sends the disposal information about the gaming machine via the communication line. Input to the management center 800AF. When the history management center 800AF receives the input of the discard information, it registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the discard information input to the machine history management center 800AF.

  Referring to FIG. 132, the discard information includes registration type, discard date, game board manufacturer code, game board manufacture number, main board management number, gaming machine frame manufacturer code, and gaming machine. It includes a frame manufacturing number, a payout board management number, a company code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame production number, and cancellation flag are the same as the contents described in FIG. 127, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  The discard date is the date when the gaming machine is discarded. The game board manufacturer code is information for identifying the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactured the game board. The gaming machine frame manufacturer code is information for identifying the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactured the gaming machine frame. The business operator code is information for identifying the business operator that has performed the disposal process. Typically, it is the operator code of the processing company (disposal company), but when it is discarded by the gaming machine manufacturer, it becomes the operator code of the gaming machine manufacturer.

  When a conventional CR gaming machine is discarded, the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, a gaming board production number, a main board management number, a gaming frame production number, a disposal date, and processing as disposal information. The trader name is registered. In addition, when the P unit 2F is discarded, in the machine history management center 800AF, in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine, a payout control board management number is further registered as discard information. Is done.

<Management of front frame and game board>
In the machine history management center described above, the configuration for managing the history of the gaming machine (P machine 2F) has been described. However, since the P machine 2F is formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, the front frame 5F and the game It is also possible to manage the history separately for the board 26F. Therefore, machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be described below.

  FIG. 133 is a schematic diagram for explaining history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F according to the present embodiment. The history record management center 800AF shown in FIG. 133 associates information on the front frame 5F with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F, and the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. The information of the game board 26F is stored in the table shown in FIG. 134 in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in FIG. 134, and the history of the front frame 5F and game board 26F is managed. The history management center 800AF includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 8001F as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 8002F that stores operation programs and control data of the CPU 8001F, and a RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU 8001F. A (Random Access Memory) 8003F, an I / O port (Input / Output Port) 8004F, and a mass storage device 8005F such as an HDD (Hard Disk Drive) are provided.

  FIG. 134 is a schematic diagram of a table that stores information on the front frame 5F and information on the game board 26F in order to manage the machine history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. In the table shown in FIG. 134, a payout-side table (FIG. 134 (a)) that stores information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the payout control board 17F, and a security chip ID of the main control board 16F. A main control side table (FIG. 134 (b)) for storing information on the game board 26F is included.

  Hereinafter, the machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. FIG. First, at the time of shipment and installation, (1) the semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F manufactures the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and ships it to the frame manufacturer 191F, which is the manufacturer of the front frame 5F. (2) The semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F manufactures the main control semiconductor chip 16aF and ships it to the game board manufacturer 192F, which is the manufacturer of the game board 26F. The payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and the main control semiconductor chip 16aF are not limited to the case where they are manufactured by the same semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F, and may be manufactured by different semiconductor chip manufacturers 190F.

  (3-1) The semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F notifies the history management center 800AF of the payout control security chip ID of the manufactured payout control semiconductor chip 17aF, and inputs the payout control security chip ID into the payout side table. Update the payout table. Similarly, (3-2) the semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the main control security chip ID of the manufactured main control semiconductor chip 16aF, and the main control side security chip ID is sent to the main control side table. To update the main control table.

  (4) The frame maker 191F incorporates the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF into the front frame 5F to manufacture the front frame 5F. Further, the frame maker 191F ships and installs the manufactured front frame 5F to the hall 193F. (5) The frame maker 191F notifies the history management center 800AF of information specifying the front frame 5F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to be stored in association with the payout control security chip ID. As information for specifying the front frame 5F, as shown in FIG. 134 (a), the front frame manufacturing number, the delivery board management number, the product code for delivery control, the carrier code, the hall code, the shipping date, and the installation Date and time are included. Further, the information specifying the front frame 5F may include a frame format name, a product code, and a manufacturer code.

  (6) The game board maker 192F incorporates the main control semiconductor chip 16aF into the game board 26F to manufacture the game board 26F. Further, the game board maker 192F ships the manufactured game board 26F to the hall 193F and installs the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in combination. (7) The game board maker 192F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of information specifying the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. To do. As information specifying the game board 26F, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), the model name of the gaming machine, product code, manufacturer code, game board production number, main control board management number, product code for main control , Carrier code, hall code, shipping date, and installation date and time.

  (8) The hall 193F operates the P stand 2F formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P base 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the payout control security chip ID and the main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P machine 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P machine 2F, and transmits the necessary secret key to the P machine 2F. (9) The key management server 800F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the gaming machine installation information, and pays out so as to store a pair (combined) main control security chip ID in association with the payout control security chip ID. The side table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store a pair (combined) payout control security chip ID in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF includes the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F, the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the semiconductor chip maker 190F, the frame maker 191F, and the game board maker 192F. Is matched.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the status of the front frame 5F in which information such as the shipping date (information (3-1) and (5) shown in FIG. 134 (a)) included in the payout table is updated. (Status) is “Shipment”, and the management state of the front frame 5F in which the information of the main control security chip ID of the pair included in the payout side table (information (9) shown in FIG. 134A) is updated ( (Status) is determined as “installation”. Note that the management state (status) of the front frame 5F may be stored in the payout side table or in another storage area. In the case of initial failure after shipment registration, re-shipment is not performed.

  Similarly, the machine history management center 800AF uses the game board 26F in which information such as the shipping date (information (3-2) and (7) shown in FIG. 134 (b)) included in the main control table is updated. The game board 26F in which the management state (status) is “shipment” and the payout control security chip ID information (information (9) shown in FIG. 134 (b)) included in the main control table is updated. The management state (status) is determined as “installation”. Note that the management state (status) of the game board 26F may be stored in the main control side table or in another storage area. In the case of initial failure after shipment registration, re-shipment is not performed.

  Next, at the time of storage, (10) When the hole 193F is replaced with a new front frame 5F and game board 26F, the installed front frame 5F and game board 26F are removed and stored in the warehouse. (11) The warehouse operator 194F notifies the history management center 800AF of the storage information of the front frame 5F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the warehouse trader 194F notifies the history management center 800AF of the storage information of the game board 26F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 134, the storage information of the front frame 5F and the gaming board 26F includes a gaming machine manufacturer, an installation source hall, a removal date, a storage date, and a storage location.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed from the hall 193F, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that non-operating information has been transmitted to the key management server 800F from the removed front frame 5F and game board 26F. The non-operating information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the warehouse operator 194F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as storage dates (information (11) shown in FIG. 134) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. (Status) is determined as “Storage”. When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed, it is not always necessary to remove the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and removed. In this case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (11) (see FIG. 134) of either the payout side table or the main control side table.

  Next, at the time of resale, (12) the hall 193F requests the second trader 195F to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored by the warehouse trader 194F. The used trader 195F resells the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F to another hall and installs them in the hall. (13) The used trader 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the resale information on the resold front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. In addition, the used trader 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the resale information of the resold game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to store it in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 134, the resale information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes an installation source hall, a removal date, an installation date, and a sales company name.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are resold, they are installed in different halls, and the P frame 2F is operated by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P base 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the payout control security chip ID and the main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P machine 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P machine 2F, and transmits the necessary secret key to the P machine 2F. Further, the key management server 800F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the gaming machine installation information, and stores the pair (combined) main control security chip ID in association with the payout control security chip ID. The table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store a pair (combined) payout control security chip ID in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF collates the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the second-hand trader 195F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. Further, the machine history management center 800AF manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as sales company names (information (13) shown in FIG. 134) included in the payout side table and the main control sales table is updated. (Status) is determined to be “resale”, and the front frame 5F and the game in which the information of the pair security chip ID (information (9) shown in FIG. 134) included in the payout side table and the main control side table are updated The management state (status) of the panel 26F is determined as “installation”. When reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not always necessary to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be resold. In that case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (13) (see FIG. 134) of either the payout side table or the main control side table. Further, when reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not necessarily limited to reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse, but the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall. May be resold. In addition, we do not re-ship at the time of resale.

  Next, at the time of disposal, (14) the hole 193F requests the disposal company 196F to discard the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F. The discard trader 196F discards the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F by an appropriate method. (15) The discarder 196F notifies the history management center 800AF of the discard information of the discarded front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the discarder 196F notifies the history management center 800AF of the discard information of the discarded game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. The discard information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes an installation source hall, a take-off date, and a discard date as shown in FIG.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that the non-operation information is transmitted from the discarded front frame 5F and the game board 26F to the key management server 800F. The non-operating information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the discarder 196F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the discard date (information (15) shown in FIG. 134) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. (Status) is determined to be “Discard”. When discarding the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not always necessary to discard the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and discarded. In this case, the machine history management center 800AF updates only the information (15) (see FIG. 134) of either the payout side table or the main control side table. Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F are not necessarily limited to the case where the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse are discarded. 26F may be discarded.

<Abnormality judgment of machine history management center>
If the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal as a result of comparing the gaming machine installation information and the non-operating information with the updated information as described above, the machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 135 is a flowchart for explaining abnormality determination processing for management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F by the machine history management center 800AF. 136 is a view for explaining a table referred to in the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, the machine history management center 800AF determines the management state (status) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on information included in the payout side table and the main control side table (SF211). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF includes the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the disposal date (information (15) shown in FIG. 134) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. The management state (status) is determined as “discard”.

  Next, the history management center 800AF checks whether or not the transition from the previously determined management state to the currently determined management state is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212). As shown in FIG. 136A, the transition prohibition table indicates a management state in which transition is prohibited from the management state determined last time. Specifically, when the frame maker 191F manufactures and ships the front frame 5F, the front frame 5F is not discarded or resold. Therefore, in the transition prohibition table, the management state changes from “shipment” to “discard”. Transition to “resale” is prohibited. In addition, since the front frame 5F once installed, stored and resold is not shipped from the frame maker 191F, in the transition prohibition table, the management status is “installed”, “storage” and “resale” to “shipment”. ”Is prohibited. Further, since the discarded front frame 5F is not shipped, installed, stored, and resold, the management status is changed from “discarded” to “shipped”, “installed”, “stored”, and “resolded” in the transition prohibition table. ”Is prohibited. In the above-described transition prohibition table, the front frame 5F has been described as an example, but the same applies to the game board 26F.

  Next, when the change to the management state determined this time is not included in the transition prohibition table (SF212: N), the machine history management center 800AF, based on the information from the key management server 800F, the front frame 5F and the game board The operating state of 26F is determined (SF213). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF determines that the gaming machine installation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F, and determines that the machine is operating, and when the non-operation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F (gaming machine installation information). Is not transmitted), it is determined as a non-operating state.

  Next, the machine history management center 800AF checks whether or not the management state determined this time in SF211 and the operation state determined in SF213 are included in the update abnormality table (SF214). The update abnormality table, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), shows the operating state prohibited in the management state determined this time in SF211. Specifically, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed, they are in an operating state if they are within business hours, but are normally inactive if they are out of business hours. When the status is “Installation”, it is determined as abnormal if “Operates outside business hours”. Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are not installed, the operation status is always inactive. Therefore, in the update abnormality table, the management status is “shipment”, “storage”, “resale”, and “discard”. When it becomes “operation”, it is determined as abnormal.

  Next, when the determined operating state is included in the update abnormality table (SF214: Y), the machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality (SF215). The means for notifying the abnormality in SF 215 may be any means such as displaying the abnormality on the display device of the history management center 800AF or outputting an alarm sound from the audio output device. The history management center 800AF also reports an abnormality (SF215) when the transition to the management state determined this time is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212: Y).

  The machine history management center 800AF ends the process when the determined operating state is not included in the update abnormality table (SF214: N).

  As described above, the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment uses the payout side table that stores the history information of the front frame 5F in association with the payout control security chip ID and the history information of the game board 26F for main control. The main control side table stored in association with the security chip ID is included in the mass storage device 8005F, and the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on the information stored in the payout side table and the main control side table by the CPU 8001F Judge abnormalities. Therefore, the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment can manage the history by associating the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that may be distributed separately with each security chip ID.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 137 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko gaming machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to the S units. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 137, a slot machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine or S unit) 2SF is provided such that front door 2bSF can be opened and closed with respect to main body frame 2aSF with its left edge as a swing center. It has been. Although not shown in FIG. 137, a CU is connected to the left side of the S base 2SF in the same manner as the P base.

  In S 2SF, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when a game is played on the S platform 2SF, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the S stand 2SF is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout opening.

  Inside the casing of the S unit 2SF, reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from a see-through window provided on the front door 2bSF. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF.

  A touch panel type display 510F is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2LF, 2CF, 2RF of the front door 2bSF. The display 510F is a display corresponding to the P displays 54F, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) similar to the display 54F, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510F is connected to the display control unit 350F of the CU similarly to the display unit 54F of FIG. 65, and display control is performed on the CU side. The indicator 510F is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, but is provided at a lower panel portion (at a position lower than the start switch 7SF shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  In addition, the front door 2bSF has a single BET switch 5SF operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) A MAXBET switch 6SF that is operated when the game is started, a start switch 7SF that is operated when the game starts, and stop switches 8LF, 8CF, and 8RF that are operated when the rotations of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped. Yes.

  In the case of playing a game on S units 2SF, first, similarly to P units, after securing game points using adjacent CUs, the number of bets is set using the game points. The game points can be obtained by withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, points, or a stored medal (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use game points, one-sheet BET switch 5SF or MAXBET switch 6SF may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510F is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7SF is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7SF is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8LF, 8CF, 8RF is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, all the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped, so that one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is set to each reel 2LF, 2CF, When the display is stopped as a result of 2RF, a winning occurs, a game point determined according to the winning is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510F is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 62, the S stand 2SF is provided with a counting button 28SF for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, card return button, and replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 65). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display 510F in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted, and the state where the game points are decreased while the points are increased is displayed on the display 510F. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3F, or may be transmitted to the CU 3F as a status information response via the P stand 2F or the S stand (slot machine) 2SF. It may be.

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be determined not to win is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the S stand 2SF when a start operation is detected. Equivalent to the main controller 161F of the base). This determination is made, for example, by drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base gives the player game points according to the type of winning (adds game points).

  The payout control unit of the S platform 2SF is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). This payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hall in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aSF by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of the S stand 2SF is delivered to the hall from the slot machine manufacturer separately from the main body frame 2aSF in a state of being attached to a board mounting board for connecting wiring. The board mounting board is a board corresponding to the game board 26F shown in FIG. 64, and includes a connector similar to the convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F.

  To connect a mounting mechanism for mounting the board mounting board and a convex drawer connector on the board mounting board side to a predetermined position (for example, below the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF) in the main body frame 2aSF of the S base 2SF. The connector is provided. The attachment mechanism and the connector have the same structure as the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF and the concave drawer connector 33F shown in FIG. 64, and are devised so that the board attachment board can be easily fixed to the attachment mechanism. The wiring extending from the concave drawer connector is connected to the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF, various operation switches (buttons) and the like.

  The S base 2SF has a configuration for detecting the opening of the front door 2bSF corresponding to the front frame 5F of the P base 2F and detecting the connection between the main body frame 2aSF and the board mounting board. The loop power line 500F The main control board is also connected in series.

  With the S units, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and variable display capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before deriving, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine is configured that includes a derivation control means for performing and a granting means for imparting a game value when the winning occurs.

  FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and the transmission / reception mode thereof. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 138 is obtained by replacing the terminology in FIG. 67 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Here, further explanation is omitted.

  As information output to the outside of the P stand 2F, as described above for the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes for the game balls, and the current gaming state A pending storage number signal that can specify the latest pending storage number may be included. The information to be output to the outside of the P stand 2F is not a configuration in which information is output from the information output circuit as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, but is output from the main control unit 161F via the payout control unit 171F. You may make it do.

  As described above, since the game control microcomputer provided on the main control board 16F performs data processing such as addition / subtraction processing, the information on the number of reserved memories is recognized as the latest information. Therefore, a reserved memory number signal that can specify the latest reserved memory number in the current gaming state can be output from the game control microcomputer to the outside via the information output circuit or the payout control microcomputer.

  In addition to the above-described information, the game control microcomputer on the main control board 16F includes a launch stop signal, a radio wave sensor detection signal, a magnet in addition to the information described above. Various information may be transmitted by various signals such as a sensor detection signal, an illegal winning detection signal, and a game state information setting completion signal, and the various information may be managed on the payout control microcomputer side.

  Here, the firing stop signal is a firing stop switch when the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact in the hitting operation handle 25F (a switch for forcibly stopping the firing when operated). When a predetermined firing stop condition is satisfied, such as when the hitting operation handle 25F is not rotated more than a certain rotation angle, or when the CU 3F and the P stand 2F are not electrically connected. Output when judged by the game control microcomputer.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is transmitted to the main control board 16F by the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 163F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves). A sensor error is determined and output based on the determination.

  The magnet sensor detection signal indicates that the magnet sensor (magnet switch) for detecting abnormal magnetism (illegal magnetism) is connected to the main control board 16F (game control microcomputer), and a magnet is used to Based on an illegal game using a magnet such as changing the trajectory, a magnetism sensor signal is input to the main control board 16F based on an illegal game using a magnet, and a magnet sensor error is determined in the game control microcomputer. Is output based on.

  The unauthorized winning detection signal is sent to the winning winning opening of the winning sensor 162F in a state in which the counting winning switch is connected to the main control board 16F and the winning switch is closed. When an illegal winning error is determined by detecting a winning ball in the big winning mouth in the gaming control microcomputer based on the detection signal of the winning sensor for detecting the winning ball of the game, an output is made based on the determination. .

  The game state information setting completion signal is output when setting of various game information (game state information) to be transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is completed when the P table 2F is turned on. Such a game state information setting completion signal is used, for example, as a trigger signal for starting communication between the CU3F side (card unit side) and the P stand 2F side (pachinko gaming machine side).

  In addition to the information as described above, the microcomputer for game control on the main control board 16F from the payout control microcomputer on the payout control board 17F includes the following glass frame / main body frame opening signal, the number of winnings. Various information such as abnormal signal, illegal addition detection signal, radio wave sensor detection signal, proximity sensor abnormal signal, night open detection signal, counting notification request signal, card removal waiting signal, and power saving transition request signal The various information may be managed on the game control microcomputer side.

  The glass frame / main body frame opening signal is generated when the detection signal from the glass door opening detection switch 12F or the front frame opening detection switch 13F is input to the dispensing control board 17F. When the opening of the front frame 5F is determined, the output is made based on the determination.

  The winning number abnormality signal confirms whether the number of winnings per unit time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number in the payout control microcomputer with respect to the number of winnings by the winning detection signal input from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. Whether or not the winning number is abnormal is determined based on the determination, and when it is determined that the winning number is abnormal, an output is made based on the determination.

  The illegal addition detection signal indicates that an illegal addition error is determined by the payout control microcomputer when the payout control board 17F receives a coin addition request from the CU3F in a state other than when the card is inserted into the CU3F. Based on the output.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is a radio wave sensor error in the payout control microcomputer because the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 173F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves) is input to the payout control board 17F. Is determined and output based on the determination.

  Proximity sensor abnormality signal is generated by winning sensor 162F, ball raising switch (upper) 41aF, foul ball detection switch 33AF, out ball detection switch 701F, and shot ball detection switch due to a change in capacitance due to the passage of the ball. It is composed of proximity switches to be detected. For such proximity switches, the dispensing control microcomputer determines whether or not there is an abnormality based on the number of balls detected, and when the abnormality is determined, the determination Is output based on. For example, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the shot of the ball is not detected. On the other hand, when the actually fired ball is collected and detected by the shot ball detecting switch, It is determined that the proximity sensor is abnormal because wrinkles occur in the number of fire balls and recovery balls (out balls).

  The night open detection signal is output when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened as follows. At night when the P platform 2F is turned off, the glass door 6F is detected based on the detection signals output from the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F by the above-described counter operated by the backup power source. The number of times the front frame 5F has been opened is counted. Then, either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened in the payout control microcomputer by the count value of each opening number output from the count counter to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P stand 2F is turned on. Is determined. It is also possible to detect the nighttime opening of only one of the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F and output the nighttime opening detection signal.

  The count notification request signal is output to make a request to notify the count value when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that a count request has been made in response to the operation of the count button. Such a count notification request signal is used, for example, to execute audio output and numerical display related to counting by the main board.

  The card removal waiting signal is output to notify the card return ready state OFF and card removal waiting ON information when the payout control microcomputer determines that the card can be removed by the CU 3F.

  When the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact (for example, when it has not detected for a predetermined period) in the payout control microcomputer, the power saving transition request signal is “0”. When it is determined that a predetermined power saving control transition condition is satisfied, for example, when a card is not inserted into the CU3F or when a variable display is stopped, for example, the brightness of the liquid crystal backlight Is output as an operation request signal for shifting to a power saving state in which predetermined power saving control is performed such as a decrease in light emission and stop of light emission of various lamps.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, an example is shown in which the information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a winning information signal that can identify the winning mouth and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won. Such an external output of the winning information signal may be applied to the P stand 2F.

  In addition, it is possible to transmit various signals such as the reserved memory number signal, the emission stop signal, and the radio wave sensor detection signal described as signals to be transmitted from the game control microcomputer of the P stand 2F to the payout control microcomputer. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above may be applied. In addition, the transmission of various signals such as the glass frame / main body frame opening signal and the winning number abnormality signal described as signals to be transmitted from the payout control microcomputer of the P stand 2F to the game control microcomputer has been described above. You may apply in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) In this embodiment, the addition sequence number and the counting sequence number are defined in the message format as different data, but these may be shared as a request sequence number. In particular, the addition of game balls and the counting of game balls are the opposite processes, so it is unlikely that both processes will occur at the same time. From this point of view, it is possible to reduce the amount of message data by sharing both serial numbers. It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new request is generated until the request sequence number reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the sequence number is updated based on the previously updated value. However, instead of such control, when all the processes corresponding to one request are completed, the request sequence number may be initialized to a predetermined initial value. For example, in the example of FIG. 75, it is conceivable that the counting sequence number included in the last status information response indicating completion of counting is set to a predetermined initial value instead of m + 6.

  Request sequence numbers such as addition sequence numbers and count sequence numbers, and normal sequence numbers are not counted up one by one, but are updated (addition update, subtraction) according to a predetermined rule stored in both P unit 2F and CU3F. Update, update by other arithmetic expressions). In this case, the serial number is not “sequential numbers” such as 1, 2, and 3, but data that is updated based on concepts such as A, B, and C.

  (2) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the gaming system, for example, a game in which there are P reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board that controls the reels. Corresponding to the board, the other configuration corresponds to the front frame of the P units. However, the various detection switches 41aF, 701F, 33AF, the firing control board 31F, and the firing motor 18F in the front frame shown in FIG.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in this embodiment, since the function of displaying the dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510F or 29SF.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, point payout operation) from the remaining amount of a prepaid card, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display device 510F or the display device 29SF and to display a number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. In other words, if there is an operation of the single BET switch 5SF, the bet number setting value is incremented by 1, and the credit is decremented by 1. If the MAXBET switch 6SF is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display device 510F or the display device 29SF and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (3) In the present embodiment, game points are added by consuming card power. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (4) In the present embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (5) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may be one using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (6) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (7) In the present embodiment, when an uncounted game point remains when a card return operation is performed, a message prompting for counting is displayed on the display of P units or the CU side. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (8) During the big hit, the judgment reference value for judging that the number of game balls is full may be increased. In other words, the determination reference value for the full tank determination may be different depending on whether or not the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls from rapidly increasing during the big hit, and making a full tank determination immediately to stop firing.

  (9) The number of game balls when a big hit occurs is memorized. During the big hit, even if the criterion value for full tank is exceeded, the increased number of game balls allowed after the big hit has occurred If it is within a value (for example, 1000 balls), it is good also as what does not determine a full tank.

  (10) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function to turn on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and within 1 second from 1 operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (11) “Predetermined processing” of “recording medium processing means for processing so that predetermined processing can be performed using the game point as the holding point when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected” , CU processing when using a card ejected from the CU inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine (processing to withdraw the possessed ball that can be specified by the card and convert it into a gaming ball , Or shared ball processing, or wagon service processing). Alternatively, the “predetermined process” may be a process in which a prize is exchanged by receiving a card with a prize exchange machine for exchanging prizes and consuming the points specified by the card.

  Further, the above-described “recording medium processing operation for processing so that a predetermined process can be performed as a holding point” is, for example, a card return operation. In addition, the “predetermined process” is a process of recording a score so as to be specified on a card inserted in the CU when a card return operation is detected, and returning the card. Here, “recordably specified” means that the score is directly recorded on the card, and the card ID and score are recorded on the server connected to the CU without recording the score on the card. And a method of storing IDs and points in association with each other in the server.

  (12) If a counting operation is performed while the ball is being fired, the counting operation may be invalidated if the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than a reference value. In addition, even when the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number If the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected is less than the reference value, the counting operation may be invalidated.

  Further, whether or not a game is in progress may be determined based on whether or not a ball firing operation has been detected, and the number of in-game balls (floating balls floating in the game area 27F) becomes zero. Whether or not (not in game) or not (in game) may be determined. Further, it is conceivable to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine to invalidate the counting operation during the game is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF are stopped.

  (13) Referring to FIG. 75, the P platform is provided with a counting ball number counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of the counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (14) The display for prompting the counting operation in FIG. 78 may be a display of “Please count because there are game balls left” in the text, or display the count button 28F on the screen and blink. Such a display may be used. In addition, the P stand 2F that has received the card return ready state ON may display the game balls on the game ball number display 29F in a blinking manner, or when the game ball number display 29F is configured by an image display device. Alternatively, the message described as the above embodiment may be displayed on the game ball number display 29F to prompt the counting operation.

  (15) In order to change the number of game points to be converted in one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (16) Depending on the remaining number of game points, when the number of points counted by one short press operation of the counting button is different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (17) When counting game balls (game points) and converting the points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from the speaker 270F. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (18) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on the counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (19) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is the primary station and the gaming machine is the secondary station. The relationship between and may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (20) In this embodiment, game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side. However, game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU side. Then, it may not be stored. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (21) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54F may be similarly performed on the display 312F.

  (22) In CU3F, the stored number of game balls is updated based on the value of the addition ball counter (addition ball count) and the value of the subtraction ball count counter (subtraction ball count) transmitted from the P platform side. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, for hall use). An error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801F).

  (23) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (holding ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (24) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the player is grasping the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the counting operation means detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (25) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the card return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (26) The gaming system according to the present embodiment includes a point use operation means for executing a predetermined point use process using points. Here, the predetermined score use processing includes processing for executing the wagon service, or processing for dividing and sharing the score (held ball) (processing for dividing and transferring the score to another person). It is a concept. The holding point use operation means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote controller that is given to a clerk of the game store to instruct the CU or the gaming machine to execute the point use processing.

  (27) The sequence control shown in FIGS. 69 to 92 is not limited to the transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3F, P stand 2F, S stand 2SF, etc. For example, CU3F, P The present invention may be applied to a transmission / reception sequence between a plurality of gaming machines such as a table 2F, a jet counter, and a POS terminal. 95 and 96 are applied between the CU control unit 323F inside the CU3F and the security chip (SC) 325b, and between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325aF. May be.

  For example, when processing related to a game ball addition request is applied between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b, the CU control unit 323F transmits a game ball addition request message, and consent to this is transmitted. Alternatively, the SC 325bF returns a rejection message via the communication control IC 325aF based on the response on the P platform 2F side.

  When processing related to a game ball addition request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325aF, the security chip (SC) 325b transmits a game ball addition request message via the CU control unit 323F. Then, the communication control IC 325aF returns a consent or refusal message for this based on the response on the P platform 2F side.

  When processing related to the counting request is applied between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b, the counting request message is sent from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit via the communication control IC 325aF based on the request on the P unit 2F side. The CU control unit 323F sends back a consent or rejection message to the 323F.

  When the processing related to the count request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325aF, the communication control IC 325aF transmits a count request message based on the request on the P platform 2F side, The security chip (SC) 325b returns a rejection message based on an instruction from the CU control unit 323F.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID, but instead of or in addition to that, the identity of the player is determined based on the player's fingerprint, retina and other biomass. A determination may be made.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the card ID matches the insertion time is stored as the current score by the CU, but the gaming machine and the CU3F Control is made so that the score transmitted from the gaming machine is stored as the current score as a further condition that the communication has been started until a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has passed since the communication was interrupted. May be. Specifically, a timer for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) after communication between the gaming machine and the CU3F is interrupted is provided in the CU control unit 323F, and at the start of communication between the gaming machine and the CU3F (at the time of recovery). It is determined whether or not the timer is still timed (in a state where time is not up), and on the further condition that it is a result of determination that the timer is timed, the score sent from the gaming machine is the current value of the CU. It controls to memorize as a score.

  Further, instead of the insertion time, the score transmitted from the gaming machine on the condition that the last serial number used between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F coincides may be stored as the current score. .

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are added. It may be controlled to withdraw and add the number of game balls or game points.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is withdrawn within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings) and the corresponding game points are added, the value withdrawn. However, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add game points that are smaller by the amount equivalent to the consumption tax with respect to the value actually withdrawn.

  (32) In this embodiment, the key management server is installed in the key management center that is remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game hall. Thereby, compared with the case where a key management server is installed outside the game hall, it is easier to speed up communication between the CU and the key management server, and the occurrence rate of communication failures can be reduced.

  (33) The CU control unit 323F receives the board security information (including the board authentication key and update information) from the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F. However, instead of this, the board security information is transmitted from the key management server 800F to the CU control unit 323F without using the hall server 801F between the key management server 800F and the CU control unit 323F. For example, it is conceivable that the key management server 800F and the CU are directly connected to each other, or a relay communication device different from the hall server 801F is provided between the key management server 800F and each CU.

  (34) In the above embodiment, the number of balls automatically counted based on the game interruption operation (simple leaving operation or meal break operation) is temporarily added to the holding ball and written to the card. By doing so, the player who interrupted the game returns and then returns to the original CU3F, and the ball is converted into a game ball 125 by the operation of converting the possession ball into a game ball. Shown what can be converted to play games. However, instead, the counting ball automatically counted at the time of the interruption operation is stored in the CU3F as a custody ball (which also stores the C-ID and the insertion time) different from the game ball and the holding ball, and the holding ball is not added. Discontinue processing by ejecting the card without recording the ball. When the discharge card is reinserted, all the custody balls may be automatically converted into P game balls at once and control may be performed. Alternatively, the custody balls in this case are transmitted from the P platform to the CU based on the interruption operation, stored on the CU side or the hall server side, and automatically from the CU or the hall server when the card is inserted again. It is also possible that information on the custody ball is transmitted to the P platform side and stored as a game ball on the P platform side. Further, in this case, when the information on the custody balls is transmitted, it may be transmitted from the CU to the P units as a game ball addition command.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the interruption operation is added to the holding ball and written to the card and then discharged, the interruption flag is recorded on the card. So that you can't exchange prizes with that card. As a method for prohibiting the exchange of prizes as described above, it is also possible to adopt the following method other than using the suspended flag of the card.

  First, when an interruption operation is performed, the information (including the card ID) is transmitted from the CU to the hall server, and the card of the player suspended on the hall server side is stored as an interruption card. At the time of prize exchange, an inquiry is made to the hall server from POS or the like, and the hall server determines whether or not the card used for prize exchange is an interruption card. Alternatively, all interruption card information may be transmitted from the hall server to the POS side in advance. In addition, if the card used for the exchange of the prize is an interrupted card, the exchange of the prize using the card is prohibited.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine determines that the gaming device (CU) is given the game points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion process for all game points is completed (game points = 0). (Processing that accepts a card with a prize exchange machine and consumes the points specified by the card and enables prize exchange, and inserts a card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating a recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the card return button 322F)) for performing the processing of the CU when used in the same manner.

  (36) In the present embodiment, as an example of the game information, the description has been given by taking the ball number, the game ball, the remaining amount of the card, the storage ball, the number of balls information and the game table information. However, the game information includes other information related to the game on the gaming machine. For example, when a player's favorite character selected or customized by the player can be displayed on variable display means (variable display device) such as the variable display device 278F or the display 54F, information that can specify the character Is also included in the game information. Information on the screen design including the character that matches the player's preference is transmitted to the server at the end of the game in association with the player's card ID and stored, for example, when starting a new game. You may make it download from a server to CU or P stand.

  (37) In the game ball number display 29F, a display is made in which the number of balls decreases one by one in conjunction with the ball firing or counting operation. In addition, the game ball number display 29 </ b> F displays that the number of balls increases by one or a predetermined number of units according to a ball lending operation or the like. When the game ball number display 29F is composed of an image display such as a liquid crystal display device, the number of game balls is not simply displayed digitally, but whether the change in the number of game balls is due to a ball or not is counted. Whether it is due to winning, winning a prize, due to savings, or due to a lending operation, an image according to the type is displayed along with the display update of the number of game balls You may make it do.

  In addition, when the counting operation is performed, the game ball number display 29F performs counting display in conjunction with the counting operation, but when the game ball number display 29F is configured by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device. As with the display 54F, while the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof is decreased, an image display in which the number of holding balls is increased may be performed. In this case, as described above as a modification of the display on the display unit 54F, a display in which the data on the number of game balls is converted to data on the number of balls (eg, a bar graph display) The number of game balls and the number of balls are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of balls is increased while decreasing the number of balls, or the display of moving a part of the number of balls to the number of balls is repeated. It is possible.

  (38) As shown in FIG. 78, in the above embodiment, the card return operation detected in the state where the game balls remain is counted by detecting the counting operation in a predetermined waiting period. It is activated after completion and shifts to card return processing.

  On the other hand, as a process in the case where the counting operation is not detected even after the standby period elapses, for example, the previous card return operation may be invalidated. In this case, since the counting operation is not detected even when the standby period has elapsed, the fact that the card returning operation has been invalidated may be displayed on the display on the CU 3F or P stand 2F side.

  Alternatively, the card return operation detected with the game balls remaining may be invalidated regardless of whether the counting operation is detected in a predetermined waiting period. In this case, the card return process may be executed again by executing the card return operation after counting all the game balls in accordance with the counting operation after the card return operation is detected. Alternatively, when the counting of all game balls is completed, or before and after that, a display for prompting a card return operation may be performed on the display on the CU 3F or P stand 2F side.

  In the present embodiment, if even one game ball remains when a card return operation is detected, the process shown in FIG. 78 is executed. However, the processing shown in FIG. 78 may be executed when the number of game balls remaining when the card return operation is detected is a predetermined number of two or more.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, the counting display speed of the game balls may be made faster than usual. For example, in a normal counting operation, a display in which game balls are counted one by one is displayed, while in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a display in which a plurality of game balls are counted together, or for all games It is conceivable to display such that balls are counted together.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, not all game balls are counted, but a larger number of game balls than the normal counting operation are counted. It is good. For example, normally, a maximum of 100 game balls are counted as one counting operation, but in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a larger number of 200 gaming balls are counted. You may be made to do. Even in this case, when there is a card return operation in advance, the number of counting operations for counting all game balls is reduced compared to when there is no card return operation, and counting of all game balls is completed early. Can do.

  Also, if a card return operation is detected with game balls remaining, even if no counting operation is detected, start counting all game balls, and then proceed to card return processing. Also good. In this case, when counting of all game balls is started, the fact that counting of all game balls is started may be displayed on the P stand 2F or CU 3F. Alternatively, a message for confirming whether or not counting of all game balls may be started is displayed, and a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the touch panel of P stand 2F or CU3F, a card return operation again, etc.) is detected. It is also possible to start counting all game balls on the condition.

  In addition, the card return operation detected during the game (during ball launching) may be invalidated, but the card return operation is not invalidated, and the counting operation during the game is performed on the P platform side. The counting process based on the above may be invalidated.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, CU3F determines whether the number of game balls is 0, when card return operation is detected. However, such a determination may be made by the P base 2F. In this case, for example, when a card return operation is detected, data indicating the presence of a card return operation is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F, and the number of game balls stored in the P stand 2F that receives it is 0. It is determined whether or not. If it is 0, the number of game balls is 0 or data that permits card return is sent to CU3F, while if it is not 0, the number of game balls is not 0, waiting for card return or prohibition of card return. The indicated data is transmitted to the CU3F.

  In the above embodiment, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P table 2F determines whether or not a card return operation is detected before the operation is detected. However, such determination means may be provided in the CU3F. In this case, for example, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P base 2F transmits data indicating that to the CU 3F. In response, the CU3F may determine whether or not there has been a card return operation within a predetermined period before receiving the data.

  In the above-described embodiment, the P table 2F detects the counting operation, while the CU 3F detects the card return operation, while the CU 3F detects the counting operation, while the P table 2F detects the card returning operation. Alternatively, both operations may be detected by the P stand 2F or the CU 3F. Further, both the counting button and the card card return button may be attached to the CU3F or the P stand 2F, and one of them may be the CU3F or the P stand 2F.

  (39) The presence or absence of a change in the number of holding balls or game balls is checked on the CU or P stand. If the number of holding balls or game balls does not change for a predetermined period, the fact is notified on the CU or P stand. You may do it. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). This makes it easier for the store clerk to grasp, for example, a table that has been abandoned while the remaining few balls are left unattended.

  (40) Alternatively, when a player's game ball changes even though the card is not inserted into the CU, the fact may be notified by the CU or P platform. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). Thereby, for example, after the game is finished and the card is discharged, it becomes easy for the store clerk to grasp the stand where the ball caught on the game board wins and the game ball is left as it is paid out.

  (41) In the present embodiment, the CU 3F compares and determines the previous game table information and the latest game table information from the P table 2F with the data stored on its own, and the data on the P table 2F side is not improperly padded. Confirm that the data is correct. If an error is determined on the CU3F side, such a situation is simply caused by the exchange of the CU3F (regular data to be compared is not stored in the CU3F after the exchange), and is based on fraud. Since there is a possibility that it is not a thing, the store clerk confirms the error and cancels the error with a portable terminal device such as a remote control. However, when the CU 3F has been replaced with a new one in this way, the CU 3F may not perform the above error determination at all. Alternatively, the above error determination function may not be provided in the CU3F regardless of whether or not it has been replaced.

  (42) In the present embodiment, a card, which is a recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player, is inserted into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F at the start of the game, and is removed from the card insertion / discharge slot 309F after the game ends. The configuration has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card may be placed on the card reading unit at the start of the game and removed from the card reading unit after the game ends. In other words, the recording medium receiving means for receiving the recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player may be attached to the recording medium receiving means at the start of the game and removed from the recording medium receiving means after the game ends.

  (43) In the present embodiment, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the information waiting for card removal, and the P stand 2F that has received the notification of the information indicates that “please remove the card” 278F. The configuration for notifying the card removal such as displaying on the card has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CU 3F displays “please remove the card” on the display 54F and / or the display 312F while notifying the P stand 2F of the information waiting for the card removal. It may be configured to notify the card removal on the CU side.

  (44) In the present embodiment, the P stand 2F receives the status information request command including ON waiting for card removal = ON until the status information request command including OFF waiting for card removal is received. The configuration for continuing the notification of sampling has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the P stand 2F is waiting for card removal = after receiving a status information request command including ON, even if a card removal notification is given for a certain period of time, it is still waiting for card removal = The card removal notification may be intermittently performed after the status information request command including ON is received until the status information request command including OFF is received = OFF.

  (45) In the present embodiment, in the counting history sequence, the P table 2F receives the “store code” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F when the card is received and the “store code” held by the P table 2F. In the above description, the count history recovery process is performed when they match, and the count history recovery process is not performed when they do not match. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the counting history sequence, the P table 2F uses the “store code” and “SC substrate ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F when the card is received, and the P board 2F. You may comprise so that a match determination with the "store code" and "SC board ID" which are hold | maintained may be performed. Further, the P store 2F does not determine whether or not the “store code” matches in the counting history sequence, and the “store code” and the “store code” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F when the card is received when the recovery request is received. At least one of “SC board ID” is matched with at least one of “store code” and “SC board ID” held on P platform 2F, and if they match, recovery processing is performed. In the case of disagreement, the game may be prohibited from being continued.

  (46) An IC tag may be attached to the pachinko ball. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify which pachinko ball is at the time of launch and at the time of passing through any one of the winning areas (winning entrance or gate). For this reason, in the counting process, it is possible to identify the correspondence relationship between the firing intensity T of the same pachinko ball identified by the IC tag and the passing area. As a result, it is possible to more accurately determine which region the pachinko ball tends to pass according to the launch intensity. Furthermore, by associating the ball unit price (see FIG. 69) transmitted from the CU3F with a pachinko ball with an IC tag, it is possible to change the unit price for each ball, and to determine the remaining number of balls and the scheduled time. Accordingly, the ball unit price can be changed flexibly and the degree of freedom of the game by the player can be expanded.

  (47) If the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed by a player, the above-described firing intensity correction process cannot be performed. Therefore, it may be detected and notified that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed. Further, when the firing intensity is stable at a constant value, it may be determined that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed.

  (48) For example, whether or not the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F can be detected by a touch sensor.

  Therefore, for example, when it is detected that the player is not touching the hitting ball operating handle 25F, the above-described firing intensity correction process may be performed.

  Further, in the firing abnormality determination process, when it is detected that the player does not touch the hitting operation handle 25F and it is detected that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed, it is determined that there is a launching abnormality. It may be.

  (49) In the present embodiment, the hall control 900 acquires the information on the P base 2F via the CU 3F. However, the hall control 900 directly receives the information on the P base 2F from the P base 2F without passing through the CU 3F. The structure which acquires may be sufficient.

  (50) In the present embodiment, when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of the CU 3F is the card insertion state, the P base 2F transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of the CU 3F is the card insertion state, a warning is displayed on the display 54F or the like, or notification is given to the host server. May also be notified.

  (51) In this embodiment, when “Closed” is set, a card ID = 0 and a card insertion time = 0 for a gaming machine in which no card is inserted and a game ball remains in the P stand 2F The configuration is described in which a counting process is performed in which it is assumed that a virtual card is inserted, and the remaining game balls are counted, stored in the card, and returned. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the card ID of the virtual card that is considered to be inserted is counted as the card ID of the card that was inserted immediately before closing, and the remaining game balls are inserted immediately before closing. The configuration may be such that it automatically associates with the card that has been stored.

  (52) In the present embodiment, when the recovery request 2 command is transmitted to the P base 2F even though it is determined that the recovery request is not required by the CU 3F, the recovery determination of the recovery process is again performed by the P base 2F. A configuration has been described in which processing NG is notified to the CU 3F when it is not necessary. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is unnecessary to perform the recovery process determination again on the P platform 2F, a warning is displayed on the display 54F or the like, or a notification to that effect is sent to the host server. You may do it.

  (53) In the present embodiment, even if the key management server 800F transmits the health check request command and does not reach the CU control unit 323F, for example, for 10 days, it is determined that the health check request time limit is exceeded, The configuration in which the timed operation function of the CU 3F or the P stand 2F is invalidated has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of days until the timed operation function of the CU 3F or P stand 2F is invalidated is displayed on the display 54F, or the timed operation function having a plurality of restriction levels is stepwise. It may be invalidated.

  (54) In the present embodiment, the setting and release control of the alarm setting has been described in the relationship between the alarm setting based on fraud to the P unit 2F and the alarm setting based on the P unit line disconnection. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to alarm setting setting and release control in relation to the alarm setting based on fraud on the P base 2F and another alarm setting based on other fraud on the P base 2F. The alarm setting may be applied to the setting and cancellation of the alarm setting in three or more relationships between the alarm setting based on a plurality of frauds on the P unit 2F and the alarm setting based on the disconnection of the P unit.

  (55) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the security-related information is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be stored in a register (for example, data reception register 723bF) in the communication control circuit 171bF. As a result, the security-related information is stored in the communication control circuit 171bF while being encrypted, and the security is further improved.

  (56) In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, the P base itself determines that the P base 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU 3DF in the past, The configuration in which the flag indicating the determination result is transmitted to the commercial CU3F and detected by the SC325bF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The P base itself determines that the P base 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU 3DF in the past, and the P base itself detects and notifies. Also in the configuration, the configuration may be such that it is detected by the SC 325bF of the CU3F based on the identification ID, based on the identification ID, that the P board 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU3DF.

  (57) In the above-described embodiment, authentication is performed using various authentication keys, but authentication may be performed using, for example, an authentication ID instead of the various authentication keys.

  (58) You may comprise the above-mentioned indicator 54F and 510F with a display with a touch panel. Further, the information transmitted / received between the P platform and the CU is not limited to that described in the above-described embodiment, and it is a game that determines what information is output from the P platform to the CU. You may enable it to perform input setting by touch operation with the touch panel of the display units 54F and 510F.

  Also, in the S stand 2SF, the information output from the S stand 2SF is converted and transmitted to Hallcon in the same manner as the P stand 2F described above. As information to be converted, for example, a big bonus prize or a regular bonus prize is given. And winning information such as various small role winnings, information indicating that the replay time is in progress, the number of additions and subtractions in FIG. Further, the information to be converted may be the number of coins to be paid out when coins are paid out with winning.

(59) When the payout control unit 171F receives the value (= 63) in which the round flag is raised, the abnormality control process is executed by adopting one or two or more of those listed in the following ac You may control as follows.
a Display unit (for example, a 7-segment display 50F and a variable display device that variably displays identification information (design)) by the payout control unit 171F or the main control unit 161F that receives abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F Is displayed.
b CU3F that has received the abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F performs abnormality notification such as an error number.
c An abnormality notification such as an error number is performed in a host device such as a hall management computer that has received the abnormality information from the CU3F.

  (60) In the present embodiment, information specifying the front frame 5F, storage information, resale information, disposal information, and the like are included as history information of the front frame 5F stored in association with the payout control security chip ID in the payout side table. An example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, maintenance information, repair information, and the like may be included as history information of the front frame 5F. Similarly, in the present embodiment, information specifying the game board 26F, storage information, resale information, discard information, and the like are stored as history information of the game board 26F stored in the main control side table in association with the main control security chip ID. Examples included are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, maintenance information, repair information, and the like may be included as the history information of the game board 26F.

  (61) In the present embodiment, after a manufacturer, a warehouse, or the like completes operations such as shipping, installation, and storage, necessary information (for example, shown in FIG. 134, for example, from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF). The delivery side table and the main control side table are updated by inputting the shipping date, installation date and time, removal date, sales company name, and disposal date). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a manufacturer or a warehouse company fills in application documents with necessary information and sends the information to the history management center 800AF. The payout side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting necessary information from a terminal or the like. Note that a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF is also a terminal connected directly to the machine history management center 800AF (for example, an internal terminal in the machine history management center 800AF) via a communication line. It may be a terminal (for example, a terminal of a warehouse company or a second-hand company connected via the Internet).

  (62) In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the payout side table and the main control side table are stored in one large capacity storage device 8005F. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the payout side table and the main control side table are stored separately in a plurality of large capacity storage devices, the large capacity storage device that stores the payout side table and the main control side table are stored. It may be divided into a mass storage device. Further, the payout side table and the main control side table stored in the large-capacity storage device can erase the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F for each security chip ID. Even if it is associated with a pair of security chip IDs, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F can be deleted separately for each security chip ID. Thereby, even if it is the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (the period used is long compared with the front frame 5F) from which the period used is different, it can delete separately, respectively, and it can manage appropriately, respectively. it can.

  (63) In the present embodiment, an example has been shown in which a manufacturer other than the hall, a warehouse company, etc. update the payout side table and the main control side table by inputting necessary information to the machine history management center 800AF. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the payout side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting information necessary for the hall itself to the machine history management center 800AF.

  (64) In this embodiment, when a second-hand trader resells the front frame 5F and the game board 26F to another hall and installs them, the resale information is stored as history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when moving to another hole in the same group as the hole in which the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed (for example, a hole with the same corporate code), the front frame 5F and the game board The movement information may be stored in the history information as a simple movement of 26F (management state (status) from “installation” to “installation”). That is, even if the installation of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F moves between holes of the same corporate code, it is not determined as abnormal. In addition, if the movement of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is permitted between halls of the same corporate code and within the same prefecture, and if it moves to other prefectures between halls of the same corporate code, the same processing as resale is performed. May be.

  (65) In the present embodiment, the machine history management center 800AF is set as follows, for example. In the machine history management center 800AF, a user registered in the system and authenticated by clear authentication is logged into the system. Authentication at login is as follows: (a) The specified user ID exists in the system. (B) The specified user is within the account expiration date. (C) The specified user is not account-locked. (D) The entered password matches the password of the specified user ID. (E) If the current password is not within the validity period, the user is logged in, but only the user's own password change and logout can be used, and a message is displayed indicating that the password needs to be changed. If the password is changed, log out to confirm the use of the new password.

  When the authentication is successful, the history management center 800AF clears the number of login failures and the continuous login error date / time of the user. On the other hand, the history management center 800AF records the number of login failures when the authentication fails or when the user actually exists. Each time the number of login failures reaches [the maximum number of login attempts] (when it becomes an integer multiple), the date and time when the account is locked is set.

  The history management center 800AF updates / sets the password expiration date when (a) a new user is registered, (b) when the password is cleared, and (c) when the user changes the password. The updated / set password is valid from that point until the [Password Validity Period] elapses.

  If the authentication fails [the maximum number of login attempts] in the same session, the history management center 800AF transitions to the login NG screen instead of the login screen and does not attempt to log in.

  The history management center 800AF warns that at the time of login, the password may expire if the password of the user expires within the [password expiration warning period]. The warning is displayed on the login completion screen, for example, but if there is no message to be displayed on the login completion screen, the login completion screen is not displayed and the screen transits to the HOME menu.

  The machine history management center 800AF determines that (a) the number of failed login attempts by a user exceeds the [number of failed user login failures] (permanent account lock state), or (b) ] Has not passed (temporary account lock state), lock account.

  The history management center 800AF updates / sets the account expiration date when (a) a new user is registered or (b) the validity period is updated from the user information screen. The account can be used during the period from the account activation start date to the account activation end date.

  The history management center 800AF sets, for example, 20 as the maximum number of accounts that can be generated at one time at the time of initial introduction. Here, [the maximum number of login attempts] is the number of times that the account is locked for a certain period of time due to consecutive failed login attempts. [User Invalidation Login Failure Count] is the number of times the account is permanently locked due to consecutive login attempt failures, and is 100, for example, at the time of initial introduction. [Login attempt refusal time] is a period in which the account is locked for a certain period of time due to failed login attempts, and is 30 minutes at the time of initial introduction. [Password Validity Period] is a password validity period set when the password is changed, and is 90 days at the time of initial introduction. [Password Expiration Warning Period] is a period in which an account password is about to expire, and is 14 days at the time of initial introduction.

  The machine history management center 800AF sets the minimum number of characters of a password to 8 characters, for example, at the time of initial introduction, and sets the number of generations (including the current) to prevent re-use of passwords to 3 generations at the time of initial introduction. The history management center 800AF is registered on the condition that the operator information of the corresponding user is registered in order to register the user information. The business operator information includes attribute information such as the business type and address of each business operator involved in the work of the history management center 800AF.

  The machine history management center 800AF cannot basically cancel the management state (status) of the gaming machine after input, and if an error occurs due to an erroneous operation or the like, a comment is entered in the “total machine history remarks column”. Make it clear so that others can understand. However, since there is a possibility of erroneous insertion, it is possible to cancel only the status entered from the game machine status update screen. When revocation is possible, control is performed by authority so that only a limited number of people can perform revocation. Further, when searching the machine history in order to change the management state (status) of the gaming machine, the machine history management center 800AF searches only for the latest management state (status) of the gaming machine.

The machine history management center 800AF manages the types of data and the retention periods for each type as follows, for example.
(1) Account-related data (for example, business operator information, account information, etc.): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion, not physical deletion.
(2) Master information such as gaming machine model (for example, gaming machine model master): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion, and physical deletion is not performed.
(3) Information that is the basis of machine history management (for example, gaming machine chip shipment information, gaming machine shipment information, etc.): Basically, changes can be made until management is started, but thereafter editing is impossible. , Manage permanently.
(4) Machine history information (for example, history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F): Since it is basically input of fact information, changes after input are not allowed and are managed permanently.
(5) Information notified from the card unit key management center (for example, fraud detection, etc.): Information detected by the system, and is not allowed to be changed and managed permanently.
(6) Input journals to the system (for example, Web input log, online input log, system linkage input file, etc.): 14 days are stored for each type of input and each node.
(7) Output journal from system (for example, Web output log, online output log, system transmission file, etc.): 7 days are kept for each type of output and for each node.
(8) Record of business communication of concentration / distribution (for example, distribution schedule, etc.): Information is retained for about 7 days.
(9) System temporary file (for example, CSV upload file): Deleted after application behavior. However, it is deleted when it is confirmed that the cleaning batch is unnecessary in consideration of abnormal termination.
(10) Model information that has not been updated for a long period of time (for example, model information that has not been updated for a long period of time): Holds two generations.

  In the history management center 800AF, information on the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which the relationship between the management state (status) before the update and the management state (status) after the update becomes abnormal with respect to the abnormality in the management state (status). Can be extracted, or only the information can be output to a file. Therefore, based on the information output in the file, it is possible to notify the user of management status (status) update omission and to update the management status (status) correctly. It should be noted that a user whose management status (status) is not updated may not only be contacted but also interviewed to confirm the correct management status (status) and take a response. In addition, the machine history management center 800AF performs notification such as contacting all of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that are currently in an abnormal management state (status). In addition, the latest information (at the time of file output) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that have become abnormal can be downloaded from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF.

  In the history management center 800AF, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F for which the management status (status) has not been updated for a long period of time becomes a management status (status) other than “discard” or “other”. It is possible to extract only the information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, or to output only the information to a file. For abnormalities in which the management state (status) has not been updated for a long time, information at the time of processing is extracted by batch processing and downloaded from a terminal connected to the history management center 800AF. In addition, a threshold for the maximum number of files (at the time of initial construction: 100,000 records) is set for one file to be downloaded, and when the threshold is exceeded, output is performed to another file. Furthermore, when downloading a file, the results of processing on the same day are collected and output as a compressed file.

  (66) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the removal information is input to the history management center 800AF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and used movement information, discard information, trade-in information, and the like are stored in the history management center 800AF. When the information is input, the removal information may be automatically registered in the history management center 800AF. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to manage the history of the gaming machine by assuming that it has been removed from the hall, and to reduce the burden of inputting the removal information from the hall to the history management system.

  (67) In the present embodiment, a configuration is shown in which shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line after a gaming machine manufacturer ships a gaming machine to a hall. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may also be adopted in which shipping information is automatically registered in the machine history management center 800AF when the gaming machine manufacturer inputs information for shipping gaming machines to the hall. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the shipping state history from being forgotten without being registered.

  (68) In the present embodiment, when a game machine including the front frame 5F and the game board 26F constituting the P stand 2F installed in the hall is installed in the hall, the enclosed circulation pachinko machine (P stand 2F) shipped by the game machine manufacturer The history management center 800AF stores the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified from the P table 2F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in each, and is notified from the stored information and the P table 2F. Checking with game machine installation information. If the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal as a result of the collation, for example, an error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or a display 312F, or an error has occurred in the hall management computer or the hall server 801F. The error notification signal is transmitted, and the abnormality is notified. However, the machine history management center 800AF is not limited to the configuration for notifying the abnormality as a result of the collation, but the P frame 2F or the front frame 5F constituting the P table 2F and the game board 26F determined to be abnormal. It may be configured to prohibit gaming. The machine history management center 800AF may be configured to temporarily allow a game on the P table 2F for a certain period of time even if it is determined to be abnormal, so as not to hinder the hall business activities.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 Pachinko gaming machine, 2 gaming board, 3 gaming machine frame, 4A, 4B special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 6A normal winning ball device, 6B normal variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game Effect Lamp, 11 Main Board, 12 Production Control Board, 13 Audio Control Board, 14 Lamp Control Board, 15 Relay Board, 20 Normal Symbol Display, 21 Gate Switch, 22A, 22B Start Port Switch, 23 Count Switch, 100 Microcomputer for game control, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104, 124 Random number circuit, 105, 125 I / O, 120 Production control CPU, 123 Display control unit, 2F Pachinko game machine 2SF slot machine, 3F card unit, 16F main control base , 17F payout control board, 26F game board, 54F, 312F display, 309F card insertion / discharge port, 319F replay button, 320F IR light receiving unit, 321F lending button, 322F return button, 161F main control unit, 325F display control unit , 171F payout control unit, 323F CU control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to a specific state advantageous to the player,
Multiple types of winning areas,
Hold storage means for storing information relating to variable display as hold information;
Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display in a corresponding display area corresponding to the variable display being executed and a hold display area different from the corresponding display area;
Display mode control means for controlling the display mode of the specific display;
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display;
Signal output means for outputting a signal capable of specifying a winning of the game medium,
The display mode control means can change the display mode of the specific display,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode, and the ratio controlled to the specific state is the normal mode and the specific mode. Including a notice mode higher than the special mode,
The display mode of the specific display displayed in either the corresponding display area or the hold display area is displayed in the special mode at any one of a plurality of timings, and the display mode of the specific display is the multi-timing display mode. The ratio controlled to the specific state is different between when the special mode is displayed at the first timing and when the special mode is displayed at the second timing later than the first timing.
The display mode of the specific display is changed to the notice mode at a higher rate when the display mode of the specific display is displayed in the special mode than when displayed in the normal mode,
The execution frequency of the suggestive effect is higher when the display mode of the specific display is displayed in the special mode than when displayed in the normal mode,
The rate of change to the notice mode differs between the specific display of the special mode displayed in the corresponding display area and the specific display of the special mode displayed in the hold display area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images